Académique Documents
Professionnel Documents
Culture Documents
ESA PT
Users guide
SCIA.ESA PT
SCIA.ESA PT
GETTING STARTED
31
Disclaimer ................................................................................................................................31
Contact address ......................................................................................................................31
SCIA Group n.v. ................................................................................................................................... 31
SCIA W+B Software b.v....................................................................................................................... 31
SCIA CZ, s.r.o....................................................................................................................................... 31
SCIA CZ, s.r.o....................................................................................................................................... 31
Introduction..............................................................................................................................32
About program ................................................................................................................... 32
Program mission ................................................................................................................................... 32
Theoretical background......................................................................................................................... 32
Types of calculation .............................................................................................................................. 32
Code checks .......................................................................................................................................... 32
About documentation ......................................................................................................... 32
Purpose and contents............................................................................................................................. 32
Style ...................................................................................................................................................... 33
Installation................................................................................................................................33
Installation options ............................................................................................................. 33
Local installation .............................................................................................................................. 33
Starting the installation ......................................................................................................................... 33
Selection of target folder ....................................................................................................................... 33
Choice of installation type..................................................................................................................... 33
Maintaining and uninstalling the application ........................................................................................ 34
Update to a higher version .................................................................................................................... 34
Installation on a network server........................................................................................................ 34
Connection to the network installation ............................................................................................. 34
System requirements ......................................................................................................... 35
Hardware requirements ......................................................................................................................... 35
Software requirements .......................................................................................................................... 35
Login requirements ............................................................................................................................... 35
Demo version ..................................................................................................................... 36
Uninstalling program .......................................................................................................... 36
Running the program ..............................................................................................................36
Starting program ................................................................................................................ 36
Short-cut on desktop ............................................................................................................................. 36
Start menu ............................................................................................................................................. 36
Windows explorer or another file manager ........................................................................................... 36
Program files and folders ................................................................................................... 37
Folders .............................................................................................................................................. 37
Program folders..................................................................................................................................... 37
User folders ........................................................................................................................................... 37
Temporary folder .................................................................................................................................. 37
Project folder......................................................................................................................................... 37
Files .................................................................................................................................................. 37
Upgrade from other products ................................................................................................38
Upgrade from EPW ............................................................................................................ 38
39
Terminology .............................................................................................................................39
Global terms.......................................................................................................................................... 39
Geometric entities ................................................................................................................................. 39
Cross-sections ....................................................................................................................................... 40
Co-ordinate systems ...............................................................................................................40
SCIA.ESA PT
Introduction to co-ordinate systems ................................................................................... 40
Global co-ordinate system ................................................................................................. 40
User-defined co-ordinate system ....................................................................................... 40
Entity co-ordinate systems................................................................................................. 41
Introduction to entity co-ordinate systems................................................................... 41
Cross-section co-ordinate system ............................................................................... 41
Principal (or main) axes ........................................................................................................................ 41
Centroidal axes...................................................................................................................................... 41
Geometric co-ordinate system............................................................................................................... 41
Orientation of the cross-section co-ordinate system with reference to the beam local co-ordinate system
.............................................................................................................................................................. 42
Beam co-ordinate system............................................................................................ 42
Geometric block co-ordinate system ........................................................................... 42
Point definition co-ordinate systems .................................................................................. 43
Introduction to point definition ..................................................................................... 43
Cartesian co-ordinate system...................................................................................... 43
Cylindrical co-ordinate system .................................................................................... 44
Spherical co-ordinate system ...................................................................................... 44
Conventions for applied physical quantities........................................................................45
Input quantities conventions .............................................................................................. 45
Axes ...................................................................................................................................................... 45
External forces ...................................................................................................................................... 45
Prescribed displacement and rotation.................................................................................................... 45
Output quantities conventions............................................................................................ 45
Axes ...................................................................................................................................................... 45
Displacement and rotation..................................................................................................................... 45
Reactions............................................................................................................................................... 45
Internal forces ....................................................................................................................................... 45
Stress ..................................................................................................................................................... 45
Units..........................................................................................................................................46
Introduction to units............................................................................................................ 46
Length units........................................................................................................................ 46
Imperial length units......................................................................................................................... 46
Display style of length units ............................................................................................................. 46
Format ................................................................................................................................................... 46
Precision................................................................................................................................................ 46
Unit symbol........................................................................................................................................... 47
Input of length units.......................................................................................................................... 47
Angle units ......................................................................................................................... 48
Format ................................................................................................................................................... 48
Precision................................................................................................................................................ 48
49
SCIA.ESA PT
Syntax for input of co-ordinates ....................................................................................................... 53
General syntax for the definition of a point........................................................................................... 53
Syntax for the definition of a point in Cartesian co-ordinates............................................................... 54
Syntax for the definition of a point in polar co-ordinates...................................................................... 54
Syntax for the definition of a point in spherical co-ordinates ............................................................... 54
Syntax for the definition of a point in cylindrical co-ordinates............................................................. 54
Property table..................................................................................................................... 55
Type of property table cells................................................................................................................... 55
Combination of cell types in one table cell ........................................................................................... 55
Interconnection between table cells and graphical window .................................................................. 55
Progress bar....................................................................................................................... 56
Application windows........................................................................................................... 57
Introduction to application windows............................................................................. 57
Graphical window ........................................................................................................ 57
Graphical window pop-up menu.................................................................................. 58
Document window ....................................................................................................... 59
Preview window........................................................................................................... 60
Property window................................................................................................................. 60
Property window .......................................................................................................... 60
Action buttons.............................................................................................................. 61
Action buttons in the Property Window................................................................................................ 61
Action buttons in Database managers ................................................................................................... 62
Detailed properties ...................................................................................................... 63
Example....................................................................................................................... 63
Database managers........................................................................................................... 65
Introduction to database manager............................................................................... 65
Layout and operation of a database manager ............................................................ 65
List of defined database entities ............................................................................................................ 66
Property table ........................................................................................................................................ 66
Graphical window ................................................................................................................................. 66
Control buttons...................................................................................................................................... 66
Filter...................................................................................................................................................... 66
Opening the database manager.................................................................................. 67
Pop-up menu of database manager............................................................................ 68
PROGRAM SETTINGS
69
Language of program..............................................................................................................69
Language of the program................................................................................................... 69
User level..................................................................................................................................69
Level of the user interface.................................................................................................. 69
Standard level........................................................................................................................................ 69
Application options .................................................................................................................70
Workspace settings............................................................................................................ 70
Environment settings ......................................................................................................... 70
Window settings.................................................................................................................................... 71
Rendering .............................................................................................................................................. 71
Hidden lines .......................................................................................................................................... 71
Line pattern length ................................................................................................................................ 71
Command settings................................................................................................................................. 72
Skins...................................................................................................................................................... 72
Other parameters ................................................................................................................................... 72
Graphic templates settings ................................................................................................ 72
Directories settings ............................................................................................................ 72
Project settings................................................................................................................... 73
Protection settings ............................................................................................................. 73
Type ...................................................................................................................................................... 73
Software floating protection.................................................................................................................. 73
Adjusting the application options ....................................................................................... 74
Project settings........................................................................................................................74
SCIA.ESA PT
Basic project settings ......................................................................................................... 74
Basic project data ........................................................................................................ 74
Project filename .................................................................................................................................... 74
Project data............................................................................................................................................ 74
Structure ................................................................................................................................................ 74
Material ................................................................................................................................................. 75
Project level........................................................................................................................................... 75
Model .................................................................................................................................................... 75
Code ...................................................................................................................................................... 76
Functionality settings ................................................................................................... 76
Non-linearity ......................................................................................................................................... 76
Stability ................................................................................................................................................. 76
Dynamics .............................................................................................................................................. 76
Initial stress ........................................................................................................................................... 77
Subsoil................................................................................................................................................... 77
CAD shape ............................................................................................................................................ 77
Climatic loads ....................................................................................................................................... 77
Parameters............................................................................................................................................. 77
Prestressing ........................................................................................................................................... 77
Steel....................................................................................................................................................... 77
Loads settings ............................................................................................................. 77
Wind region........................................................................................................................................... 78
Snow region .......................................................................................................................................... 78
Combinations settings ................................................................................................. 78
Procedure for setting project data ............................................................................... 78
Display style settings ......................................................................................................... 79
Display Setup palettes................................................................................................. 79
Loading and saving defined settings................................................................................................. 79
Loading and saving settings for all the palettes at the same time.......................................................... 79
Loading and saving settings for a separate palette ................................................................................ 80
Colours Setup.............................................................................................................. 80
Font Setup ................................................................................................................... 81
Beam type Setup ......................................................................................................... 81
Dimension line Setup .................................................................................................. 82
Units Setup .................................................................................................................. 82
Unit "parameters".................................................................................................................................. 83
Output format........................................................................................................................................ 83
Scales ................................................................................................................................ 83
Adjusting the scales..................................................................................................... 83
Fast multiplying of scales ............................................................................................ 85
Example of scales setup ............................................................................................. 85
Advanced settings.............................................................................................................. 87
Document Setup.......................................................................................................... 87
Picture gallery Setup ................................................................................................... 87
FE mesh Setup............................................................................................................ 87
Solver Setup ................................................................................................................ 88
89
SCIA.ESA PT
Making a selection from the command line...................................................................................... 92
Removing the entities from selection................................................................................. 92
"[Ctrl] key" method............................................................................................................................... 93
"Inverted selection mode" method ........................................................................................................ 93
Making a selection based on a specific property ............................................................... 93
Adjusting the filter for selections ........................................................................................ 94
Filter for service .................................................................................................................................... 94
Filter for tree ......................................................................................................................................... 94
Modifying a selection ......................................................................................................... 94
Removal of entities from the selection.................................................................................................. 94
Adding another entity into the selection................................................................................................ 94
Applying a selection ........................................................................................................... 95
Applying a pre-created selection........................................................................................................... 95
Applying a post-created selection ......................................................................................................... 95
Clearing a selection ........................................................................................................... 95
Saving and reading a selection.......................................................................................... 95
Selections versus editing of properties .............................................................................. 96
Editing in the property window for one selected entity......................................................................... 96
Editing in the property window for multiple selected entities of the same type ................................... 96
Editing in the property window for multiple selected entities of various types .................................... 96
Controlling the selection-versus-editing process ............................................................... 96
Selections of slabs with openings ...................................................................................... 97
Activity......................................................................................................................................99
Introduction to activity ........................................................................................................ 99
Activity types ...................................................................................................................... 99
Switching the activity On or Off.......................................................................................... 99
Activity according to layers .............................................................................................. 100
Activity according to current selection ............................................................................. 100
Making the selected members active .............................................................................................. 100
Making the selected members inactive........................................................................................... 100
Activity according to working plane.................................................................................. 100
Activity according to clipping box ..................................................................................... 101
Inverting the activity ......................................................................................................... 101
Controlling the display style of inactive members............................................................ 101
Layers .................................................................................................................................... 101
Introduction to layers........................................................................................................ 101
Layers manager ............................................................................................................... 102
Displaying and hiding a layer.............................................................................................................. 102
Defining a new layer ........................................................................................................ 103
Applying defined layers.................................................................................................... 103
Displaying and hiding a layer ........................................................................................... 103
Ignoring selected layers in calculation ............................................................................. 104
User co-ordinate system (UCS) .......................................................................................... 104
Introduction to a user co-ordinate system........................................................................ 104
Adjusting a user co-ordinate system................................................................................ 105
UCS defined by three points ..................................................................................... 105
Horizontal UCS defined by one point ........................................................................ 105
Vertical UCS defined by two points ........................................................................... 105
Vertical UCS perpendicular to global X-axis ............................................................. 105
Vertical UCS perpendicular to global Y-axis ............................................................. 106
UCS identical with the global co-ordinate system ..................................................... 106
UCS perpendicular to the current UCS's X-axis........................................................ 106
UCS perpendicular to the current UCS's Y-axis........................................................ 106
UCS defined according to an entity's LCS ................................................................ 106
UCS defined from a view direction ............................................................................ 107
Editing a user co-ordinate system.................................................................................... 107
UCS Manager............................................................................................................ 107
Association of the active graphical window with a particular UCS.................................................... 107
Modifying an existing UCS ........................................................................................ 108
Defining a new UCS .................................................................................................. 108
SCIA.ESA PT
Copying an existing UCS .......................................................................................... 109
Moving an existing UCS ............................................................................................ 109
Rotating an existing UCS .......................................................................................... 109
Deleting an existing UCS .......................................................................................... 110
Storing the user co-ordinate system.......................................................................... 110
Using a user co-ordinate system ..................................................................................... 110
Rules for using a UCS............................................................................................... 110
UCS in windows ................................................................................................................................. 110
Modification of an existing UCS in the UCS manager ....................................................................... 111
Modification of an existing UCS by means of modification functions ............................................... 111
Using a UCS in the graphical window ....................................................................... 111
Using a UCS from the command line ........................................................................ 111
Working plane....................................................................................................................... 111
Introduction to a working plane ........................................................................................ 111
Adjusting a working plane ................................................................................................ 112
Cursor SNAP modes ............................................................................................................ 112
Introduction to SNAP modes............................................................................................ 112
Grid SNAP modes............................................................................................................ 112
Object SNAP modes ........................................................................................................ 112
Adjusting a SNAP mode .................................................................................................. 113
Adjusting the temporary one-step SNAP mode ............................................................... 114
Dot grid.................................................................................................................................. 114
Introduction to a dot grid .................................................................................................. 114
Adjusting dot grid parameters .......................................................................................... 115
Using the dot grid ............................................................................................................. 115
Displaying the dot grid........................................................................................................................ 116
Setting the snap mode to use the dot grid............................................................................................ 116
Line grid ................................................................................................................................ 116
Introduction to a line grid.................................................................................................. 116
Types of line grid.............................................................................................................. 116
Line grid manager ............................................................................................................ 118
Creating a new line grid ................................................................................................... 119
Adjusting line grid parameters ......................................................................................... 119
Line grid type ...................................................................................................................................... 120
Line grid dimensions........................................................................................................................... 120
Insertion point and rotation ................................................................................................................. 120
Name ................................................................................................................................................... 120
Parameters of display style.................................................................................................................. 120
Adjusting the display style of line grid.............................................................................. 120
Displaying and hiding a line grid ...................................................................................... 121
Using a line grid ............................................................................................................... 122
Editing an existing line grid .............................................................................................. 122
Window pop-up menu .......................................................................................................... 123
Introduction to window pop-up menu............................................................................... 123
Functions of the pop-up menu ......................................................................................... 123
Standard pop-up menu ........................................................................................................................ 123
Pop-up menu if a function is opened................................................................................................... 124
Pop-up menu if some entities are selected .......................................................................................... 124
Pop-up menu if the cursor is positioned over any entity ..................................................................... 124
Using the window pop-up menu....................................................................................... 125
Adjusting the viewpoint (view direction + zoom).............................................................. 126
Introduction to view adjustment ....................................................................................... 126
Adjusting the view ............................................................................................................ 126
Menu functions for adjustment of the view......................................................................................... 126
Toolbar functions for adjustment of the view ..................................................................................... 127
Window scroll-bar wheel-like buttons for adjustment of the view ..................................................... 127
Mouse controlled adjustment of the view ........................................................................................... 127
Rotation of view.................................................................................................................................. 128
Limiting the view............................................................................................................... 128
SCIA.ESA PT
Adjusting the view numerically......................................................................................... 129
Adjusting perspective projection ...................................................................................... 129
Special view settings........................................................................................................ 130
Wire model in manipulations .............................................................................................................. 130
View parameters ................................................................................................................... 130
Introduction to view parameters....................................................................................... 130
Overview of view parameters........................................................................................... 131
Entities............................................................................................................................................ 131
Structure .............................................................................................................................................. 131
Style + colour ...................................................................................................................................... 131
Member system line ............................................................................................................................ 131
Member surface................................................................................................................................... 132
Rendering ............................................................................................................................................ 132
Cross-section....................................................................................................................................... 132
Additional data .................................................................................................................................... 132
Model .................................................................................................................................................. 133
Load .................................................................................................................................................... 133
Mass .................................................................................................................................................... 133
Labels and descriptions .................................................................................................................. 133
Beam members.................................................................................................................................... 133
Nodes .................................................................................................................................................. 133
Loads................................................................................................................................................... 133
Masses................................................................................................................................................. 133
Buckling lengths ................................................................................................................................. 134
Mesh.................................................................................................................................................... 134
View ............................................................................................................................................... 134
Adjusting view parameters............................................................................................... 134
Setting view parameters for all entities ............................................................................................... 134
Setting view parameters for individual entities ................................................................................... 135
Predefined view parameters settings............................................................................... 135
Regeneration of view ........................................................................................................... 135
Introduction to regeneration of view................................................................................. 135
Redrawing the active graphical window........................................................................... 136
MATERIALS
137
CROSS-SECTIONS
144
SCIA.ESA PT
Sectional characteristics and other properties................................................................. 144
Overview of sectional characteristics and parameters .................................................... 144
Sectional characteristics .................................................................................................. 145
Calculation of sectional characteristics............................................................................ 146
Basic sectional characteristics ........................................................................................................ 146
Cross-section characteristics thin-walled cross-sections ............................................................. 146
torsional moment of inertia, It............................................................................................................. 146
warping constant, Iw ........................................................................................................................... 147
Cross-section characteristics Geometric shapes, timber sections, concrete sections ................... 147
It for rectangular cross-sections .......................................................................................................... 147
Cross-section characteristics built-up cross-sections................................................................... 148
Cross-sectional area, A........................................................................................................................ 148
Moments of inertia Iy and Iz ............................................................................................................... 148
Torsional moment of inertia, It ........................................................................................................... 148
Warping constant, Iw .......................................................................................................................... 148
Other cross-section parameters....................................................................................... 148
Special sectional characteristics ...................................................................................... 149
Cross-section types ............................................................................................................. 149
Geometric shapes ............................................................................................................ 149
Thin-walled cross-sections............................................................................................... 149
Steel rolled cross-sections ............................................................................................... 150
Welded steel cross-sections ............................................................................................ 152
Welded hollow cross-sections.......................................................................................... 153
Haunch cross-sections..................................................................................................... 153
Built-up steel cross-sections ............................................................................................ 154
Multi-material built-up cross-sections............................................................................... 155
Concrete cross-sections .................................................................................................. 156
Timber cross-sections...................................................................................................... 156
Bridge cross-sections....................................................................................................... 157
Numerical cross-section................................................................................................... 157
General cross-section ...................................................................................................... 158
Defining a new cross-section.............................................................................................. 158
Cross-section manager.................................................................................................... 158
General procedure for the definition of a new cross-section ........................................... 159
Selecting the cross-section type ...................................................................................... 160
List of available cross-section types ............................................................................................... 160
List of possible variants (sub-types) for the current type................................................................ 161
Drawing of the currently selected variant....................................................................................... 161
List of already defined cross-sections............................................................................................. 161
Control buttons ............................................................................................................................... 161
Button [Add] and Button with a "Right Arrow".................................................................................. 161
Button [Close] ..................................................................................................................................... 161
Specifying sectional parameters and properties.............................................................. 161
Graphical window........................................................................................................................... 162
Property table.................................................................................................................................. 162
Control buttons ............................................................................................................................... 163
Button [Update]................................................................................................................................... 163
Button [Document].............................................................................................................................. 163
Button [OK] ........................................................................................................................................ 163
Button [Cancel] ................................................................................................................................... 163
Graphical window versus property table relation ............................................................................ 163
Reviewing the calculated sectional characteristics.......................................................... 163
Property table in the Cross-section manager ....................................................................................... 164
Property table in the dialogue for editing of a cross-section ............................................................... 164
Document-style view in the preview window ..................................................................................... 164
Importing the cross-sections from another project........................................................... 165
Export of required cross-sections from the "source" project............................................................... 165
Import of required cross-sections into the "target" project.................................................................. 166
Limitations of the import process........................................................................................................ 167
Modyfying an existing cross-section ................................................................................. 167
10
SCIA.ESA PT
Editing a cross-section..................................................................................................... 167
Deleting a cross-section................................................................................................... 168
Copying a cross-section................................................................................................... 168
Replacing a cross-section................................................................................................ 168
General cross-section.......................................................................................................... 169
Examples of a general cross-section ............................................................................... 169
Rules for general cross-sections...................................................................................... 170
Type of partial sections in the general cross-section....................................................... 170
Polygonal cross-section ............................................................................................ 170
"Full-time" opening............................................................................................................................. 171
Partial opening .................................................................................................................................... 171
Thin walled cross-section .......................................................................................... 172
Library cross-section ................................................................................................. 172
Thin-walled versus solid cross-section...................................................................... 173
General cross-section editor ............................................................................................ 173
Opening the General cross-section editor................................................................. 173
Using the General cross-section editor ..................................................................... 174
Functions of the General cross-section editor........................................................... 174
Working plane and user co-ordinate system......................................................................... 174
Adjusting the view................................................................................................................ 175
Controlling the view parameters........................................................................................... 175
Names of partial sections and node (vertex) numbers......................................................................... 175
Colour palette...................................................................................................................................... 176
Fonts.................................................................................................................................................... 176
Dimension lines................................................................................................................................... 176
Dot grid................................................................................................................................. 176
Making the selection............................................................................................................. 176
Making a selection by the mouse cursor ............................................................................................. 176
Adjusting the snap mode ...................................................................................................... 177
Geometric manipulations...................................................................................................... 177
Geometric manipulations .................................................................................................................... 177
Edit polyline........................................................................................................................................ 178
Geometric manipulation with curves .................................................................................................. 178
Dimension lines .................................................................................................................... 178
Parameters of dimension line .............................................................................................................. 178
Creating a new general cross-section ............................................................................. 180
Inserting a new polygonal section ............................................................................. 180
Plane polygon toolbar................................................................................................ 182
Inserting a new thin walled section............................................................................ 184
Inserting a new library section................................................................................... 184
Inserting a new opening ............................................................................................ 184
Adjusting the properties ................................................................................................... 185
Properties of the final general cross-section ............................................................. 185
Properties of the partial cross-section ....................................................................... 186
Modifying the existing general cross-section ................................................................... 188
Modifying the properties of the whole cross-section ................................................. 188
Editing dialogue .................................................................................................................................. 188
General cross-section editor ................................................................................................................ 188
Modifying the properties of a partial cross-section.................................................... 189
Changing the geometry of the general cross-section................................................ 189
Changing the geometry of a partial section............................................................... 190
Defining a parametric cross-section................................................................................. 190
Introduction to the parametric cross-section ............................................................. 190
Defining a new parameter ......................................................................................... 190
Assigning the parameters.......................................................................................... 191
Example of parameterised cross-section .................................................................. 191
GEOMETRY
197
11
SCIA.ESA PT
Introduction to nodes ....................................................................................................... 197
FE node ............................................................................................................................................... 197
Node.................................................................................................................................................... 198
Types of nodes................................................................................................................. 198
Absolute node ..................................................................................................................................... 198
Linked node......................................................................................................................................... 198
Difference between absolute and linked node..................................................................................... 198
Defining a new node ........................................................................................................ 199
Defining a local co-ordinate system of a node................................................................. 200
Deleting the nodes ........................................................................................................... 200
Deletion of proper nodes (nodes that relate to beams) ........................................................................ 200
Deletion of free nodes ......................................................................................................................... 200
Beams.................................................................................................................................... 201
Introduction to beams ...................................................................................................... 201
Types of directly defined beams ......................................................................................................... 201
Types of beams defined as a "property" of existing beams................................................................. 202
Common beam parameters ............................................................................................. 202
Name ................................................................................................................................................... 202
Type .................................................................................................................................................... 203
Cross-section....................................................................................................................................... 203
Alpha................................................................................................................................................... 203
Member system line at ........................................................................................................................ 203
Eccentricity ......................................................................................................................................... 203
Local co-ordinate system (LCS) ......................................................................................................... 203
LCS rotation........................................................................................................................................ 204
FEM type............................................................................................................................................. 204
Layer ................................................................................................................................................... 204
Buckling parameters ........................................................................................................ 204
Beam types ...................................................................................................................... 205
General beam............................................................................................................ 205
Column ...................................................................................................................... 206
Horizontal beam ........................................................................................................ 207
Haunch beam ............................................................................................................ 207
Haunch placement............................................................................................................................... 208
Cross-section....................................................................................................................................... 209
List of dimensions that can vary along the haunch length .................................................................. 210
Alignment............................................................................................................................................ 210
Beam of a variable cross-section .............................................................................. 211
Type of cross-section .......................................................................................................................... 211
Cross-section / Cross-sections............................................................................................................. 211
Defining a new beam ....................................................................................................... 212
Inserting a new beam ................................................................................................ 212
Inserting a new beam of a complex axis shape ........................................................ 213
Defining a haunch on a beam ................................................................................... 214
Defining a beam with a variable cross-section.......................................................... 215
Slabs ...................................................................................................................................... 215
Slab types ........................................................................................................................ 215
Plate .......................................................................................................................... 215
Parameters........................................................................................................................................... 215
Variable thickness ............................................................................................................................... 216
Wall............................................................................................................................ 218
Parameters........................................................................................................................................... 218
Slab components....................................................................................................... 219
Introduction to slab components........................................................................................... 219
Subregion of a slab ............................................................................................................... 219
Parameters........................................................................................................................................... 219
Opening in a slab .................................................................................................................. 220
Parameters........................................................................................................................................... 220
Internal edge in a slab ........................................................................................................... 222
Parameters........................................................................................................................................... 222
12
SCIA.ESA PT
Internal node in a slab........................................................................................................... 222
Rib in the slab ....................................................................................................................... 223
General parameters.............................................................................................................................. 223
General parameters.............................................................................................................................. 224
CAD model ......................................................................................................................................... 224
Defining a new slab.......................................................................................................... 224
Defining a new plate .................................................................................................. 224
Defining a new wall.................................................................................................... 225
Defining a new subregion.......................................................................................... 225
Defining a new opening............................................................................................. 225
Defining a new internal edge..................................................................................... 226
Defining an internal node in a slab ............................................................................ 226
Defining a new rib...................................................................................................... 226
Geometric manipulations ................................................................................................. 227
Geometric manipulations with slabs.......................................................................... 227
Editing the shape of a slab ........................................................................................ 227
Catalogue blocks.................................................................................................................. 230
Introduction to catalogue blocks ...................................................................................... 230
Overview of catalogue blocks .......................................................................................... 230
Catalogue block types...................................................................................................... 231
Catalogue block - Beam ............................................................................................ 231
Beam parameters................................................................................................................................. 231
Catalogue block - 2D frame....................................................................................... 231
2D Frame parameters .......................................................................................................................... 231
Catalogue block - 3D frame....................................................................................... 232
3D Frame parameters .......................................................................................................................... 232
Catalogue block - 2D lattice girder ............................................................................ 232
Lattice girder parameters..................................................................................................................... 232
Catalogue block - 3D lattice girder ............................................................................ 233
Lattice girder parameters..................................................................................................................... 233
Catalogue block - Mast.............................................................................................. 234
Mast parameters .................................................................................................................................. 234
Catalogue block - Curve............................................................................................ 235
Curve types ......................................................................................................................................... 235
Curve parameters ................................................................................................................................ 236
Defining a new catalogue block ....................................................................................... 237
Catalogue block manager ......................................................................................... 237
Defining a new catalogue block................................................................................. 238
Selecting the catalogue block type............................................................................ 238
List of available catalogue block types........................................................................................... 239
List of possible variants (sub-types) for the current type................................................................ 239
Drawing of the currently selected variant....................................................................................... 239
List of already defined catalogue blocks ........................................................................................ 239
Control Buttons .............................................................................................................................. 239
Button [OK] ........................................................................................................................................ 239
Button [Close] ..................................................................................................................................... 239
Specifying the block parameters ............................................................................... 239
Graphical window........................................................................................................................... 240
Property table.................................................................................................................................. 240
Control buttons ............................................................................................................................... 240
Button [OK] ........................................................................................................................................ 240
Button [Cancel] ................................................................................................................................... 240
Reviewing the block parameters ............................................................................... 240
Property table in the Catalogue block manager................................................................................... 241
Property table in the dialogue for editing of a catalogue block........................................................... 241
Document-style view in the preview window ..................................................................................... 241
User blocks ........................................................................................................................... 241
Introduction to user blocks ............................................................................................... 241
Using the user blocks....................................................................................................... 241
Creating the user block........................................................................................................................ 241
13
SCIA.ESA PT
Storing the user block to the library .................................................................................................... 241
Inserting the user block into another project ....................................................................................... 242
Moving the entities ............................................................................................................... 242
Introduction to moving of entities ..................................................................................... 242
Type of manipulated entity ................................................................................................................. 242
Trajectory followed by the manipulated entity ................................................................................... 242
General rules for move of entities .................................................................................... 243
Linked versus absolute node ............................................................................................................... 243
Rules for move of nodes ..................................................................................................................... 243
Rules for move of beams..................................................................................................................... 244
Moving the geometric entities .......................................................................................... 245
Moving an entity via the property table ..................................................................... 245
Moving an entity via a menu function ........................................................................ 246
The Move operation done with a previously made selection of entities ............................................. 246
The Move operation done with a selection created as a part the function procedure .......................... 246
Moving an entity via the window pop-up menu ......................................................... 247
Move of one or more previously selected entities using the right mouse button pop-up menu .......... 247
Move of a single entity using the right mouse button pop-up menu ................................................... 247
Moving an entity using Drag&Drop feature ............................................................... 248
Rotating an entity via its vertex co-ordinate change ................................................. 248
Rotating an entity via a menu function ...................................................................... 248
Rotating an entity via the right mouse button pop-up menu ..................................... 249
Rotating an entity using Drag&Drop feature ............................................................. 249
Mirroring an entity...................................................................................................... 249
Moving the additional data entities................................................................................... 250
Introduction to moving of additional-data entities...................................................... 250
Copying the entities ............................................................................................................. 250
Introduction to copying of entities .................................................................................... 250
Making a single copy via menu function .......................................................................... 251
Making a single copy via window pop-up menu .............................................................. 251
Copying arbitrary number of entities .................................................................................................. 251
Copying just a single entity................................................................................................................. 252
Making multiple copies via menu function ....................................................................... 252
Deleting the entities ............................................................................................................. 254
Introduction to deleting of entities .................................................................................... 254
Deleting the user-selected entities................................................................................... 254
Deleting invalid entities .................................................................................................... 255
Editing the entity properties................................................................................................ 255
Introduction to editing of entity properties........................................................................ 255
Editing the beam properties in its property dialogue........................................................ 255
Editing the beam properties in the property window........................................................ 255
Adjusting the buckling parameters................................................................................... 256
Modifying the shape and dimensions ................................................................................ 257
Treatment of linked nodes in manipulation functions....................................................... 257
In-axis modification ............................................................................................................................ 257
Out-of-axis modification..................................................................................................................... 257
Editing the shape in the property window ........................................................................ 258
Editing the shape using Drag&Drop feature .................................................................... 259
Scaling the entities........................................................................................................... 259
Stretching the entities ...................................................................................................... 260
Trimming the entities........................................................................................................ 260
Extending the entities....................................................................................................... 261
Enlarging the entities ....................................................................................................... 262
Breaking the entities in defined points ............................................................................. 262
Breaking the entities in intersections ............................................................................... 262
Coupling the entities ........................................................................................................ 263
Reversing the orientation of an entity .............................................................................. 263
Inserting a node into a polygonal entity ........................................................................... 264
Deleting a node from a polygonal entity .......................................................................... 264
14
SCIA.ESA PT
Coupling curves into a polyline ........................................................................................ 265
Editing the circular arc angle............................................................................................ 265
Editing the circular arc bulge............................................................................................ 266
Editing the circular arc radius........................................................................................... 266
Editing the Bezier curve weight factors............................................................................ 267
Converting a curve into a line .......................................................................................... 267
Converting a line into a circular arc.................................................................................. 268
Converting a line into a parabolic arc .............................................................................. 268
Converting a line into a Bezier curve ............................................................................... 268
Converting a line into a spline curve ................................................................................ 269
Connecting and disconnecting the entities....................................................................... 269
Introduction to connecting and disconnecting of entities ................................................. 269
Defining a new connection of two entities........................................................................ 270
Inserting a linked node for future connection of an entity ................................................ 270
Defining a new connection of intersecting entities........................................................... 271
Modifying the connection of two entities .......................................................................... 271
Modifying the connection of intersecting entities ............................................................. 272
Deleting the connection of two entities ............................................................................ 272
Deleting the connection via the property table of the linked node ...................................................... 272
Deleting the connection via the function for disconnection of entities ............................................... 272
Deleting the connection of intersecting entities ............................................................... 273
CAD Model ............................................................................................................................ 273
Introduction to CAD model............................................................................................... 273
Parameters of CAD model ............................................................................................... 273
Priority ................................................................................................................................................ 274
Perpendicular alignment...................................................................................................................... 275
Eccentricity ......................................................................................................................................... 275
Purlin on rafter .................................................................................................................................... 275
Defining the CAD model .................................................................................................. 276
Displaying the CAD model ............................................................................................... 277
Modifying the CAD model ................................................................................................ 277
Regenerating the CAD model .......................................................................................... 277
MODEL DATA
278
15
SCIA.ESA PT
Defining a new support on a slab .............................................................................. 286
Defining a new friction support .................................................................................. 286
Fast definition of specific support types .................................................................... 286
Parameters of a non-linear support........................................................................... 287
Non-linear function manager .............................................................................................................. 287
Foundation ............................................................................................................................ 287
Introduction to foundation ................................................................................................ 287
Foundation blocks and strips ........................................................................................... 288
Foundation block ....................................................................................................... 288
Foundation strip......................................................................................................... 289
Upper soil of foundation block and strip .................................................................... 289
Defining a new foundation block type........................................................................ 290
Inserting the foundation block into model.................................................................. 290
Defining a new foundation strip ................................................................................. 290
Subsoil ............................................................................................................................. 291
Introduction to subsoil ............................................................................................... 291
Defining a new subsoil type....................................................................................... 291
Defining subsoil parameters...................................................................................... 291
Parameters of subsoil .......................................................................................................................... 291
Parameters for check ........................................................................................................................... 292
Subsoil parameters for subsoil under a beam........................................................... 292
Subsoil parameters for subsoil under a slab ............................................................. 293
Using the subsoil ....................................................................................................... 293
Hinges (pins)......................................................................................................................... 293
Beams .............................................................................................................................. 293
Introduction to hinges ................................................................................................ 293
Specifying hinge parameters..................................................................................... 293
Parameters of a hinge .......................................................................................................................... 293
Constraint conditions .......................................................................................................................... 294
Defining a new hinge ................................................................................................. 294
Fast definition of specific hinges ............................................................................... 294
Slabs ................................................................................................................................ 295
Hinges in slabs .......................................................................................................... 295
Parameters........................................................................................................................................... 295
Modifying the existing model data ..................................................................................... 297
Changing the parameters of model data ......................................................................... 297
Moving the model data..................................................................................................... 298
Copying the model data ................................................................................................... 298
Deleting the model data ................................................................................................... 299
LOADS
300
16
SCIA.ESA PT
System................................................................................................................................................. 304
Location .............................................................................................................................................. 305
Co-ordinate definition ......................................................................................................................... 305
Surface load on slab ........................................................................................................ 305
Parameters........................................................................................................................................... 305
Moment load in node ....................................................................................................... 306
Moment load on beam ..................................................................................................... 306
Line moment load on beam ............................................................................................. 307
Thermal load on beam ..................................................................................................... 307
Thermal load on slab ....................................................................................................... 307
Translation of support ...................................................................................................... 308
Translation of a point on beam ........................................................................................ 308
Rotation of support........................................................................................................... 309
Rotation of a point on beam............................................................................................. 310
Longitudinal strain............................................................................................................ 310
Flexural strain................................................................................................................... 311
Slab displacement and curvature..................................................................................... 311
Parameters........................................................................................................................................... 311
A little bit of theory ........................................................................................................................ 311
Elongation (in m/m)........................................................................................................................... 312
Curvature............................................................................................................................................. 312
Pond load - water accumulation....................................................................................... 314
Parameters........................................................................................................................................... 314
Detailed parameters -Points ................................................................................................................ 314
Detailed parameters -Drains................................................................................................................ 314
Detailed parameters -Slopes................................................................................................................ 315
Dynamic loads.................................................................................................................. 316
Harmonic load ........................................................................................................... 316
Seismic load .............................................................................................................. 316
General seismisity ..................................................................................................... 318
Free loads ........................................................................................................................ 318
Introduction to free loads........................................................................................... 318
Available types of "loading entity" ..................................................................................................... 318
Validity of free loads........................................................................................................................... 318
Free point load........................................................................................................... 319
Parameters........................................................................................................................................... 319
Free line load............................................................................................................. 320
Parameters........................................................................................................................................... 320
Free surface load....................................................................................................... 320
Parameters........................................................................................................................................... 320
Load direction....................................................................................................................... 321
Direction of loads ............................................................................................................. 321
Point force load ................................................................................................................................... 321
Line force load .................................................................................................................................... 321
Moment load (point and line).............................................................................................................. 322
Point displacement load ...................................................................................................................... 322
Line displacement load ....................................................................................................................... 323
Defining a new load.............................................................................................................. 323
Defining a new point load in a node................................................................................. 323
Defining a new point load on a beam .............................................................................. 323
Defining a new line load on a beam................................................................................. 324
Defining a new thermal load on a beam .......................................................................... 324
Defining a new line load on slab edge ............................................................................. 324
Defining a new surface load on a slab............................................................................. 324
Defining a new thermal load on slab................................................................................ 325
Defining a new free point load ......................................................................................... 325
Defining a new free line load............................................................................................ 325
Defining a new free surface load ..................................................................................... 325
Defining a new slab displacement ................................................................................... 325
Fast definition of specific load types ................................................................................ 326
17
SCIA.ESA PT
Modifying the existing load ................................................................................................. 326
Changing the load parameters......................................................................................... 326
Moving the load................................................................................................................ 326
Copying the load .............................................................................................................. 327
Deleting the load .............................................................................................................. 327
Load cases ............................................................................................................................ 327
Introduction to load cases ................................................................................................ 327
Load case manager ......................................................................................................... 327
Defining a new load case................................................................................................. 328
Defining the load case parameters .................................................................................. 328
Basic parameters............................................................................................................................. 328
Load case type..................................................................................................................................... 328
Parameters for permanent loads...................................................................................................... 329
Type (subtype) .................................................................................................................................... 329
Direction.............................................................................................................................................. 329
Parameters for variable loads.......................................................................................................... 329
Type (subtype) .................................................................................................................................... 329
Specification of static load case .......................................................................................................... 329
Coefficient........................................................................................................................................... 329
Duration .............................................................................................................................................. 329
Master load case.................................................................................................................................. 329
Other parameters ................................................................................................................................. 329
Using the load case ......................................................................................................... 330
Dynamic load cases......................................................................................................... 330
Dynamic load cases .................................................................................................. 330
Defining a new dynamic load case............................................................................ 331
Defining the harmonic load case ............................................................................... 331
Defining the seismic load case.................................................................................. 332
Seismic load case parameters.............................................................................................................. 332
Evaluation type ................................................................................................................................... 332
Defining the seismic spectrum .................................................................................. 332
Load groups.......................................................................................................................... 333
Introduction to load groups .............................................................................................. 333
Load group manager........................................................................................................ 333
Defining a new load group ............................................................................................... 333
The parameters of a load group........................................................................................................... 334
Relation ............................................................................................................................................... 334
Load .................................................................................................................................................... 334
Using the load group........................................................................................................ 334
Load case combinations ..................................................................................................... 334
Introduction to load case combinations ........................................................................... 334
Advanced load case combinations ...................................................................................................... 335
Types of load case combinations..................................................................................... 335
Envelope ......................................................................................................................................... 336
What happens if this combination is exploded? ........................................................................... 336
Envelope ultimate................................................................................................................................ 336
Envelope serviceability ....................................................................................................................... 336
Linear combination......................................................................................................................... 336
Linear ultimate .................................................................................................................................... 336
Linear serviceability............................................................................................................................ 336
Code-related combination............................................................................................................... 337
What happens if this combination is exploded? ........................................................................... 337
Load case combination manager..................................................................................... 337
Control buttons.................................................................................................................................... 337
Filter.................................................................................................................................................... 338
Defining a new combination............................................................................................. 339
Exploding the load case combination .............................................................................. 339
Combinations exploded automatically on background ....................................................................... 339
18
SCIA.ESA PT
Combinations exploded manually by the user..................................................................................... 339
Combination key .............................................................................................................. 340
Example ........................................................................................................................... 341
Example for Envelopes ................................................................................................................ 341
Example for Code-related combination........................................................................................ 341
Load case combinations to SN...................................................................................... 344
Linear combination ............................................................................................................................. 345
Envelope combination......................................................................................................................... 346
Code-related combination ................................................................................................................... 346
Advanced combinations of load cases ............................................................................ 347
Non-linear combinations............................................................................................ 347
None.................................................................................................................................................... 347
Simple inclination ............................................................................................................................... 347
Inclination + curvature of beam .......................................................................................................... 347
Inclination function ............................................................................................................................. 347
Functions + curvature of beam............................................................................................................ 348
Deformation from load case................................................................................................................ 348
Buckling shape .................................................................................................................................... 348
Inclination function ............................................................................................................................. 349
Stability combination ................................................................................................. 349
Result classes....................................................................................................................... 349
Introduction to result classes ........................................................................................... 349
Result class manager ...................................................................................................... 349
Defining a new result class .............................................................................................. 349
Using the result class....................................................................................................... 350
Load generators ................................................................................................................... 350
Introduction to load generators ........................................................................................ 350
Wind generator................................................................................................................. 351
Wind generator .......................................................................................................... 351
Types of wind load..................................................................................................... 351
Code wind ........................................................................................................................................... 351
User-defined wind curve ..................................................................................................................... 352
Using the wind generator .......................................................................................... 353
Step 0: Enabling the wind generation and selecting the type of wind load ......................................... 353
Step 1: Starting the function................................................................................................................ 354
Step 2: Defining the distance between adjacent frames ...................................................................... 354
Step 3: Specifying the generator parameters ....................................................................................... 354
Step 4: Generation of the load............................................................................................................. 354
Adjusting the wind generator parameters ................................................................. 354
Parameters........................................................................................................................................... 355
Control buttons.................................................................................................................................... 355
Example of wind generator application ..................................................................... 356
Snow generator................................................................................................................ 361
Snow generator ......................................................................................................... 361
Types of snow load.................................................................................................... 361
Code snow........................................................................................................................................... 362
User-defined snow weight................................................................................................................... 362
Using the snow generator ......................................................................................... 362
Step 0: Enabling the snow generation and selecting the type of snow load ........................................ 362
Step 1: Starting the function................................................................................................................ 362
Step 2: Defining the distance between adjacent frames ...................................................................... 362
Step 3: Specifying the generator parameters ....................................................................................... 362
Step 4: Generation of the load............................................................................................................. 362
Adjusting the snow generator parameters ................................................................ 363
Parameters........................................................................................................................................... 363
Control buttons.................................................................................................................................... 364
Snow weight to EC1 .................................................................................................. 364
Plane load generator........................................................................................................ 365
Introduction to plane load generator.......................................................................... 365
19
SCIA.ESA PT
Principle of plane load generator............................................................................... 365
Parameters of plane load .......................................................................................... 365
Defining a new plane load ......................................................................................... 366
Action buttons in the Plane generator property window ..................................................................... 366
Inputting the loading polygon .................................................................................... 367
Editing the polygon .................................................................................................... 369
Editing the loading polygon.................................................................................................. 369
Changing the parameters ...................................................................................................... 369
Changing the geometry of the loading polygon.................................................................... 369
Inserting a new vertex........................................................................................................... 370
Removing the vertex............................................................................................................. 370
Inserting an opening ............................................................................................................. 371
Deleting the opening............................................................................................................. 371
Deleting the polygon ............................................................................................................ 372
Pond water ....................................................................................................................... 372
Introduction to pond load........................................................................................... 372
Defining a new pond load.......................................................................................... 372
Theoretical background............................................................................................. 374
References........................................................................................................................................... 374
Theory ................................................................................................................................................. 374
Span loads ............................................................................................................................ 375
Introduction to spans........................................................................................................ 375
What is the span .............................................................................................................. 376
What is a span? ................................................................................................................................... 376
What is NOT a span? .......................................................................................................................... 376
Types of spans................................................................................................................. 376
Span defined by means of polyline ........................................................................... 376
Span defined by means of linked nodes ................................................................... 377
Definition of spans according to spatial arrangement of beams.......................................................... 378
Definition of spans on individual beams ............................................................................................. 379
Work with spans............................................................................................................... 381
Defining a new span-load.......................................................................................... 381
Changing location of span-load................................................................................. 383
Modifying the span length ......................................................................................... 383
Copying the span-load to another beam ................................................................... 385
Copying beams subject to span-load ........................................................................ 385
MASSES
387
20
SCIA.ESA PT
Mass group combination manager................................................................................... 390
CALCULATION
391
RESULTS
406
21
SCIA.ESA PT
Selecting the beams for display ......................................................................................... 406
Selection.............................................................................................................................................. 407
Filter.................................................................................................................................................... 407
Selecting the load for the display of results...................................................................... 407
Adjusting the style of result diagrams ............................................................................... 407
Representation..................................................................................................................................... 407
Limits .................................................................................................................................................. 408
Description .......................................................................................................................................... 410
Angle of text........................................................................................................................................ 410
Drawing of more components ............................................................................................................. 410
Regenerating the diagrams ................................................................................................. 410
Results on beams................................................................................................................. 410
Displaying the internal forces........................................................................................... 410
Display parameters for diagrams of internal forces ............................................................................ 411
Extreme ............................................................................................................................................... 411
Displaying the deformation on beams ............................................................................. 412
Displaying the deformation of nodes ............................................................................... 412
Displaying the resultant of reactions ................................................................................ 413
Display parameters for diagrams of resultant of reactions .................................................................. 413
Displaying the reactions................................................................................................... 413
Display parameters for diagrams of reactions ..................................................................................... 413
Displaying the foundation table........................................................................................ 414
Parameters of Foundation table function............................................................................................. 414
Displaying the bill of material ........................................................................................... 416
Displaying the intensity .................................................................................................... 416
Displaying the stress on members................................................................................... 417
Selecting the joints for display of connection forces ........................................................ 418
Displaying the connection forces ..................................................................................... 419
Parameters of function Connection forces .......................................................................................... 419
Displaying the calculation report ...................................................................................... 420
Displaying the results in tabular form............................................................................... 420
Fast selection of result quantities for the display ............................................................. 420
Displaying the natural frequencies................................................................................... 421
Evaluating the results for harmonic load.......................................................................... 421
Calculation of internal forces in ribs ................................................................................. 421
Results on slabs ................................................................................................................... 423
Displaying the deformation of nodes on slabs ................................................................. 423
Displaying the internal forces on slabs ............................................................................ 423
Displaying the stresses on slabs...................................................................................... 424
Displaying the contact stress on slabs............................................................................. 424
Style of isolines ................................................................................................................ 424
Refreshing the results.......................................................................................................... 430
Principle ........................................................................................................................... 430
Refresh of results ............................................................................................................. 430
Example for refresh of results .......................................................................................... 431
Selected sections ................................................................................................................. 435
Selected sections for result diagrams.............................................................................. 435
Beams.................................................................................................................................................. 435
Slabs.................................................................................................................................................... 435
Vector.................................................................................................................................................. 435
Defining a new section for display of results.................................................................... 436
Displaying the results in selected sections ...................................................................... 436
Beam ................................................................................................................................................... 436
Slab ..................................................................................................................................................... 438
GRAPHIC OUTPUT
441
22
SCIA.ESA PT
Making the direct graphic output...................................................................................... 441
Editing the graphic output layout...................................................................................... 442
Control toolbar of the Graphic output dialogue .................................................................................. 442
Checkbox bar of the Graphic output editor ......................................................................................... 442
Pop-up menu of the Graphic output dialogue...................................................................................... 443
Adjusting the page for the drawing .................................................................................. 444
Paper size, margins.............................................................................................................................. 444
Grid, step............................................................................................................................................. 444
Printer.................................................................................................................................................. 444
Display mode ...................................................................................................................................... 444
Advanced ............................................................................................................................................ 444
Header / footer font ............................................................................................................................. 444
Text in header and footer .................................................................................................................... 445
Saving the drawing to an external file .............................................................................. 445
Adjusting the display style of Graphic output dialogue .................................................... 445
Using the templates in graphic output ............................................................................. 446
Items of graphic output drawing....................................................................................... 446
Line............................................................................................................................ 446
Polyline ...................................................................................................................... 446
Rectangle .................................................................................................................. 447
Circle ......................................................................................................................... 447
Text............................................................................................................................ 447
Automatic text............................................................................................................ 448
Title block .................................................................................................................. 448
Header ................................................................................................................................................. 448
Font ..................................................................................................................................................... 448
Stamp .................................................................................................................................................. 449
Frame .................................................................................................................................................. 449
Advanced ............................................................................................................................................ 449
Preview ............................................................................................................................................... 449
Automatic text in the title block.......................................................................................................... 449
Picture ....................................................................................................................... 450
Picture size .......................................................................................................................................... 450
Background ......................................................................................................................................... 450
Clipping box........................................................................................................................................ 450
On scale............................................................................................................................................... 450
Advanced ............................................................................................................................................ 450
OpenGL............................................................................................................................................... 451
Inserting and editing the items of the drawing ................................................................. 451
Inserting the text into graphic output drawing ........................................................... 451
Inserting the manually typed text ........................................................................................................ 451
Inserting the item of automatic text..................................................................................................... 452
Adding the title block to the drawing.......................................................................... 452
Inserting the picture into graphic output drawing ...................................................... 452
Inserting an external BMP file ............................................................................................................ 453
Different procedures for insertion of an external drawing .................................................................. 453
Adjusting the picture properties................................................................................. 454
Pop-up menu of the editing dialogue .................................................................................................. 454
Adjusting view in the editing dialogue................................................................................................ 454
Mouse controlled adjustment of the view ........................................................................................... 455
Editing the items of graphic output drawing .............................................................. 455
Moving the item of a drawing .................................................................................... 456
Copying the item of a drawing................................................................................... 456
Resizing the item of a drawing .................................................................................. 456
Rotating the item of a drawing................................................................................... 456
Selecting the suitable stretch mode .......................................................................... 457
Stretch modes...................................................................................................................................... 457
Grouping of items ...................................................................................................... 458
Picture gallery....................................................................................................................... 459
Introduction to the picture gallery..................................................................................... 459
23
SCIA.ESA PT
Picture gallery manager ................................................................................................... 459
Using the Picture gallery manager ............................................................................ 459
Picture gallery manager functions ....................................................................................................... 460
Adjusting the manager .............................................................................................. 461
Inserting a new picture into the Picture gallery ......................................................... 461
Inserting a window drawing into the Picture gallery ............................................................ 461
Adjusting the default values for new pictures....................................................................... 461
Name prefix......................................................................................................................................... 461
Picture parameters ............................................................................................................................... 461
Dimension lines................................................................................................................................... 462
Picture name........................................................................................................................................ 462
Save / Read buttons............................................................................................................................. 462
Creating a new empty picture ............................................................................................... 462
Generating new pictures according to line grid .................................................................... 462
Parameters controlling the generation process ............................................................................... 463
Definition of planes............................................................................................................................. 463
View parameters.................................................................................................................................. 463
View direction..................................................................................................................................... 463
Make picture ....................................................................................................................................... 463
Draw members .................................................................................................................................... 463
Draw loads + supports......................................................................................................................... 463
Draw result diagrams .......................................................................................................................... 463
Beam label size ................................................................................................................................... 463
Grid selection ...................................................................................................................................... 464
Generating new pictures for defined connections................................................................. 464
Processing the pictures in the Picture gallery ........................................................... 464
Editing the picture ................................................................................................................ 464
Adjusting the picture properties............................................................................................ 465
Printing the picture ............................................................................................................... 465
Removing the picture from the gallery ................................................................................. 465
Copying the picture .............................................................................................................. 465
Regenerating the picture ....................................................................................................... 466
Regenerating the picture setup.............................................................................................. 466
Regenerating the colours setup ............................................................................................. 467
Saving the picture into an external file ................................................................................. 467
Copying the picture into the Clipboard................................................................................. 468
Editing the picture in the picture gallery........................................................................... 468
Introduction to editing of picture ................................................................................ 468
Printing the edited picture.......................................................................................... 469
Exporting the edited picture....................................................................................... 469
Copying the edited picture to clipboard..................................................................... 469
Adjusting the editing dialogue ................................................................................... 469
Adjusting the basic properties of picture .............................................................................. 469
Adjusting the parameters of dot grid .................................................................................... 469
Displaying the dot grid ......................................................................................................... 470
Adjusting the SNAP mode.................................................................................................... 470
Adjusting the view...................................................................................................... 470
Adjusting the view................................................................................................................ 470
Adjusting the view via toolbars Zoom ................................................................................................ 470
Adjusting the view via key & mouse combination ............................................................................. 471
Reversing the view ............................................................................................................... 471
Adjusting the border of picture............................................................................................. 471
Using the layers .................................................................................................................... 472
Parameters of layer.............................................................................................................................. 472
Using the clipping box for picture ........................................................................................ 473
Adjusting the clipping box by mouse ................................................................................... 473
Adjusting the clipping box in setup table ............................................................................. 473
Adding the manually drawn entities........................................................................... 474
Drawing a line ...................................................................................................................... 474
Defining the end points of line............................................................................................................ 474
24
SCIA.ESA PT
Drawing a polyline ............................................................................................................... 474
Drawing a closed polyline .................................................................................................... 474
Inserting a text ...................................................................................................................... 475
Inserting a vertical dimension line........................................................................................ 475
Inserting a horizontal dimension line.................................................................................... 475
Inserting a general dimension line ........................................................................................ 476
Using the command line ....................................................................................................... 476
Using the SNAP mode.......................................................................................................... 477
Modifying the manually drawn entities ...................................................................... 477
Selecting the entity ............................................................................................................... 477
Moving the entity.................................................................................................................. 477
Copying the entity ................................................................................................................ 477
Rotating the entity ................................................................................................................ 477
Mirroring the entity .............................................................................................................. 477
Trimming the entity .............................................................................................................. 478
Stretching the entity.............................................................................................................. 478
Scaling the entity .................................................................................................................. 478
Changing the shape of entity ................................................................................................ 478
Deleting the entity ................................................................................................................ 478
Adjusting the colour of entity ............................................................................................... 478
Adjusting the thickness of line ............................................................................................. 479
Adjusting the pattern of line ................................................................................................. 479
Adjusting the layer of entity ................................................................................................. 479
Changing the parameters of text ........................................................................................... 480
Changing the parameters of dimension line.......................................................................... 480
Modifying the window drawing .................................................................................. 480
Breaking the structural member into free entities................................................................. 480
Paper space gallery.............................................................................................................. 481
Introduction to Paper space gallery ................................................................................. 481
Paper space gallery manager .......................................................................................... 481
Editing the drawing in the gallery ..................................................................................... 482
Creating a new drawing in the gallery.............................................................................. 482
Creating a new drawing based on a template ................................................................. 482
Printing the drawing from the gallery ............................................................................... 482
Copying the drawing in the gallery................................................................................... 483
Deleting the drawing from the gallery .............................................................................. 483
Making or changing the drawing ...................................................................................... 483
Insertion of an external picture............................................................................................................ 484
Editing picture properties .................................................................................................................... 484
Saving a template ............................................................................................................ 484
Creating a template for Paper space gallery drawings .................................................... 484
DOCUMENT
485
25
SCIA.ESA PT
Inserting a new section into document from the graphical window........................... 489
Inserting a drawing into the document ...................................................................... 493
Inserting a new text line............................................................................................. 494
Inserting an external image file ................................................................................. 494
Inserting an external text file ..................................................................................... 495
Inserting the end of page........................................................................................... 495
Inserting the table of contents ................................................................................... 495
Creating the advanced documents .................................................................................. 495
Creating the encapsulated tables.............................................................................. 495
Standard arrangement.......................................................................................................................... 495
Encapsulated arrangement................................................................................................................... 496
Creating multiple documents for the project.............................................................. 497
Editing the document layout............................................................................................. 498
Introduction to editing of document ........................................................................... 498
Editing the properties of document items.................................................................. 498
Filter.................................................................................................................................................... 498
Embedding of data .............................................................................................................................. 498
Filename.............................................................................................................................................. 499
Type of loads....................................................................................................................................... 499
Values ................................................................................................................................................. 499
Sorting the items of the document............................................................................. 500
Deleting the items from the document....................................................................... 500
Editing the header ..................................................................................................... 500
Editing the footer ....................................................................................................... 501
Regenerating the document after changes ............................................................... 501
Editing the basic document properties............................................................................. 501
Manager of documents.............................................................................................. 501
Editing the basic document properties ...................................................................... 501
Adjusting the language of the document................................................................... 502
Modifying the structure through the document ................................................................ 502
Introduction to document based editing of structure ................................................. 502
Editing the geometry in the document table.............................................................. 502
Editing the nodal co-ordinates............................................................................................................. 502
Editing the end-nodes of beams .......................................................................................................... 502
Editing the beam properties................................................................................................................. 503
Editing the additional data in the document table ..................................................... 503
Editing the model data of the project (e.g. supports)........................................................................... 503
Editing the loads.................................................................................................................................. 503
Previewing the document................................................................................................. 504
Adjusting the document preview ............................................................................... 504
Printing and exporting the document ............................................................................... 504
Adjusting the printing device ..................................................................................... 504
Printing the document ............................................................................................... 504
Exporting the document ............................................................................................ 504
Export formats..................................................................................................................................... 504
Preview window.................................................................................................................... 505
Introduction to preview window........................................................................................ 505
Opening the preview window ........................................................................................... 505
Adjusting the display style in the preview window ........................................................... 505
Adjusting the preview window settings ............................................................................ 506
Exporting the preview ...................................................................................................... 506
Printing the preview ......................................................................................................... 506
Adjusting the printing device ............................................................................................ 506
Editing the structure from within the preview window ...................................................... 506
Table composer .................................................................................................................... 506
Table composer dialogue................................................................................................. 506
Creating a new view......................................................................................................... 508
Applying the view ............................................................................................................. 508
Modifying the composition of view ................................................................................... 509
User defined properties ....................................................................................................................... 509
26
SCIA.ESA PT
Line break ........................................................................................................................................... 511
Horizontal table................................................................................................................................... 512
Continue line ....................................................................................................................................... 513
Adjusting the table properties for the view....................................................................... 513
Adjusting the layout of the view ....................................................................................... 514
Adjusting the layout of column of the view table.............................................................. 514
Adjusting the properties of the view ................................................................................. 515
Deleting the view.............................................................................................................. 515
Sorting the table columns outside the table composer .................................................... 515
Refreshing the document .................................................................................................... 515
Refresh of document........................................................................................................ 515
Example for refresh of Document .................................................................................... 516
ADVANCED TOOLS
518
27
SCIA.ESA PT
Export.................................................................................................................................................. 537
Import.................................................................................................................................................. 537
Delete .................................................................................................................................................. 537
Insert ................................................................................................................................................... 537
Rewrite ................................................................................................................................................ 537
OK....................................................................................................................................................... 537
Cancel ................................................................................................................................................. 537
Creating a template.......................................................................................................... 538
Opening a template.......................................................................................................... 538
Selected manipulations with templates............................................................................ 538
Creating the template group ................................................................................................................ 538
Sorting the templates into groups........................................................................................................ 538
Renaming the templates ...................................................................................................................... 539
Exporting the templates....................................................................................................................... 539
Importing the templates....................................................................................................................... 539
Removing the templates ...................................................................................................................... 539
Design of connections ......................................................................................................... 539
Frame connections .......................................................................................................... 539
Code checks ......................................................................................................................... 540
Code checks of steel structures....................................................................................... 540
Code check of concrete structures .................................................................................. 540
541
28
SCIA.ESA PT
Tension only .............................................................................................................. 551
Press only.................................................................................................................. 551
Limit force .................................................................................................................. 552
Parameters........................................................................................................................................... 553
Gap............................................................................................................................ 553
Parameters........................................................................................................................................... 555
Initial stress................................................................................................................ 555
Parameters........................................................................................................................................... 555
Cable ......................................................................................................................... 555
Straight cables ..................................................................................................................................... 555
Slack cables......................................................................................................................................... 555
Parameters........................................................................................................................................... 556
Plastic hinges ....................................................................................................................... 556
Introduction to plastic hinges ........................................................................................... 556
Plastic hinges to EC3....................................................................................................... 557
Plastic hinges to DIN 18800............................................................................................. 557
Plastic hinges to NEN ...................................................................................................... 558
For IPE sections .................................................................................................................................. 558
For other sections ................................................................................................................................ 558
Calculating with plastic hinges ......................................................................................... 558
GLOSSARY
560
29
SCIA.ESA PT
30
SCIA.ESA PT
Getting started
Disclaimer
This document is being furnished by SCIA for information purposes only to licensed users of SCIA
software and is furnished on an "AS IS" basis, that is, without any warranties, whatsoever, expressed or
implied. SCIA is not responsible for direct or indirect damage as a result of imperfections in the
documentation and/or software.
Information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment
on the part of SCIA. The software described in this document is furnished under a license agreement.
The software may be used only in accordance with the terms of that license agreement. It is against the
law to copy or use the software except as specifically allowed in the license.
Copyright 2000-2004 SCIA Group. All rights reserved.
Contact address
SCIA Group n.v.
Scientific Application Group
Industrieweg 1007 B-3540 Herk-de-Stad (Belgi)
Tel.(+32) (0)13/55 17 75 Fax.(+32) (0)13/55 41 75
E-mail scia@scia.be
31
SCIA.ESA PT
Introduction
About program
Program mission
The SCIA.ESA PT software system has been designed and developed to provide structural engineers
and designers with an efficient, comprehensive and robust tool.
Theoretical background
SCIA.ESA PT is a software system for a static and dynamic analysis of structures and their design to
standards. It is grounded on the displacement-based finite element method.
SCIA.ESA PT does not work with finite elements directly but it exploits structural elements (referred to
as members) on which a finite element mesh is automatically generated just before the calculation.
SCIA.ESA PT can be used to calculate and design structures consisting of beams (modelled by linear
finite elements) and planar parts such as walls, plates, and curved slabs (modelled by 2D finite
elements).
Types of calculation
SCIA.ESA PT comprises calculation modules for the following types of calculation:
linear static calculation (including some non-linear features),
geometrically non-linear calculation,
dynamic natural vibration calculation,
seismicity calculation,
buckling analysis.
Code checks
In addition to the calculation itself, SCIA.ESA PT enables the user to carry out the final design of a
structure in accordance with appropriate technical standards.
The "Code Check library" of SCIA.ESA PT contains a multi-national set of technical standards for
various material types, mainly for steel and concrete.
Important note: A proper and exhaustive application of program features assumes that a user is
well accustomed to the principles of the finite element method, is familiar with appropriate technical
standards and conventions, and is a skilled professional in the field of design and calculation of
engineering structures.
About documentation
We recommend undergoing a specialised training for SCIA.ESA PT organised for you by your
local SCIA dealer before using the program for real work.
The documentation contains explanation of the program principles, theoretical background and
operation and will provide the user with invaluable knowledge about the SCIA.ESA PT software.
32
SCIA.ESA PT
Style
The following text format conventions and symbols are used throughout this manual:
Indicates texts used in the program (menus, texts in dialog
windows, buttons, etc.).
bold
Indicates a button.
E.g. Click on [OK] to confirm.
Step 1
Step 2
E.g. ... choose Setup > Options from the main menu.
Bold With Capital First
Letters
Installation
Installation options
All the installation options are introduced by the Setup program.
SCIA.ESA PT uses a standard Setup program like many other MS Windows applications.
The installation of SCIA.ESA PT can be made in three modes:
local installation,
installation on a network server,
connection to a network server.
Local installation
Starting the installation
The installation of SCIA.ESA PT is started by running SETUP.EXE program. Once this program has
been started, a language selection dialogue appears on the screen. The language selected here
determines the language of the installation program.
The selected language also affects the language of help files that will be installed. In addition, the
selected language is adjusted as a default language for the first run of the installed SCIA.ESA PT.
Compact
Selective
The user may select whether help files will be installed and what language
versions will be installed.
33
SCIA.ESA PT
The next dialogue then summarises the installation information. Once the information is confirmed, the
installation process is started.
The installation program adds group SCIA.ESA PT xx (xx differs according to a particular version of
the program) into Start > Programs. The new group contains items for running the application and its
help. In addition, a short-cut is added onto the desktop.
34
SCIA.ESA PT
In addition, the following folders are set when the application is installed under Windows 2000 or
Windows XP:
User files
Temporary files
Project files
The following folders are set when the application is installed under Windows NT:
User files
C:\WINNT\Profiles\USER_PROFILE_NAME\ESA1\User
Temporary files
C:\WINNT\Profiles\USER_PROFILE_NAME\ESA1\Temp
Project files
C:\WINNT\Profiles\USER_PROFILE_NAME\ESA1\Data
Note: If the user has to or decides to reinstall the program, for any reason, it is generally advisable
NOT TO delete the contents of User files folder. This folder holds all possible settings made by the user.
If the folder is removed as well, all the previously made settings will be lost (which of course, may be
desirable in some cases).
System requirements
Hardware requirements
processor speed
1 GHz
RAM
256 MB
graphic card
projects
120 MB
and
Software requirements
MS Windows NT 4.0
MS Windows 2000
MS Windows XP
Login requirements
In order to install SCIA.ESA PT, the account must have administrator rights.
In order to run SCIA.ESA PT, the account can have just user rights.
Note: MDAC stands for Microsoft Data Access Components. These system drivers provide for
access to databases of various types. SCIA.ESA PT uses particularly Microsoft Access driver. Some
software, e.g. MS Office, offer these system drivers and most of user already have them installed on
their computer. For those who do not have it, the drives are stored on SCIA.ESA PT installation CD
and may be installed separately prior to the installation of SCIA.ESA PT.
35
SCIA.ESA PT
Demo version
Demoversion is fully functioning in all modules with limitation in calculation. Only 25 beams and 2
load cases can be calculated. It is even possible to print results, but all printed material contains
background text "UNLICENCED SOFTWARE".
Uninstalling program
In order to uninstall the program use standard Windows procedure: invoke Control panel and select
Add or remove program.
Short-cut on desktop
1. If the short-cut has been placed on the desktop automatically during the installation, proceed to step 3.
2. Place the short-cut on the desktop.
a. Click the right mouse button on the desktop.
b. Select New > Short-cut command.
c. Browse the hard disk to find the folder you have installed SCIA.ESA PT into.
d. Select ESA.EXE and finish the New Short-cut command.
3. Double click the short-cut to start the program.
Start menu
1. Click Start button on the left of Windows status bar.
2. Select Programs > SCIA > ESA.
Tips for advanced users: If you are familiar with Microsoft Windows features you may as
well do any of the following:
Assign a hot key to the SCIA.ESA PT program to start it by pressing the defined key combination.
Integrate SCIA.ESA PT into your favourite file manager and start it from the toolbar of that file
manager.
Insert SCIA.ESA PT to the Windows 2000 toolbar.
Insert SCIA.ESA PT to the Microsoft Office short-cut panel.
Use any other approach available in Microsoft Windows environment.
36
SCIA.ESA PT
Folders
Program folders
main program folder
set
db
prof
DocumentTemplates
GraphicTemplates
User folders
set
db
prof
DocumentTemplates
GraphicTemplates
Note: The destination of this folder may be adjusted in the appropriate program setup
dialogue.
Temporary folder
This folder stores all the information that the program needs to store during its run.
Note: The destination of this folder may be adjusted in the appropriate program setup
dialogue.
Project folder
This folder stores the user-crated projects.
Note: The destination of this folder may be adjusted in the appropriate program setup
dialogue.
Files
ESA
Project file
ESAD
Project file that has been created in a demo or student version of the program. It
cannot be read into a standard licensed version of the program.
EPW
DB4
Database file
SET
OTS
EPD
37
SCIA.ESA PT
38
SCIA.ESA PT
catalogue block;
type structure
cut-out
entity
generator
geometric entity
An entity that defines the geometry (or shape) of the structure. See
member.
intersection line
member
mesh
solver
Geometric entities
beam
cross-link
force load
foundation block
hinge
load
moment load
node
predefined load
rigid arm
support
39
SCIA.ESA PT
Cross-sections
catalogue cross-section
general cross-section
reference point
Note: Some more terms may be found in the Glossary at the end of the documentation.
Co-ordinate systems
Introduction to co-ordinate systems
As a user of SCIA.ESA PT you will come across a set of various co-ordinate systems. Some co-ordinate
systems are essential for the work with the program itself, some others may significantly reduce the
effort and time necessary to get the required result.
The co-ordinate systems may be divided into several groups according to what they relate to:
global co-ordinate system
UCS
point definition co-ordinate systems;
geometry definition co-ordinate systems
entity co-ordinate systems
local co-ordinate system
Note: It is highly recommended to locate the created model of a structure close to the origin of the
global co-ordinate system (i.e. near the point whose global co-ordinates are 0, 0, 0) in order to prevent
possible numerical inaccuracy due to numerical operations carried out with excessively great numbers.
It is further recommended to focus on this point especially after the model geometry has been imported
from a third-party CAD program.
40
SCIA.ESA PT
The user-defined co-ordinate system is a three-dimensional right-handed Cartesian co-ordinate system.
The axes of the system are marked X, Y, and Z.
The user co-ordinate system may be set arbitrarily and the setting can be changed during work as many
times as required. In addition, any number of user co-ordinate systems may be defined simultaneously
but just one of them can be active at a time. The user can swap between the previously and also newly
defined user co-ordinate systems whenever it seems to be convenient.
For information about setting and using of user co-ordinate systems see chapter Basic Working Tools
> User co-ordinate system.
Centroidal axes
The two centroidal axes pass the centroid of a cross-section and the first moments (the static moments)
of the cross-section around these axes are equal to zero.
The centroidal axes are marked y and z.
The centroidal axes are used to evaluate important sectional characteristics necessary for design and
assessment to technical standards (code check), e.g. moments of inertia, radiuses of gyration, section
modulus, etc.
For symmetrical cross-sections, the centroidal axes are identical to the principal axes.
For example, for steel cross-sections the centroidal y axis is parallel to the flanges and the centroidal z
axis is perpendicular to the flanges.
41
SCIA.ESA PT
The local co-ordinate system can be rotated around its x-axis if required.
In addition to this local co-ordinate system, also a principal (or main) co-ordinate system can be
referred to on a beam. The principal co-ordinate system of a beam is related to the principal co-ordinate
system of the cross-section of a beam.
42
SCIA.ESA PT
43
SCIA.ESA PT
44
SCIA.ESA PT
Axes
global
local
Fx
Fy
Fz
Mx
My
Mz
External forces
Ux
Uy
Uz
Fix
Fiy
Fiz
local
ux
uy
uz
fix
fiy
fiz
Both external forces and translations are considered as positive when acting in the direction of an
appropriate axis. E.g. Force defined in global co-ordinate system and acting in the direction of the
positive global X-axis is taken as positive. Force defined in global co-ordinate system and acting in the
direction opposite to the direction of the positive global X-axis is taken as negative.
Axes
global
local
Ux
Uy
Uz
Fix
Fiy
Fiz
local
ux
uy
uz
fix
fiy
fiz
Rx
Ry
Rz
Mx
My
Mz
Vy
Vz
Mx
My
Mz
sig x
sig y
sig z
tau xy
tau yz
tau xz
Reactions
Internal forces
Stress
45
SCIA.ESA PT
Units
Introduction to units
SCIA.ESA PT supports various unit types.
SI units
FPS units
foot-pound-second unit
FPS unit
Length units
Imperial length units
The imperial units for length are:
inch (in),
foot (ft).
The official values for conversion are:
quantity
multiply by
to obtain
inch
25.400
millimetre (mm)
foot
0.3048
metre (m)
Format
The format can be:
scientific (1.55E+01)
engineering (15.50E+00) (the exponent is ..., -09, -06, -03, +00, +03, +06, +09, ... )
decimal (15.50)
fractional (15 1/2)
Precision
The precision for scientific and decimal format is defined as follows. Sample value is 3.1415926
46
Decimal length in
Units Setup
Precision
Result
0.1
3.1
0.01
3.14
0.001
3.142
0.0001
3.1416
etc.
etc.
etc.
SCIA.ESA PT
The precision for fractional format is defined as follows.
Fractional precision in Units Setup
Precision
1/8
1/16
etc.
etc.
unit
symbol
millimetre
mm
centimetre
cm
decimetre
dm
metre
Unit symbol
in
nd
inch (2 option)
"
ft
nd
foot (2 option)
st
foot-inch (1 option)
ft in
"
Example
The value is 78.24 cm.
Format
Precision
Unit symbol
Result
scientific
0.001
centimetre (cm)
7.824E+01 cm
scientific
0.01
millimetre (mm)
7.82E+02 mm
engineering
0.001
centimetre (cm)
78.240E+00 cm
engineering
0.01
millimetre (mm)
782.40E+00 mm
decimal
0.01
centimetre (cm)
78.24 cm
decimal
0.001
inches (in)
30.803 in
decimal
0.001
inches (")
30.803 "
decimal
0.001
feet (ft)
2.567 ft
decimal
0.001
feet (')
2.567 '
decimal
0.001
2 ft 6.803 in
decimal
0.001
2' 6.803"
fractional
1/16
feet(')
2-9/16'
fractional
1/16
inches (")
30-13/16"
fractional
1/16
inches (in)
30-13/16 in
fractional
1/16
2' 6-13/16"
47
SCIA.ESA PT
the fractions must be separated from the rest by a hyphen. Once the value is input, the value is
transformed into the defined format (scientific, decimal, fractional), precision and unit symbol.
It is always possible to enter a number in greater precision than defined by settings. The precise value is
stored internally and the displayed value reflects the Units setup.
Display setting
Result
3.5
3.5"
3-1/2
3.5"
5'
60"
5.3' 6"
69.6"
5.3' 6.6"
70.20"
5.3' 6.6
70.20"
3.5
3.5'
3-1/2
3.5'
5'
5.0'
5.3' 6"
5.80'
5.3' 6.6"
5.85'
5.3' 6.6
5.85'
3.5
3' 6"
3-1/2
3' 6"
5'
5' 0"
5.3' 6"
5' 9-5/8"
5.3' 6.6"
5' 10-1/4"
5.3' 6.6
5' 10-1/4"
Angle units
The display of the angle unit is defined by the format and the precision.
Format
decimal degrees (45.000)
degrees/minutes/seconds (45d0'0")
grads (50.000g)
radians (0.7854r)
Precision
The precision of angle units is analogous to decimal format of Length units.
Similarly to Length units, the settings for display style of angle units can be made in Units setup.
48
SCIA.ESA PT
User interface
Introduction to user interface
The user interface is a part of the program that can be seen on the screen and that provides for the
communication between the user and the program. It is often called a "graphical interface".
The user interface consists of several mutually connected and co-operating parts. The following table
shows a brief overview of them.
Title bar
Status bar
Menu bar
Toolbar
Working window
Graphical window
Document window
Preview window
Command line
49
SCIA.ESA PT
In addition to these standard Windows application parts of a user interface, SCIA.ESA PT makes use of
a set of unique specially developed control elements that are described in separate chapters (e.g.
Property window, database manager, etc.).
Title bar
The title bar is the heading of the application window. It consists of three parts:
the program icon (on the left side of the bar)
text information about the application name
text information about the name of the opened and active project and the number of the active project
window
three control buttons for (i) minimising the application window, (ii) making the application window
full-screen, and (iii) closing the application on the right side of the bar.
Note: The first and the last feature of the title bar is the common feature of any Microsoft
Windows application.
Status bar
The status bar is a bar placed at the bottom of the application window. It is used to display information
about the program and/or about the functions under process and it contains a few control elements. By
default the status bar shows the following information:
co-ordinates of the mouse
cursor position in UCS
The bar displays the current length unit (e.g. meter, inch, etc.).
The unit can be easily changed by simple clicking on the unit
box on the status bar.
The working plane box of the status bar shows the current
orientation of the working plane. The orientation can be
changed by clicking on the working plane box.
[SNAP mode]
[Current UCS]
This button displays the current UCS for the active window. If
pressed, it opens the UCS manager.
[Active code]
The status bar also displays a brief help text for program elements like a toolbar button or a menu
function if the mouse cursor is just being placed on such an element.
50
SCIA.ESA PT
Note: The status bar in the picture does not show the global co-ordinates of the mouse
position. This option can be switched on or off in the Application settings.
Menu bar
The menu bar is, by default, located just under the Title bar of the application window. It can be,
however, moved into another position within the application window. It can be either docked to the left
or upper edge of the application window, or it can be let floating anywhere within the work area.
Majority of SCIA.ESA PT functions is accessible via this menu. There are some functions that can be
accessed only from the tree menu of from toolbars.
Example of menus
menu View > View
It opens another tree menu in the same window. E.g. service Structure,
Loads, etc.
function
branch
It opens a branch of the tree and shows individual functions in it. E.g.
branch Point load offers functions Point load in node and Point load on
beam.
51
SCIA.ESA PT
Closing a service
In order to close the whole service you can do the following:
press the [Close] button,
if a function is still opened, press the [Esc] key twice,
a function has been already closed or terminated, press the [Esc] key once.
Closing a function
In order to close the function, you can use one of the following ways:
press the [Close] button (this option closes the service as well),
press the [Esc] key once.
click the [Arrow] (
Terminating a function
In order to abandon the activated function without accepting the already made changes, press [Ctrl] +
Break keys simultaneously.
It is also possible to invoke the window pop-up menu and select function Cancel.
Example of a tree menu
52
SCIA.ESA PT
Toolbars
Toolbars are a small floating windows-like objects containing sets of buttons. The buttons can be used
for opening various functions. The toolbars may be let floating on the screen or may be docked to any
side of the screen.
Examples
toolbar View
toolbar Geometrical
manipulations
Command line
The command line provides for the following:
some functions can be activated via typing the appropriate command,
if any function has been already called (regardless whether via the command line, menu, tree menu, or
toolbar button), it displays guiding instructions on the command line,
if any function requires a numerical input (e.g. co-ordinates of an inserted point), the corresponding
value or values may be typed on the command line.
Especially the second feature is very useful particularly for beginning users as they are clearly guided
through the function they want to use and can simply follow the presented step-by-step instructions.
Syntax of commands
The syntax of a command on the command line is:
command parameter1 [parameter2] [parameter3] [etc.]
Example
SEL BEAM1
This command adds the beam named BEAM1 into the current selection.
*
@*
co-ordinate in GCS
53
SCIA.ESA PT
Number
[space] [sign] [nnn] [.] [nnn] [exp] [sign] [nnn]
[space]
if any, ignored
[sign]
sign plus or minus (+ or -)
[nnn]
row of digits 0,1, ..., 9
[,]
decimal comma or point
[exp]
exponent sign e or E
Separator
;
<
@123;23;5
@123;23
@123
*123;23;5
*
54
SCIA.ESA PT
Property table
A property table is a SCIA.ESA PT unique control used in the program dialogues and in the Property
window. The control looks like a table (basically a two column multi-row table) whose first column
contains names of individual items displayed in the table and the second column shows their values.
Generally, the values in the "value cells" of the property table may be modified. There are various
means for the change of the value (see bellow). In addition, the individual items of the table may be
interlinked either (i) to another part of the program (e.g. another dialogue) or (ii) to a graphical window.
Both variants represent a powerful feature increasing significantly the simplicity and speed of editing
process.
In order to unify the appearance of the program dialogues, the property table is also used even for
passive display of information. In such a case, the "value cells" are disabled to prevent an accidental
alteration of the values.
It contains the name of the item whose value is displayed in the coupled
value cell.
group cell
This is a special case of the name cell. Sometimes, the name cell is
standalone and is not coupled with any value cell. This is used to display
e.g. the name of a group of items.
value cell
This cell holds the corresponding data. The data may or may not be edited
depending on the particular situation.
The value cell may be of several types. Where possible, the cell terminology is taken from the standard
MS Windows terminology for dialogue box components. In parenthesis, a descriptive name is added (if
applicable).
edit box
(simple value cell)
The basic type of cell provides for manual input of value. Depending on
the particular item the value may be either numerical or alphanumerical.
This control is used for items where the proper value is defined by
selection from a list of available variants.
tick box
This type of cell provides for two limit value only for YES and NO.
combo box
(yes/no cell)
button
The button can be used to start a required type of action, e.g. open a
dialogue, etc.
colour list
This type is similar to the combo box. The difference is that it offers
colours only.
55
SCIA.ESA PT
The SCIA.ESA PT property table makes this possible. Therefore, where applicable and useful, the
appropriate table cells are interlinked with corresponding drawing parts.
As an example we may give the dialogue for editing of a cross-section. Here, the dimensions of a crosssection represent exactly what this feature is ideal for. On clicking any of dimension lines in the
drawing, the corresponding table row is highlighted, and vice versa.
Example of a property table
The picture below shows the cross-section editing dialogue. The mouse cursor is positioned in the
graphical window of the Cross-section manager over the height dimension line. After the left mouse
button was clicked, the corresponding item in the table above the picture got the focus (the blue item).
Progress bar
Especially for large models, some actions performed in SCIA.ESA PT may be rather time consuming.
In order to tell the user what the progress is, a progress bar is shown on the screen.
It simply:
indicates that the program is working,
measures what portion of the total work has been already finished.
The progress bar may appear either in a modal dialogue or on a status bar.
It may look like e.g.:
Note: If the application window is not maximized, it may happen that the progress bar cannot fit
into the status bar whose length is limited by the adjusted width of the application window. In that case,
the progress bar that would normally appear on the status bar is invisible.
56
SCIA.ESA PT
Application windows
Introduction to application windows
All the information that the program can give to the user is displayed in an application window. An
application window can of the following types:
graphical window,
document window,
preview window.
The user can use all the window types at the same time and swap between them freely, or he may use
just one type at a time. It depends completely on his or her will and habits.
At the same time, as many graphical and document windows can be opened as the user considers
convenient to him. On the other hand, there can be opened just one preview window.
Graphical window
This window can be perceived as a drawing board, however with rather advanced functionality. A
model defined by the user is displayed in this window. The individual parts of a model can be literally
drawn in this window. All selections of any function are made in this window type and any response of
the program to the users action affecting the model is shown in this window. Also the calculated results
are shown in this window. The window both displays the project data and receives information from the
user provided by means of mouse moves and clicking.
An arbitrary number of graphical windows, regardless of their type, can be opened at the same type for
one or several different projects.
Example of a graphical window
57
SCIA.ESA PT
58
SCIA.ESA PT
Document window
This window type is used to display a document or report about an analysed model, its input data,
results of calculation, and assessment to technical standards (i.e. code check). This window can contain
both graphical and text information.
An arbitrary number of document windows, regardless of their type, can be opened at the same type for
one or several different projects.
Example of a document window
59
SCIA.ESA PT
Preview window
At first sight, the preview window looks like a document window. In fact, it is a simplified version of
the document window. You can display information about required entities in this type of window in
the form of clearly readable tables and even edit the structure data in them.
For example, it is possible to display in the preview window information about selected cross-sections,
about selected beams and their load, etc.
Example of a preview window
Property window
Property window
The property window has its name derived from a property table that is displayed in it. The property
window summarises parameters, characteristics and selected options of particular entities such as nodes,
beams, loads, result diagrams, etc.
The property window always shows information related to the selected entities or selected function.
However, the property window has been designed to not only passively display the properties, but also
to provide for fast and easy modification of them.
If the current selection consists of only one entity, generally all the parameters can be modified. If more
than one entity has been selected, the property window automatically applies a filter and displays the
parameters that the selected entities have in common.
If a function has been started, the property window may contain some switches that may affect the
behaviour of the function. Most of the functions from service Results are good examples as the
property window enables the user to select required quantity to-be-displayed, adjust the style of result
diagrams, etc.
Example of a property window
60
SCIA.ESA PT
Action buttons
As the name suggests, the Property Table comprises properties of a particular part of a structure
model. Sometimes however, the property table contains also a control that starts a particular action
related to the element whose properties are displayed in the table.
If such controls (buttons in particular) are put somewhere inside the table, they may be overlooked.
Therefore, these buttons were "extracted" from the table and are located in a special section called
Action buttons or Action toolbar.
Thus, all the actions that are accessible for the current properties or for the "property-owner" are visibly
and clearly separated from the often long list of information and can be easily accessed.
Action buttons are used in various parts of SCIA.ESA PT.
Refresh
Single check
Optimisation
Preview
61
SCIA.ESA PT
service Steel >
function Connection
check
Open preview
Refresh
Preview
62
SCIA.ESA PT
Detailed properties
Models created in SCIA.ESA PT consist usually of a large number of individual elements. Some of
these elements themselves have a lot of specific properties. Some of the properties may depend on other
properties. Consequently, the total number of properties that must be treated may be enormous.
If all the properties were listed in the Property window, whenever the particular element is selected,
the Property window would be overfilled, unclear, and its contents confusing, which in turn could lead
to unintentional mistakes during the input of property values.
Therefore, a new solution has been developed. Property tables that are too complex to be shown in a
single Property window are divided into several parts, each of which contains properties related to a
single "master" property listed in the main property table.
The "slave" property tables are simple modal dialogues accessible from the main property table via a
button.
Example
Lets imagine a simple frame connection of a column and inclined beam.
The Property table shown in the Property window of such a connection may look like:
63
SCIA.ESA PT
If an end plate is inserted into the connection, a button next to the check box appears and if pressed, the
End plate property dialogue is displayed:
Here all the properties related to the end plate may be defined.
Similarly, if bolts are defined, a button next to the Bolts check box is offered and if pressed, the Bolts
property dialogue is displayed:
64
SCIA.ESA PT
Here all the properties related to the used bolts may be specified.
Database managers
Introduction to database manager
A database manager is a tool that provides for all possible operations related to manipulation with
entities stored in some of program databases. The term "program database" stands e.g. for a database of
materials, cross-sections, catalogue blocks, etc. defined in a current project.
It is obvious that:
individual entities of these databases must be somehow defined,
there must be a way to edit them, copy them, delete them,
the user must have an opportunity to review parameters of the individual entities,
there must exist a procedure to select one entity as a "default" for functions requiring an entity of that
type as an input parameter,
the approach to all these points must be unique regardless the type of database.
Consequently, SCIA.ESA PT integrates a tool called "manager".
The list shows all the entities related to the database of the manager that
have been defined in the current project so far.
Property table
This table shows a brief summary of parameters for the database entity
that is just selected in the list of already defined entities (see above).
Graphical window
Control buttons
The buttons provide the access to the functions that are accessible from
within the particular manager.
Filter
65
SCIA.ESA PT
Property table
The property table displays parameters for the entity that is selected in the list of defined entities. It
provides for a quick review of the parameter values. Some of the parameters can also be edited here.
But normally, the modification of the parameters is performed in the editing dialogue for a particular
entity type.
Graphical window
This window contains a schematic drawing of the database entity the parameters of which are presented
in the property table. This window is fitted with a pop-up menu. The menu offers the user some
important functions related to the displayed entity.
Control buttons
There are several control buttons in the Manager that allow to user to use various actions that may be
performed with database entities.
button
meaning
[New]
This button opens the New entity dialogue where a new entity can
be defined and inserted into the current project.
[Edit]
This button opens the Editing dialogue for the entity currently
selected in the List of defined entities. The Editing dialogue
provides for thorough and detailed review or editing of the entity
parameters.
[Delete]
This button allows the user to get rid of those entities of the
particular database that are no longer necessary in the project.
[Copy]
The Copy button makes a copy of the entity that is selected in the
List of defined entities.
[System
database]
[Read]
[Save]
[Text Output]
This button opens the preview window and displays all the
parameters in it for the entity that is selected in the List of defined
entities.
[Close]
This button has got two functions. First, it sets the currently
highlighted item in the List of defined entities as the active (or
current) entity. Second, it closes the database manager.
Filter
The filter provides for more readable representation of data in the Manager if the current project
contains an excessive number of defined entities of the particular type. The filter allows the user to set a
limited set of entities that are displayed in the List of defined entities. The entities that do not meet the
chosen criterion are "removed" from the list, but still remain normally defined in the project.
Note: Some specific database managers may contain additional functionality. It is added in the
form of additional control buttons.
66
SCIA.ESA PT
Example of a database manager
Note: The Particular manager can also be opened from various property dialogues that contain an
item associated with the particular database manager Such an item contains a button to open the
appropriate manager.
67
SCIA.ESA PT
Example:
A cross-section manager opened from within the property dialogue of a new beam.
The user may define the cut-out that should fit into the graphical
window.
Zoom all
This option zooms the drawing in or out so that the whole drawing
fits the available window area.
Gallery
Document
Copy to clipboard
68
SCIA.ESA PT
Program settings
Language of program
Language of the program
By default, the program starts and works in the language chosen during the installation. For many users,
however, another language of the user interface may be more suitable. The language of the application
and language for outputs can be set in the Setup > Options dialogue.
) on toolbar Main.
Note: The change takes affect only after the restart of the program.
User level
Level of the user interface
The user may choose from two predefined settings of the user interface:
Standard
This option is recommended for beginners and for those who need
to analyse just simple, mainly 2D, frame structures. In this level,
the program automatically hides some features that are not
essential for standard or simple projects.
Advanced
Standard level
In the Standard level there are several limitations:
Project settings:
Functionality
Project settings:
Model
Project settings:
Loads
Service Structure
Service Structure:
New beam
69
SCIA.ESA PT
Service Structure:
Support
Node
Geometrical
manipulations
Scale
Stretch
Join
Extend
Polyline edit
Curve edit
Calculation
Force load
Predefined load
Line grid
Selections
Application options
Workspace settings
Workspace settings cover various parameters that allow the user to adjust the SCIA.ESA PT user
interface to meet his/her needs, requirements and habits.
Environment
Templates
Here, the user may specify template drawings that are used
whenever a new drawing is being printed or created in the Paper
space gallery.
Directories
Protection
Code
Other
For setting of application options see chapter Adjusting the application options.
Environment settings
Parameters affecting the user interface appearance make up this group of Workspace settings.
70
SCIA.ESA PT
Window settings
Show scrollbar in view
Rendering
The item sets the mode that is used for drawing into application
graphical windows.
Hidden lines
Rendering
Disabled
Disabled wire
Enabled (hardware or
graphic card rendering)
Software emulation
Hidden lines
The Hidden lines option serves as a substitute for full and proper rendering if the Rendering itself is
disabled.
The available options are:
Invisible
The hidden lines (hidden parts of entity surfaces) are not drawn at
all.
Dashed
Note: The settings made here determine which mode of rendering and hidden line display is set for
the application. This setting does not mean that the rendering of the scene (i.e. of what is displayed on
the screen) is really applied. To do so, the rendering must be switched on for the required graphical
window. This can be done by means of the appropriate view parameter for the appropriate graphical
window.
71
SCIA.ESA PT
Command settings
Right mouse button click
generates End of function
Skins
Select skin
This option allows the user from pre-defined screen styles of the
application.
Other parameters
Maximum number of
grouping properties
For setting of application options see chapter Adjusting the application options.
Overview drawings
manager
For setting of application options see chapter Adjusting the application options.
Directories settings
This dialogue allows the user to specify the location of SCIA.ESA PT files. The adjustment can be
made separately for individual file types.
Temporary
User
Project
Database
Profiles
Note: The changes made in this dialogue will take affect ONLY after the program is closed and
restarted. The items on this tab sheet CANNOT be edited if any project is currently opened.
For setting of application options see chapter Adjusting the application options.
72
SCIA.ESA PT
Project settings
This dialogue offers a set of settings that relates to projects opened in SCIA.ESA PT.
None
For setting of application options see chapter Adjusting the application options.
Protection settings
The Protection settings specify the type of software protection that is used with the program.
The hardware lock (dongle) that is an integral part of a properly licences installation of SCIA.ESA PT
contains information about available (i.e. legally purchased) modules. The licence information can also
be stored in a coded file that can be stored on the local computer or anywhere within the local network.
The licence information from this coded file can be read by a commercial licence manager Flexlm. The
licence manager can manage multiple licences and control the number of simultaneously attached (i.e.
working at the same time) users. The licences controlled by the licence manager Flexlm are called
"floating" licences. The licence stored directly in the dongle is called "standalone".
Type
demo
only standalone
only floating
first
standalone,
floating
then
first
floating,
standalone
then
network
For setting of application options see chapter Adjusting the application options.
73
SCIA.ESA PT
) on Main toolbar.
Save as user
default
Project settings
Basic project settings
Basic project data
The basic data of a project describe the project and define some of its main parameters.
Project filename
It shows the name of the project.
Project data
This group of items allows the user to enter some statistical data about the project
Name
Part
Description
Author
Date
Structure
Here, you can choose the type (or we can say "dimension") of the structure you want to model.
Depending on the type selected, some of the functions and options of the program may be disabled or
hidden (e.g. in the case of 2D frame oriented in plane XZ, the button for setting the sight of the model
from the direction of X and Z axes respectively won't be present on the View toolbar). This feature
leads to a significant simplification in the operation of the program for simpler types of structures. The
functions and options that are not appropriate (are not possible practically) for the particular type are
74
SCIA.ESA PT
hidden and do not add to the complexity of the program. The idea behind this feature is: A complex task
requires a complex tool, but a simple task can get by a simple tool.
Truss XZ
Frame XZ
Truss XYZ
Frame XYZ
Grid XY
Plate XY
Wall XY
General XYZ
Note: Item Structure is compulsory and the user has to make a choice from the available variants.
Material
This option tells the program which materials will be used for members of the structure. The advantage
of this in advance selection is that the program functions working with materials will know, which
material the user is interested in. Therefore, the functions will not offer other material types and,
consequently, the dialogs, lists and similar items will be lucid and readable as much as possible.
If the user realises later that some other material type is necessary, it is of course possible to call the
setting dialogue any time in the future and widen the selection of used material types.
Note: At the beginning, i.e. at the time when a new project is being created, it is necessary to select
at least one material type.
Project level
The user can choose a layout of the program interface which best reflects (i) his or her habits, (ii) his or
her level of familiarity with the program, and (iii) the complexity of the project to be dealt with. Two
options are available:
Standard
the program interface will offer the most often used functions and
features
Advanced
the program interface will offer all available functions and features
Model
One
Absence
Construction stages
75
SCIA.ESA PT
Code
The selection of the active code determines how the program deals with data related to a specific
technical standard. In practice it means that the code selection affects:
the materials offered as code-related materials, e.g. steel or concrete grades, etc.
the procedures, algorithms and possible parameters performing and necessary to perform code checks.
Note: The choice of a particular national standard may have an effect on the layout and even
functionality of numerous functions. E.g. functions like Load case and Load group have got parameters
that depend on the current code of the project. That means that these function offer the user different
parameters for e.g. Czech standard than for lets say Eurocode. Also the functionality of some functions
or services is different for different codes.
The procedure for setting the parameters is the same as for other project parameters.
Functionality settings
SCIA.ESA PT offers a wide range of capabilities. In order to make the operation of the program as clear
and simple as possible, the project settings allow for selection of those features that are needed and
required.
The Functionality settings dialogue comprises options that control both the appearance and function of
the program. That means that until some advanced feature is selected in this dialogue, the program
neither performs the specific task nor even offers it in the menu.
The functionality options are divided into several groups.
Non-linearity
This option controls whether the non-linear analysis is available in solver options and, therefore,
whether the user can perform a non-linear calculation of his/her problem. The Non-linearity
functionality comprises several sub-items. These sub-items are independent on each other and only
some of them may be selected for a particular project.
Initial deformations and
curvature
Support non-linearity
Friction support
Stability
This option allows the user to calculate stability problems.
Dynamics
When ticked the option makes the dynamic analysis features available to the user. The appropriate
dynamics-related functions and parameters become available in menus and solver adjustment dialogues.
76
SCIA.ESA PT
There is one dynamics sub-option:
Seismic
Initial stress
The option, when selected, opens possibility for the introduction of initial stress state in members of a
structure being modelled in SCIA.ESA PT.
Subsoil
The Subsoil functionality represents an important and powerful feature of the program especially if the
interaction of the analysed structure with its subsoil must be taken into account.
CAD shape
This option enables the user to use two different "shapes" in his/her model. Normally, the calculation
model is created and used for calculations, evaluation of results and design and checking to a particular
technical standard.
In addition, the user may also define a CAD shape that is derived from the calculation shape and can be
used for impressive drawings and is also useful during the design of connections.
Climatic loads
If wind or snow loads are supposed to act on the structure, this functionality option must be set ON.
Parameters
Advanced users of SCIA.ESA PT may find it very useful to define some of the program input values as
parameters. Parameters, if applied, provide for fast, easy and simple change of e.g. structure
dimensions, load values, etc. One single modification of the appropriate parameter leads to automatic
regeneration of the model with the new defined value.
Prestressing
This option provides for calculation of prestressing.
Steel
Design of steel structures may require not only the determination of internal forces and deflexions, but
also some other tasks related to a safe design and realisation of a steel structure.
Pinned connections
Frame connections
Fire resistance
The type of fire resistance for steel members may be defined after
this option has been selected.
Overview drawings
Expert system
If this option is ON, the user may use the expert system for the
design of connections. User defined connections may be saved
into this system and the saved connections may be applied later to
other joints.
Connection
monodrawings
This option activates a wizard that helps the user create drawings
of defined connections.
The procedure for setting the parameters is the same as for other project parameters.
Loads settings
The procedure for setting the parameters is the same as for other project parameters.
77
SCIA.ESA PT
Wind region
This parameter defines the region where the modelled structure will be located. The region may
influence wind loads that the building will be exposed to. The user may choose from three options for
this item:
None
Code
Library
The user specifies the height-wind pressure curve. The real load is
then defined as a force load but its type must be set to Wind. The
load value input by the user then represents the load width.
Note: For more information about the generation of wind load see chapter Loads > Load generators
> Wind generator.
Snow region
This parameter defines the region where the modelled structure will be located. The region may
influence snow loads that the building will be subject to. The user may choose from three options for
this item:
None
Code
Snow weight
The user specifies the snow weight per square meter. The real load
is then defined as a force load but its type must be set to Snow.
The load value input by the user then represents the load width.
Note: For more information about the generation of wind load see chapter Loads > Load generators
> Snow generator.
Combinations settings
This tab provides for the adjustment of load case parameters for automatic generation of load case
combinations based on a particular national standard.
The procedure for setting the parameters is the same as for other project parameters.
78
SCIA.ESA PT
black background
document colour
document monochrome
Used for the graphical output (paper space gallery), the structure is
painted in colours.
graphic output
monochrome
Used for the graphical output (paper space gallery), the structure is
painted in black-and-white style.
This option saves the current settings for all palettes as your
personal settings.
79
SCIA.ESA PT
Store user default setting
This option loads the settings that have been previously saved by
means of the button described one line above.
This option loads settings for the current tab as were define by the
manufacturer.
This option reads the settings that have been previously saved with
button Store user default setting.
This option enables the user to load into the current tab settings
from the corresponding tab of any other palette.
This option converts the colours on the current tab into grey scale.
This option is not available for dimension lines.
This option converts all the colours on the current tab into black
colour.
This option is not available for dimension lines.
Colours Setup
Adjustment of colours is a part of settings made for graphical palettes.
The adjustment of colour and line style can be made separately for each entity type and drawing part.
The following parameters can be adjusted for each available entity or symbol:
colour
The user may select from a set of basic pre-defined colours or may
mix his/her own shade.
line style
width
width type
Note: The settings are made separately for individual palettes. For more information about the use
of palettes see chapter Display Setup palettes.
80
SCIA.ESA PT
Font Setup
Adjustment of fonts is a part of settings made for graphical palettes.
For each of the texts the following parameters can be adjusted:
size
size definition
colour
placement
bold
italic
underline
strikeout
Note: The settings are made separately for individual palettes. For more information about the use
of palettes see chapter Display Setup palettes.
The user may select from a set of basic pre-defined colours or may
mix his/her own shade.
style
width
width type
middle line
surface
labels
This option specifies the style that is used to display beam labels.
cross-section
This option specifies the style that is used to display beams crosssection.
81
SCIA.ESA PT
Note 1: The settings are made separately for individual palettes. For more information about the
use of palettes see chapter Display Setup palettes.
Note 2: The Setup dialogue supports the standard Windows feature multiple selection. Therefore,
if the same property should be set for several beam types, the types can be selected at the same time and
the property adjusted in one step. The multiple selection is accessible via [Shift] + click and [Ctrl] +
click combination.
Note 3: For more information about structural types see chapter Geometry > CAD model.
size definition
font size
st
Note: The settings are made separately for individual palettes. For more information about the use
of palettes see chapter Display Setup palettes.
Units Setup
In SCIA.ESA PT the user uses and comes into contact with a good number of various physical
quantities. In order to allow the user to adjust preferable units and display style of these quantities, the
program offers a means for users adjustment.
The adjustment can be done in Units Setup dialogue.
82
SCIA.ESA PT
Unit "parameters"
Unit
Decimal length
Output format
Output format
decimal
78.24 cm
782.4 mm
scientific
7.824E+01 cm
78.240E+00 cm
fractional
3/16 in
deg/min/sec
ft in
engineering
7.82E+02 mm
782.40E+00 mm
fractional
2 ft 6.803 in
) on toolbar Project.
Note: For more information about units see chapter Terminology and conventions > Units.
Scales
Adjusting the scales
The entities displayed on the screen are displayed in a specific scale in order to fit into the area of the
graphical window. The user may adjust the scales to comply with his/her wishes.
) on toolbar View.
83
SCIA.ESA PT
Note: The size of drawn symbols (loads, masses, etc.) is calculated from the values of
parameters described above and also from the value of scales multiplier described in chapter
Fast multiplying of scales. The larges symbol of all the symbols is as big as the value of
multiplier. I.e., if the multiplier is equal to 1, the largest symbol is one metre long, if the
multiplier is equal to 2, the largest symbol is two metres long. The size of other symbols is in
proportion to the largest symbol and is calculated from the parameters specified in the table
above.
The dialogue contains also three save/read buttons.
Read application
default
Save as user
default
84
SCIA.ESA PT
Scales for all entities are so adjusted that the largest drawn symbol is as long (in metres) as the
multiplier value.
For more about the procedure of setting the symbol size see chapter Adjusting the scales.
See also Example of scales setup.
Figure 1
Setup > Scales > Loads and masses > Force = 1
Setup > Scales > Loads and masses > Mass = 1
Fast scales multiplier on toolbar View = 1
The largest symbol is 1 metre long (see the auxiliary dimension line on the left). Symbols of loads and
masses are of the same size.
85
SCIA.ESA PT
Figure 2
Setup > Scales > Loads and masses > Force = 1
Setup > Scales > Loads and masses > Mass = 2
Fast scales multiplier on toolbar View = 1
The largest symbol is 1 metre long (see the auxiliary dimension line on the left). Symbols of masses are
half size of the load symbols.
Figure 3
Setup > Scales > Loads and masses > Force = 1
Setup > Scales > Loads and masses > Mass = 1
Fast scales multiplier on toolbar View = 2
The largest symbol is 2 metres long (see the auxiliary dimension line on the left). Symbols of loads and
masses are of the same size.
86
SCIA.ESA PT
Figure 4
Setup > Scales > Loads and masses > Force = 1
Setup > Scales > Loads and masses > Mass = 2
Fast scales multiplier on toolbar View = 2
The largest symbol is 2 metres long (see the auxiliary dimension line on the left). Symbols of masses
are half size of the load symbols.
Advanced settings
Document Setup
The Document Setup dialogue enables the user to adjust default values for the style of document. The
parameters are described in chapter Document > Adjusting the document default settings.
Note: The settings adjusted in this dialogue are taken into account whenever a new drawing is
inserted into the picture gallery by means of Picture to gallery function ( ). For example, if the
default picture style is set to "wire", the drawing from the graphical window is inserted as "wired" even
though it was e.g. rendered in the graphical window. The style may be later edited in the Picture gallery
manager.
FE mesh Setup
Finite element mesh is generated automatically by the program. The user, however, may specify
parameters that control the generation process.
These parameters may be defined in the calculation dialogue or in the program setup.
The setup dialogue can be opened using menu function Setup > Mesh.
The meaning f individual parameters is given in chapter Calculation > Generating the FE mesh >
Parameters of FE mesh.
87
SCIA.ESA PT
Solver Setup
This setup dialogue provides for adjustment of basic parameters controlling the calculation. The
parameters are described in chapter Calculation> Calculation types > Static linear calculation.
The parameters may be also specified in the calculation dialogue just before the calculation is executed.
88
SCIA.ESA PT
Selections
Introduction to selections
Whenever the user needs to do anything with any part of his/her model, s/he must, first of all, determine
which part of the model should be treated. In other words, the user has to make a "selection" of
members that will be processed.
Once the selection is defined, the required operation may be started. The selection may be formed by a
single entity or it may hold as many entities as required. Generally, the selection may contain entities of
the same type, or it may contain several entity types. Which of the two cases is applied depends on the
intended operation. Some operations require specific entity types, other operations may be carried out
with any entity types.
In general, there are two approaches to start an operation:
the user first makes the selection and then starts the appropriate function (the function then deals with
the prior made selection),
the user first starts the required function and then (i.e. from within the function) makes the selection.
Which approach is actually applied depends only on work habits of a particular user.
To sum up, the selection can be not only made and utilised in a function, but it can be also modified
(reduced or extended), cleared, saved into a file for later use or loaded from a previously created file.
Selections are controlled by:
Menu View > Selections,
Selections toolbar.
Making a selection
In order to make a selection, the program must be in the selection-enabled mode. This mode is the
default mode of the program and only a limited number of functions changes this mode into a selectiondisabled mode. The selection-enabled mode is identified by the mouse cursor that looks like a
diagonally oriented arrow with a small square attached to the tip of the arrow. Once this cursor is on the
screen, it is possible to make selections freely.
There are two basic ways to make a new selection: using the mouse or typing a command on the
command line. In both ways it is a piece of cake.
In addition, a selection can also be made via filters. That means, that the user specifies a condition that
should be fulfilled by all selected entities. For example, the user may specify the condition that the
cross-section must be a rolled IPE 300. The filter-controlled selection then looks for and selects all
beams with such a cross-section.
89
SCIA.ESA PT
One entity is selected each time the user clicks the mouse
button.
intersection line
rectangular cut-out
polygonal cut-out
working plane
select-all
previous
Single selection
Intersection
line
Rectangular
cut-out
Polygonal cutout
Working plane
Select all
Previous
Single selection
In order to make a selection, the user has to:
1. place the mouse cursor on the entity he/she wants to select,
2. click the left mouse button.
That is all that is necessary to make a selection by mouse. To add another entity, the user just puts the
cursor on another entity and clicks the left mouse button.
Intersection line
When this mode is invoked, all entities that are intersected by a defined line are added into the selection.
The line may be either a single straight line or a polygon consisting of straight lines.
90
SCIA.ESA PT
4. Click the left mouse button.
5. Repeat the previous two steps as many times as required.
6. Close the polygon, ie. either
a. press [ESC] key, or
b. invoke the pop-up menu, select End polyline command and run it, or
c. define the last point with a double-click on the left mouse button.
Cut-out
This mode enables the user to select all entities located inside a mouse defined cut-out. There are two
different kinds of the cut-out. The first one serves for selection of entities located fully inside it. The
other one can be used to select entities that are both fully inside and overlap the cut-out.
Polygon
This mode is similar to the previous one. The difference is that the user draws an arbitrarily shaped
closed polygon instead of a simple rectangle.
Working plane
In this mode, the program automatically selects all entities located in the current working plane.
Select-all
All displayed entities are automatically selected.
Filter-controlled selection
The filter-controlled selection is useful if the user wants to select all entities that meet a specific
condition. This type of selection is described in the following chapter.
91
SCIA.ESA PT
Command syntax
SEL [switch] parameter
Switch
switch
meaning
Parameter
parameter
example
entity name
NONE
Examples
sel
sel
sel
sel
sel
none
*
N1
+ N*
B*
sel | B1
description
SEL
BEAM2
3
SEL
BEAM2
?
SEL
B?
SEL
B??
SEL
B*
SEL
NONE
92
SCIA.ESA PT
Note: It is also possible to remove entities from selection using command "SEL" typed on
the command line with the appropriate switch and parameter. For more information see chapter
Making a selection.
93
SCIA.ESA PT
The filter is OFF and any entity of any type may be selected.
For service
For tree
2. This action makes another filter button available [Filter by service tree on/off] (
).
3. Press in button [Filter by service tree on/off] on Selection of objects toolbar in order to select Filter
for tree.
Modifying a selection
Any existing and active selection may be modified, i.e. some of the selected entities may be removed
from it and some other entities may be added to it.
94
SCIA.ESA PT
Applying a selection
A selection is usually made to carry out an action (i.e. call one or more of SCIA.ESA PT functions). In
fact, vast majority of SCIA.ESA PT functions works with a selection and modifies the entities in the
selection according to defined functionality. Therefore, it must be clear how to associate the selection
with the required action. Fortunately, this crucial step is completely automatic and absolutely
straightforward in SCIA.ESA PT despite the fact that there exist two opposing approaches.
Clearing a selection
If a selection is no longer useful, or if it was made improperly (e.g. wrong entities have been selected),
or if any other reason occurs, the selection may be cleared. It means that the selected entities are
removed from the selection but NOT from the project. Just the selection is emptied.
There are several ways to clear a current selection:
Press [ESC] key,
Click [Cancel selection] (
95
SCIA.ESA PT
6. Confirm the name and finish the operation.
Editing in the property window for multiple selected entities of the same type
If several entities of the same type are selected, the property window displays the intersection of their
properties. That means that the dialogue contains values of those parameters which are identical. If any
parameters are of different value for different beams in the selection, the value cell in the property
window is left blank.
The user may once again edit any item in the property window. This relates even to the blank cells. If a
value is input into any of the cells, that value is assigned to all the entities in the selection.
Editing in the property window for multiple selected entities of various types
Here the same can be said as in the paragraph above. Whats more, the combo box at the top part of the
property window contains a list of all types whose entities are in the current selection. When the used
selects any item from this list, the properties of this entity type are shown in the property window.
The user may then review or edit them as described above.
96
SCIA.ESA PT
In other words, if the user selects fewer entities than specified in the parameter Maximum number of
grouping properties, the Property window is filled in with the parameters of selected entities.
Consequently, the parameters can be easily edited.
On the other hand, if the number of selected entities is greater than the number specified in parameter
Maximum number of grouping properties, the Property window is left blank. If required, the
Property window may be filled in manually by pressing button [Update property dialogue] ( )
located at the top right corner of the Property window..
This feature may be useful particularly for large projects with a great number of entities. The time that
is necessary to collect and sort all the parameters of all selected entities is growing with the number of
selected entities. In addition, it is assumed that usually the user will select only a limited number of
entities for direct editing in the Property window. And, if the user selects a really vast number of
entities, it is assumed that the selection was made for some of manipulation functions and not for direct
editing.
Therefore, it is possible to make as large selection as necessary and apply any of manipulation function
to it, but the Property window is not filled in for excessive selections. If, however, the user does want
to edit directly even the enormous number of entities, he/she may fill in the Property window manually
by means of the above mentioned button.
Adjust the view parameters so that only the middle line of a slab is displayed on the screen
97
SCIA.ESA PT
If you select the outline of the main slab, the main slab is highlighted and also selected.
In order to select the opening, you must select the opening itself.
And now, lets change the view parameters and let also the surfaces of the slab displayed.
If you select the surface outline of the main slab, the main slab is highlighted and also selected. In
BUT be careful, it is NOT selected.
addition, the opening is highlighted,
98
SCIA.ESA PT
In order to select the opening, you must select the opening itself.
Activity
Introduction to activity
The concept of activity is based on the assumption that it is convenient to hide a part of the modelled
structure and work only the remaining part. This is useful mainly for larger projects where a great
number of beams and other entities may reduce the lucidity and comfort of performed operations.
The activity feature provides for selection of only those members that are essential for a certain
manipulation or operation. The rest of the structure is temporarily hidden from the users view.
In SCIA.ESA PT the activity can be realised by means of two approaches:
Layers - see chapter Layers for more details
Activity functions see individual activity functions.
Activity types
There are several approaches the user may choose to determine which part of the structure should be
active (i.e. visible and available for manipulations).
Layers
Working plane
Selection
Clipping box
The procedure to switch the activity (i.e. to switch it ON if the activity is OFF and
vice versa)
Either call function Tools > Activity > Activity On (or Activity Off).
99
SCIA.ESA PT
Or click button Activity On (or Activity Off) on Activity toolbar (
).
Note: Both the menu item and the tooltip of the function mentioned above contain the
information about the current Activity type.
).
).
).
100
).
SCIA.ESA PT
).
).
).
Note 1: When visible, the inactive members are drawn in a style defined for Inactive members in
Colours setup (see chapter Program settings > Project settings > Display style settings > Colour
setup).
Note 2: The function works like an ON / OFF switch. That means that if the inactive members ARE
NOT drawn, the function makes them appear. If the inactive members ARE drawn, the function hides
them.
Layers
Introduction to layers
One of the important entity properties that should be understood well is the layer property. Experienced
users definitely use layers all the time and that is why their work is so effective. Good use of layers is
one of important aspects of a good model-making-and-evaluating practice.
Basically, layers are the computer equivalent of tracing overlays on a drawing board. However, layers
are much more powerful because you can have many layers in a single project and you can control the
101
SCIA.ESA PT
visibility and colour of layers independently. This makes working with very complicated projects much
more efficient.
When you start a new project, it has only one layer. The first thing you should do, therefore, when you
start a new SCIA.ESA PT project is to create some new layers.
Layers manager
The Layers manager is a tool to control the layers defined in a project. The Layers manager provides
for creating, editing and deleting of layers.
The manager itself uses the same "manager philosophy" as other SCIA.ESA PT managers do. It
contains control buttons for standard manager operations:
New
Edit
Copy
Delete
Undo / Redo
Text Output
In order to open the Layers manager use either menu function Tools > Layers or tree menu function
Tools > Layers.
The Layers manager can also be opened from various property dialogues that contain item Layer.
Such an item contains a button to open the Layers manager.
102
SCIA.ESA PT
The picture above shows the selection of the appropriate layer for a beam.
103
SCIA.ESA PT
104
SCIA.ESA PT
nd
rd
It defines the side to which the Y-axis of the new co-ordinate system will point.
2 point
3 point
Note 1: The two inserted points defining the new system MUST NOT lie on a vertical line.
Note 2: Please read Rules for using a UCS.
105
SCIA.ESA PT
106
SCIA.ESA PT
The procedure for the selection of UCS for the active graphical window
1. Open the UCS manager:
a. in tree menu call function Tools > UCS,
b. on status bar click button showing the name of UCS associated with the active graphical
window.
2. Select the UCS that should be assigned to the active graphical window.
3. Close the UCS manager.
107
SCIA.ESA PT
The procedure for the modification of a UCS by means of UCS submenu functions
1. If it is not the case that the UCS you want to modify is the current (active) one, make it current first.
2. Open submenu UCS (either in menu Tools > UCS, or under button [Setting of UCS for active view]
( ) on toolbar View).
3. Select the required way of modification.
4. If necessary, input required parameters (i.e. required point or points).
5. The UCS has been modified and is now kept as the current UCS.
6. Open submenu UCS (either in menu Tools > UCS, or under button [Setting of UCS for active view]
( ) on toolbar View).
7. Select function Store the current UCS (
).
8. Select the name of the UCS that has been modified and rewrite it with the new adjustment.
The procedure for the definition of a new UCS from within the UCS manager
1. Open the UCS manager.
2. Click button [New]. This creates a copy of the current UCS.
3. Click button [Edit] to adjust parameters of the new UCS.
4. Type in the required values for the origin of the UCS and for direction of its axes.
5. Close the editing dialogue.
6. Close the UCS manager.
108
SCIA.ESA PT
The procedure for the definition of a new UCS parameters using a menu/toolbar
function
1. Open submenu UCS (either in menu Tools > UCS, or under button [Setting of UCS for active view]
( ) on toolbar View).
2. Select the required way of definition.
3. If necessary, input required parameters (i.e. required point or points).
4. Once more open submenu UCS (either in menu Tools > UCS, or under button [Setting of UCS for
active view] ( ) on toolbar View).
5. Select function Store the current UCS (
).
109
SCIA.ESA PT
2. Make sure that the working plane is adjusted properly, i.e. that it is oriented in such a way that a normal
to the working plane is parallel with the axis of intended rotation.
3. Call menu function Tools > UCS > Rotate (You may as well activate toolbar function Setting of UCS
for active view > Rotate from toolbar View).
4. Type the angle by which the UCS should be rotated.
5. Close the dialogue.
UCS in windows
Each graphical window can have a different UCS. The UCS can be assigned to a particular window
from the UCS manager.
The procedure for association of a particular graphical window with a particular UCS
1. Select the graphical window you need to associate with the required UCS.
2. Open the UCS manager.
3. Select the required UCS.
4. Close the UCS manager.
110
SCIA.ESA PT
If the program is in point definition mode or point selection mode, the co-ordinates of the mouse cursor
are displayed on the program status bas. The co-ordinates are given in user co-ordinate system.
Note: If required, the co-ordinates of position of the mouse cursor may also be displayed in
the global co-ordinates.
Working plane
Introduction to a working plane
A working plane is a plane in which the mouse cursor moves in the three-dimensional modelling space.
The working plane can be adjusted arbitrarily to reflect the current needs of the user. The working plane
is always placed into one of the basic planes of a user co-ordinate system (UCS). It means that the
working plane is very closely bound to UCS.
111
SCIA.ESA PT
The procedure to adjust the working plane into the required UCS main plane
1. Verify that the current UCS is defined as required.
2. Adjust the working plane into XY or YZ or XZ plane of the UCS:
a. Either using toolbar View and its button [Setting of UCS for active view] (
),
112
SCIA.ESA PT
A required kind of the object SNAP mode can be selected (activated) in the Cursor snap setting
dialogue.
The picture above shows "in action" the SNAP mode set to Midpoints.
Dot grid
Midpoints
Endpoints / Nodes
Intersections
113
SCIA.ESA PT
Orthogonal points
Tangential points
Surface edges
2. Proceed with the opened function up to the moment you need to change temporarily the SNAP mode.
3. Click the required icon on the mentioned toolbar.
4. The SNAP mode is temporarily re-adjusted for the following single step.
5. Once you define the point, the SNAP modes returns to the original setting.
Dot grid
Introduction to a dot grid
A dot grid is an area in the graphical window covered with regularly spaced dots to aid drawing. The
spacing between grid dots is adjustable. The grid dots are not plotted.
114
SCIA.ESA PT
The dot grid is always put into the current working plane, so that it can be used for the definition of
points (e.g. end points of individual members) by means of mouse.
Properly adjusted dot grid may significantly speed up the process of geometry definition.
SCIA.ESA PT offers two types of the grid: orthogonal and radial.
),
5. The adjusted grid will be displayed on the screen unless it is switched off.
115
SCIA.ESA PT
To be precise, the first condition does not have to be fulfilled and the dot grid may still be used. But as
the dots of the grid are not visible, it is not recommended to use this configuration (unless you are a
really advanced and skilful user of SCIA.ESA PT).
Using menu function View > View > Show / hide dot grid.
Line grid
Introduction to a line grid
A line grid is a kind of a three dimensional grid. Individual vertices of the grid can be used to define
points of the modelled structure.
One can imagine the line grid as a set of wire cubes placed one next to another to create a larger wire
cube. The vertices of individual small wire cubes are the vertices of the line grid. Whats more, the
cubes may be not only regular cubes, but also other solids like a tetrahedron, irregular hexahedron, etc.
The grid may be of either regular or irregular (variable) dimensions in any direction.
The tool is extremely useful for the definition of complex 3D structures on condition that at least some
parts of the structure are regular (i.e. of the same spans or of the same height).
116
This line grid represents the basic type. The vertices of the
grid are defined in Cartesian co-ordinates and the grid as a
whole resembles a regular rectangular prism.
SCIA.ESA PT
Oblique
Spherical
117
SCIA.ESA PT
Cylindrical
Or:
118
) on View toolbar.
SCIA.ESA PT
119
SCIA.ESA PT
name,
parameters of its display style.
Name
The name serves for easy identification of individual line grids if more than one grid are defined.
Label format
120
SCIA.ESA PT
Base plane
The base plane defines the plane where the main grid labels will be located. The user can select from
the three base planes oriented in the three main planes of the global co-ordinate system (XY plane, YZ,
plane, XZ plane).
Label format
The user may adjust the format of the labels. The following parameters can be specified:
position of labels,
offset of labels,
text size,
a circle drawn around labels.
121
SCIA.ESA PT
The picture above shows the use of line grid for the insertion of columns during creation of a model of a
hall.
122
SCIA.ESA PT
Zoom cut-out
Picture to document
Picture to gallery
Print picture
Picture wizard
123
SCIA.ESA PT
View
Move
Rotate
Scale
Stretch
Mirror
Copy
Delete
Picture wizard
124
This menu item contains type and name of the entity under
cursor. This item performs no action, it just says the user
which entity the mouse cursor is positioned over.
SCIA.ESA PT
Edit properties
The picture below shows a sample pop-up menu that was invoked with the mouse cursor positioned
over an entity called B3.
125
SCIA.ESA PT
Zooms in.
Zoom out.
126
SCIA.ESA PT
View in direction X
View in direction Y
View in direction Z
Zoom in
Zooms in.
Zoom out
Zooms out.
Zoom by cut-out
Zoom all
Zooms in or out.
The operation of the wheel-like buttons is simple. Just place the mouse cursor over the "wheel", press
the left mouse button, hold it down and "turn the wheel" with left-right, or up-down, movement of the
mouse over the pad.
127
SCIA.ESA PT
Zoom in
Zoom out
Rotate
Press [Ctrl] key and hold it down. Then press the right
mouse button and hold it down as well. Move the mouse
over the pad in order to get the required view direction.
Shift
Press [Shift] key and hold it down. Then press the right
mouse button and hold it down as well. Move the mouse
over the pad in order to get the required position of the
structure on the screen.
Rotation of view
The centre of rotation depends on initial conditions.
No entity is selected
Clipping box is ON
The parts of the structure that are not necessary for the
current operations may be hidden, in other words removed
from the view.
This approach is described in chapter Basic working tools
> Layers or Basic working tools > Activity.
Clipping box
128
SCIA.ESA PT
View
-1.0
1.4
-1.0
-1.0
-1.4
-1.0
0
0
1
129
SCIA.ESA PT
The perspective projection can be set using:
Either: Menu function View > View > Perspective view,
Or:
) on toolbar View.
Option is ON
Option is OFF
View parameters
Introduction to view parameters
Each entity that is defined in SCIA.ESA PT is not "just a geometrical shape". There is a good number
of various attributes attached to each entity. The attributes may be for example material, cross-section,
layer, name, construction type, etc. Each of the attributes that is defined for a particular entity can be
displayed on the screen.
Whats more, some of the attributes such as for example cross-section or surface can be drawn in
several ways. SCIA.ESA PT enables the user to control the way individual entities are displayed by
means of view parameters.
These view parameters tell the program which particular attribute of each entity should be shown and
which graphical representation should be used.
View parameters can be defined en block for the whole structure as unique, or they may be defined
separately for individual entities. Each entity can be displayed with different view parameters.
130
SCIA.ESA PT
View
Note: In addition to the basic groups of view parameters the settings dialogue may contain also
switches for various advanced data such as Steel data or Steel connections. The basic groups are
described below.
Entities
Structure
Style + colour
Member surface
Rendering
Cross-section
The user can control whether beams are drawn with fully
drawn or just symbolic cross-section.
Member LCS
Node LCS
Buckling length
Style + colour
Normal
Colour by layers
Colour by material
Colour by cross-section
System line
Bar
131
SCIA.ESA PT
System line + bar
Member surface
None
Calculation model
With offsets
CAD model
Note: If Member system line option is set to None and simultaneously Member surface option is
set to None as well, the result is that members are not drawn at all. Consequently, it may seem that the
members have disappeared from the project, which is however not the case.
Rendering
Wired
Hidden lines
Rendered normal
Transparent
Cross-section
None
Section
In screen plane
Longitudinal XZ
Longitudinal XY
Additional data
Style / rendering
132
SCIA.ESA PT
Model
Display model data
Load
Display load
Load case
Mass
Display mass
Mass group
Name
Cross-section name
Cross-section type
Length
Layer
Nodes
Display label
Name
X co-ordinate
Y co-ordinate
Z co-ordinate
Loads
Display label
Name
Value
Total value
Note: Items Value and Total value are significant for loads that are not defined directly by its
force or moment impulse, but that were defined by means of a wind generator, load generator, or as a
predefined load. For such loads, SCIA ESA PT can display two different types of data. First, the input
value (e.g. width load) can be shown, i.e. the value. Second, the calculated load per meter of length can
be displayed (i.e. the total value).
Masses
Display label
133
SCIA.ESA PT
Name
Value
Buckling lengths
Label
Name
Description
Mesh
Label
Nodes
Elements 1D
Elements 2D
Note: The finite element mesh can ONLY be displayed if at one calculation has been already
performed and its results are still available.
View
Disable tooltips
View vector X, Y, Z
Clipping box
134
SCIA.ESA PT
The procedure for adjustment of view parameters for selected entities only
1. Select the entities the view parameters of which should be altered.
2. Call function Set view parameters
a. either: menu function View > Set view parameters > Set view parameters,
b. or: window pop-up menu function Set view parameters
3. Make required adjustments.
4. Confirm the settings with OK.
Calculation model
This option displays the model with the focus laid on the
numerical calculation. Therefore, only axes of individual
beams are displayed and they are accompanied with supports,
loads, local co-ordinate systems and other data that are
important from the calculation point of view.
CAD model
Regeneration of view
Introduction to regeneration of view
It is a common phenomenon in CAD and similar "drawing" programs that once the drawing becomes
excessive or is being edited and modified, the "current state" displayed on the screen may happen not to
reflect completely the "reality". This is due to the fact that it is not possible to guarantee a flawless
automatic regeneration of the view. If the automatic regeneration of the view had to be ensured, it
would result in unbearably slow response of the program.
Therefore, SCIA.ESA PT, similarly to other graphically oriented program, offers the user the possibility
to regenerate the view manually at any time when necessary.
135
SCIA.ESA PT
) on toolbar View.
136
SCIA.ESA PT
Materials
Introduction to materials
Material is one of the principal parameters that affect the behaviour of the structure.
In SCIA.ESA PT, the user can define his/her own material or use a pre-defined material type from
SCIA.ESA PT database. The predefined materials correspond to materials defined in particular
technical codes. The properties of predefined materials thus depend on the active code adjusted in the
current project.
Material types
In SCIA.ESA PT the user may select from the following material types:
steel
concrete
timber
general
Material properties
For each material, the user must specify its properties. It is clear that for material types corresponding
with material grades of a particular technical code the properties are predefined.
The properties may be divided into two groups:
basic material properties,
advanced material properties.
137
SCIA.ESA PT
ultimate strength,
etc.
There are also special material parameters that do not affect the calculation and results, but that may
help the user to make the model clearer. This is e.g. colour. The colour may be used when beams are
displayed on the screen. Thus, all the beams made of the same material will be drawn in the same
colour. The display style can be set in View parameters.
Note: The units for the individual material parameters may be set in Units setup.
Materials manager
The Materials manager is a tool that provides for control of material defined in the project. The
Materials manager provides for creating, editing, deleting, and saving of materials.
The manager itself uses the same "manager philosophy" as other SCIA.ESA PT managers do. It
contains control buttons for the standard manager operations:
[New]
[Edit]
[Copy]
[Change]
[Delete]
[Undo] / [Redo]
[Text Output]
It reads material types that the user has saved into his/her
external database.
138
) on toolbar Project.
SCIA.ESA PT
Note: The Materials manager can also be opened from various property dialogues that
contain item Material. Such an item contains a button to open the Materials manager.
The program adds into the project all material grades defined for the selected material type in the active
code of the project. The active code can be also defined in the project setup dialogue.
It is possible to add some material type in the same way any time later (i.e. not only during the phase of
project creation). The user may use tree menu function Project to open the Project settings dialogue.
Here it is possible to add ticks to any other material types that have not been selected at the beginning.
Once again, the program adds into the project all materials that are specified in the active national code
for the selected material type.
Note: Unless the specific material type is selected in the project settings, it is not possible to add
such material into the project. For example, unless timber is selected in the project settings dialogue,
the material manager does not allow the user to add any timber material.
139
SCIA.ESA PT
).
3. A dialogue with available materials appears on the screen. Its left hand side window shows that
materials defined in the project. The right hand side window lists all available code-specific materials.
4. Add as many materials into the project as required.
5. Close the System database dialogue.
6. Close the Materials manager.
Note: Unless the specific material type is selected in the project settings, it is not possible to add
such material into the project. For example, unless timber is selected in the project settings dialogue,
the material manager does not allow the user to add any timber material.
).
).
Note: Unless the specific material type is selected in the project settings, it is not possible to add
such material into the project. For example, unless timber is selected in the project settings dialogue,
the material manager does not allow the user to add any timber material.
).
140
SCIA.ESA PT
5. Click button [Edit] (
).
Note: Unless the material type General is selected in the project settings, it is not possible to add
such material into the project.
).
).
4. A copy of the selected material is added to the List of defined materials in the Materials manager.
5. Click button [Edit] (
).
141
SCIA.ESA PT
).
).
142
SCIA.ESA PT
143
SCIA.ESA PT
Cross-sections
Introduction to cross-sections
A cross-section together with material is a basic property of a beam. In practice, one can meet a wide
range of various cross-section types, shapes, and sizes. SCIA.ESA PT provides powerful tolls for easy
definition of almost any cross-section type.
A cross-section in SCIA.ESA PT is defined not only by dimensions and shape, but also by the material
or materials used. This means that if you want to use in your project the exactly same shape of a crosssection for two different beams and each of the two beams is made of a different material, lets say of
wood and concrete, you have to define two different cross-sections: one of wood and the other of
concrete.
To minimize the effort the user has to invest in order to define a cross-section, the program offers
selection from a plentiful library of:
industrially produced steel profiles (e.g. I-beams, channels, angles, tubular profiles, etc.),
common geometric shapes,
often used shapes for thin-walled cross-sections,
common shapes of concrete profiles,
commonly used welded steel sections (both open and box) made of steel flats,
often applied two material built-up sections,
possible combinations of two or more steel cross-sections welded together,
variants of rolled cross-section pairs,
standard bridge sections,
solutions for haunch application,
common timber profiles.
In addition, the program allows the user to define an arbitrary cross-section regarding shape, size,
number of parts, number of materials used for individual parts, etc. If required in some special cases, a
cross-section may be defined not via its shape and size, but only by means of explicitly typed sectional
characteristics as the characteristics are what is essential for the calculation.
144
Sectional characteristics that are common to all crosssection types, i.e. sectional area, moment of inertia, section
modulus, radius of gyration, position of centroid, position
SCIA.ESA PT
of shear centre, etc.
sectional characteristics specific
for particular cross-section type
general parameters
Sectional characteristics
The user normally defines a cross-section by means of its type and dimensions. SCIA.ESA PT
calculates automatically the required sectional characteristics.
The basic automatically calculated sectional characteristics are:
A
Surface
Ay/A, Az/A
AL
Iy, Iz
Moment of inertia for bending around the principal y and z axis respectively
IyLCS, IzLCS
Moment of inertia for bending around the yLCS and zLCS axis respectively.
The yLCS, zLCS axes are parallel to the axes of the input axis system, and go
through the centre of gravity. The input axis system is visible on the picture
of the cross-section.
Alpha
Angle between the x axis of the input axis system and the principal x axis.
It
Iw
Warping constant.
Wely, Welz
Elastic section modulus for bending around the y and z axis respectively
Wply, Wplz
Plastic section modulus for bending around the y and z axis respectively
cyLCS, czLCS
dy, dz
Points
y, z
Shear y, Shear z
Shear stress in this point for a unit shear force in y and z direction
respectively.
The sectional characteristics are calculated automatically on closing of the dialogue for the editing of a
cross-section. In addition, the automatic calculation may be carried out at any time during the editing
phase via button [Update] of the above-mentioned dialogue.
In addition to the common sectional characteristics, there are some other parameters that are common to
all cross-section types, such as name, type description, colour, etc.
Note: Each cross-section has two co-ordinate systems which are displayed in the picture of the
cross-section : (i) the input co-ordinate system - the co-ordinates of the points where stresses are
calculated, co-ordinates of the centre of gravity and the shear centre are given in this axis system; (ii)
the principal co-ordinates in the centre of gravity.
145
SCIA.ESA PT
i.e. the sum over the rectangular parts of the thin-walled cross-section where:
d = width of each rectangular part,
t = thickness of each rectangular part.
For closed thin-walled cross-sections, it is calculated using the following formula (2nd formula of
Bredt) :
146
SCIA.ESA PT
where:
Am = surface inside the centreline of the thin-walled section
the sum is over the rectangular parts of the thin-walled section
d = width of each rectangular part
t = thickness of each rectangular part
Note: For more explanation on these formulas we refer to "Stahl im Hochbau, 14. Auflage,
Band I/Teil 2, Verein Deutscher Eisenhttenleute, Dsseldorf, par. 7.4.3.2.2.".
warping constant, Iw
Warping constant, Iw, is calculated by numerical integration over a cross-section coordinate along the
centre line for those thin-walled open cross-sections, for which it is - according to the theory - different
from zero
where:
b = width of the cross-section
h = height of the cross-section
gamma = coefficient depending on the height to width ratio according to the following table :
h/b
gamma
0.1406
1.2
0.1661
1.5
0.1958
0.2287
0.2633
0.2914
10
0.3123
infinity
0.3333
Note: For more information about this method see e.g. "Stahl im Hochbau, 14. Auflage,
Band I/Teil 2, Verein Deutscher Eisenhttenleute, Dsseldorf, Table 7.85.".
147
SCIA.ESA PT
Cross-sectional area, A
The cross-sectional area, A, is calculated by summing up the sectional areas of individual crosssections,
Warping constant, Iw
The warping constant, Iw, is taken as the sum of warping constants of the individual cross-section parts.
Type
Detailed (description)
Material
Colour
Edit property
Fabrication
In addition to the numerical data available for a cross-section, the program offers also a drawing of the
cross-section with marked vertex numbers. The numbers are important mainly if the user includes a
cross-section characteristics table into a document where some of the values correspond to individual
148
SCIA.ESA PT
vertices. Therefore, it is essential to know the convention of vertex numbering. The vertex numbers are
given on a separate tab of the graphical window in the editing dialogue.
Note: This option is ONLY available if EC3 is selected as a national code, and (at the same time)
the fabrication parameter of the cross-section is set to Cold formed.
Cross-section types
Geometric shapes
SCIA.ESA PT offers a predefined set of basic cross-section shapes.
The procedure for insertion of this cross-section type into a project is identical with the procedure for
any other cross-section type; the user just has to specify the type in the type-selection dialogue, choose
the appropriate shape and size, and review or change the required parameters.
Similarly to other cross-section types, basic sectional characteristics are automatically calculated and
the user may type in the non-numerical parameters such as name, material, colour, etc.
Sample cross-sections
Note: A separate book Profile library: Checked sections contains an overview of rolled
cross-sections included in SCIA.ESA PTs database.
Thin-walled cross-sections
SCIA.ESA PT offers a predefined set of common steel thin-walled cross-sections.
The procedure for insertion of this cross-section type into a project is identical with the procedure for
any other cross-section type; the user just have to specify the type in the type-selection dialogue, then
choose the appropriate shape and size, and oversee or change the required parameters.
As for any other cross-section type, the sectional characteristics such as sectional area, moment of
inertia, position of centroid, etc. are calculated automatically by the program. The user may input or
modify other cross-section parameters such as material, name, etc.
In addition to the basic sectional characteristics, the program also calculates, designs and displays data
such as:
shape of a wall stiffener,
149
SCIA.ESA PT
diagram of warping lines,
diagram of shear stress distribution over the cross-section for a unit force acting in Y-direction,
diagram of shear stress distribution over the cross-section for a unit force acting in Z-direction,
centre lines of the cross-section.
Note: Some of the above mentioned data depend on the shape of the particular crosssection. Therefore, some of the values may not be available for some of the cross-section shapes.
Sample cross-sections
150
SCIA.ESA PT
Warping lines
Shear Y
Shear Z
Shape of stiffeners
151
SCIA.ESA PT
Note: Some of the above mentioned data depend on the shape of the particular crosssection. Therefore, some of the values may not be available for some of the cross-section shapes.
E.g. the shape of stiffener is not provided for angles, or no additional parameters are available
for bars, etc.
Sample cross-sections
Note: Some of the above mentioned data depend on the shape of the particular crosssection. Therefore, some of the values may not be available for some of the cross-section shapes.
152
SCIA.ESA PT
Sample cross-sections
Note: Some of the above mentioned data depend on the shape of the particular crosssection. Therefore, some of the values may not be available for some of the cross-section shapes.
Sample cross-sections
Haunch cross-sections
It is quite common that a beam contains haunches at one or both of its ends. Sometimes the beams
cross-section just simply "changes" its dimension (usually the height), sometimes a special crosssection is made for such a beam. This special cross-section consists of two parts one that remains
153
SCIA.ESA PT
constant along the whole beam span, and one that "makes" the haunch. SCIA.ESA PT allows the user to
select from a set of pre-defined "haunch" cross-sections.
The procedure for insertion of a "haunch" cross-section into a project is identical with the procedure for
any other cross-section type; the user just have to specify the type in the type-selection dialogue, then
choose the appropriate shape and size, and oversee or change the required parameters.
As for any other cross-section type, the sectional characteristics such as sectional area, moment of
inertia, position of centroid, etc. are calculated automatically by the program. The user may input or
modify other cross-section parameters such as material, name, etc.
In addition to the basic sectional characteristics, the program also calculates, designs and displays data
such as:
shape of a wall stiffener,
diagram of warping lines,
diagram of shear stress distribution over the cross-section for a unit force acting in Y-direction,
diagram of shear stress distribution over the cross-section for a unit force acting in Z-direction,
centre lines of the cross-section.
Note: Some of the above mentioned data depend on the shape of the particular crosssection. Therefore, some of the values may not be available for some of the cross-section shapes.
Sample cross-sections
154
SCIA.ESA PT
Note: Some of the above mentioned data depend on the shape of the particular crosssection. Therefore, some of the values may not be available for some of the cross-section shapes.
Sample cross-sections
155
SCIA.ESA PT
diagram of shear stress distribution over the cross-section for a unit force acting in Y-direction,
diagram of shear stress distribution over the cross-section for a unit force acting in Z-direction,
centre lines of the cross-section.
Note: Some of the above mentioned data depend on the shape of the particular crosssection. Therefore, some of the values may not be available for some of the cross-section shapes.
Sample cross-sections
Concrete cross-sections
SCIA.ESA PT offers a predefined set of concrete cross-section shapes that are used most often. The
section may be simply selected from the library list. All basic sectional characteristics are automatically
calculated by the program.
The procedure for insertion of a concrete cross-section into a project is identical with the procedure for
any other cross-section type; the user just have to specify the type in the type-selection dialogue, then
choose the appropriate shape and size, and oversee or change the required parameters.
Similarly to other cross-section types, basic sectional characteristics are automatically calculated and
the user may type in the non-numerical parameters such as name, material, colour, etc.
Sample cross-sections
Timber cross-sections
Members made of wood generally use a wooden-specific cross-sections. SCIA.ESA PT library of predefined cross-sections offers also a set for this material.
The procedure for insertion of a concrete cross-section into a project is identical with the procedure for
any other cross-section type; the user just have to specify the type in the type-selection dialogue, then
choose the appropriate shape and size, and oversee or change the required parameters.
As for any other cross-section type, the sectional characteristics such as sectional area, moment of
inertia, position of centroid, etc. are calculated automatically by the program. The user may input or
modify other cross-section parameters such as material, name, etc.
156
SCIA.ESA PT
Sample cross-sections
Bridge cross-sections
Special cross-sections are used for bridges. SCIA.ESA PT offers a collection of such cross-sections.
The procedure for insertion of a bridge cross-section into a project is identical with the procedure for
any other cross-section type; the user just have to specify the type in the type-selection dialogue, then
choose the appropriate shape and size, and oversee or change the required parameters.
As for any other cross-section type, the sectional characteristics such as sectional area, moment of
inertia, position of centroid, etc. are calculated automatically by the program. The user may input or
modify other cross-section parameters such as material, name, etc.
Sample cross-sections
Numerical cross-section
A numerical cross-section is a special cross-section type. It enables the user to define an arbitrary crosssection. The user does not have to define the shape of the cross-section. The only thing s/he has to do is
fill in a table of sectional characteristics.
157
SCIA.ESA PT
General cross-section
A general cross-section is a cross-section that:
may be of an arbitrary shape,
may consist of an arbitrary number of partial cross-sections,
may be made of an arbitrary number of materials.
This type of cross-section may be useful mainly for sections tailored for a specific purpose (steel thin
walled cross-sections, aluminium sections, bridge sections, hollow concrete sections, etc.).
The general cross-section may be designed by means of a tool called General cross-section editor. This
editor is a special environment, fully integrated into SCIA.ESA PT that provides the user with all
functions necessary for an efficient design of a "free-shape" and "free-composition" cross-section.
158
SCIA.ESA PT
choose one if the existing cross-sections as a "default" for later called functions that require a crosssection as a parameter.
The cross-section manager is one of the "managers" integrated in SCIA.ESA PT and its layout and
operation is identical to the other SCIA.ESA PT "managers". It is open when function Cross-sections is
activated. It may represent one of the steps in the General procedure for the definition of a new crosssection.
Generally, there are several ways to open the Cross-section manager:
Tree menu function Library > Cross-sections.
Project toolbar.
Menu function Libraries > Cross-sections.
"Manager" button in any of numerous property dialogues that contain at least one item Cross-section.
Note: Which way is actually chosen depends on two factors: (i) where (what part of the
program) is the manager called from, and (ii) habits of a particular user.
159
SCIA.ESA PT
d. Call menu function Libraries > Cross-sections.
2. Function Cross-sections opens the Cross-section manager.
3. Press button [New item]. This action opens a dialogue for the selection of cross-section type. (Note: If
no cross-section has been defined yet, this step is automatically skipped and the cross-section type
dialogue is opened directly).
4. Select the appropriate cross-section type.
5. Specify the sectional parameters and properties.
6. Review the calculated sectional characteristics and possibly include them into a document.
7. Close the Cross-section manager or repeat steps 3 to 6 as many times as required.
Control buttons
160
SCIA.ESA PT
Control buttons
Button [Add] and Button with a "Right Arrow"
Button [Add] confirms the selection of a particular type and variant. Depending on the cross-section
type and variant, a new cross-section is either (i) inserted directly into the SCIA.ESA PT project, or (ii)
a dialogue for editing of cross-section parameters is opened. The former happens if e.g. a rolled steel
section has been selected because there is no need to specify its dimensions, name, etc. The latter action
is performed if some kind of specification is required for the selected cross-section such as the
definition of dimensions for welded steel or cast concrete cross-section, etc. Once a new cross-section is
inserted by means of this button, the cross-section is added to the List of already defined crosssections.
Button [Close]
This button closes the New cross-section type dialogue.
161
SCIA.ESA PT
Property table
Control buttons
Graphical window
The graphical window displays the cross-section, dimension lines, labels and, if available, some of the
cross-section properties or characteristics: for example cross-section vertex numbers, shape of
stiffeners, diagrams of selected quantities such as shear stress distribution, etc. These additional data
about the cross-section are shown on separate tabs (one tab per each property).
Property table
The property table contains all the available and computable cross-section characteristics and
parameters. Here the parameters can be input or edited.
The parameters can be divided into three groups: basic sectional characteristics, parameters independent
of the cross-section type and type-specific parameters.
It should be stated here that some of the parameters (basic sectional characteristics in particular) cannot
be neither input nor edited as they are uniquely determined by the shape and dimensions of the crosssection and are therefore automatically calculated by the program.
There exists a special interconnection between the property table and graphical window that will be
described later in this chapter.
162
SCIA.ESA PT
Control buttons
Button [Update]
This button starts an algorithm that recalculates the sectional characteristics on the basis of input values.
On entering the editing dialogue for a new cross-section, the property table shows only those
parameters that may be edited. In order to see also the computer sectional characteristics, the button
must be user.
Whats more, the computed sectional characteristics listed in the property table disappear once the user
changes any of the input values. The characteristics are displayed again after this button is pressed. It
must be also used to initiate the regeneration of some of the drawings in the graphical window.
Button [Document]
This button invokes the preview window to show the cross-section parameters in a document-style
table. The table may be edited the same way as a standard document table.
Button [OK]
This button closes the dialogue and accepts all the inputs and changes made in it.
If a new cross-section has been defined in the editing dialogue it is inserted into the project.
If an existing cross-section has been modified here, the changes are taken into account and saved into
the project.
Button [Cancel]
This button closes the dialogue and all the inputs and changes made in it are abandoned.
If a new cross-section has been defined in the editing dialogue it is NOT inserted into the project.
If an existing cross-section has been modified here, the changes are not taken into account and the
project remains unchanged.
163
SCIA.ESA PT
Document-style view in the
preview window
164
SCIA.ESA PT
165
SCIA.ESA PT
The left hand side of the dialogue lists all the cross-sections defined in the current project.
The right hand side of the dialogue lists all the cross-sections saved in the selected user-database file.
The buttons below the list boxes can be used to manage the external database.
Write to database
Writes the selected cross-section from the list of project cross-sections into
the database file.
Write all
Writes all the cross-section from the list of project cross-sections into the
database file.
Delete
).
166
SCIA.ESA PT
The buttons below the list boxes can be used to import items from the external database.
Copy to project
Copies the selected cross-sections from the external user-database into the
current project.
Copy all
Copies all the cross-sections from the external user-database into the
current project.
Note: AT LEAST ONE of the material codes defined in the source project MUST also be defined in
the target project. Otherwise, the import is not made correctly.
Example:
Source project material
codes
EC, SIA
correct
CSN, DIN
EC, SIA
INCORRECT
CSN,DIN
DIN
correct
Import result
167
SCIA.ESA PT
4. Make the necessary changes of cross-section parameters.
5. Close the editing dialogue using [OK] button to confirm the changes.
6. If required, repeat steps 2 to 5 for other cross-sections.
7. Close the Cross-section manager.
Deleting a cross-section
A cross-section that is no longer used in a project, i.e. that is no longer assigned to any of the beams in
the modelled structure, can be removed from the project database. The deletion may both save the
computer memory and improve the orientation in the project data.
It is advisable to remove all unnecessary cross-sections from the project. Any redundant item in the
project database deteriorates the lucidity of the data and may be a source of an accidental mistake.
Note: If a cross-section is used anywhere in the project, the program does not allow the user to
remove it.
Copying a cross-section
It may be convenient for some reason or another to create a copy of an existing cross-section. The copy
may be later modified to define a new cross-section that is similar to its original and varies in a few
parameters only. This procedure may be useful for example if the user wants to make experiments or
variants for cross-sections of the same geometry but different material.
Replacing a cross-section
Sometimes a need may arise to replace one cross-section used in the structure with another one in all its
appearances. This task may be done effectively by means of Change cross-section function.
This function allows the user to replace one of the already defined cross-sections with a new one. Once
the new cross-section is defined, it is applied for all beams in the structure where the "replaced" crosssection was used so far.
168
SCIA.ESA PT
General cross-section
Examples of a general cross-section
This chapter has been made just to give a gist of what form a general cross-sections can be.
169
SCIA.ESA PT
170
SCIA.ESA PT
The individual segments of the polygon may be (i) linear or (ii) circular.
It is possible to adjust the following parameters for the polygonal section.
Name
Type
This parameter cannot be changed and indicates the type of the partial
section.
Material
Corrosion
Phase
Overlap
A polygon may also be used to create an opening in another polygonal cross-section. The only
requirement is that the opening intersects or lies inside the other partial section that may be either of
polygonal or thin-walled type. The intersection of two regions is deducted from the non-opening shape.
A few examples follow.
"Full-time" opening
The smaller polygon (with one circular edge) is fully inside the rectangular polygon. The result is a
cross-section of rectangular outline with an opening.
Partial opening
The two triangular openings just overlap the solid square.
171
SCIA.ESA PT
The result is an irregular hexagonal cross-section.
Type
This parameter cannot be changed and indicates the type of the partial
section.
Material
Corrosion
Thickness
Alignment
The "definition" line may be either the mid-line of the section, or its left or
right surface line.
Phase
Overlap
Library cross-section
A partial section of a general cross-section may also be formed by standard cross-sections imported
from the cross-section library, e.g. by rolled steel cross-sections, predefined concrete sections, wooden
sections, etc.
An arbitrary number of library sections may be added into a general cross-section and they may be
freely combined with polygonal and/or thin-walled sections.
Whats also important is the fact that once inputted the library cross-section may still be edited inside
the General cross-section editor, e.g. the depth of a concrete section, its inclination, etc. may be
changed.
172
SCIA.ESA PT
Note: It is important to remember this rule as it determines which formulas are used to calculate
sectional characteristics.
The procedure to open the General cross-section editor in order to create a new
general cross-section
1. Open the Cross-section manager:
a. either via tree menu item Library > Cross-sections,
b. or using menu function Libraries > Cross-sections,
c. or by means of button [Cross-sections] on toolbar Project.
2. Click button [New] to add a new cross-section.
3. Select General in the Available groups list.
4. Click button [Add].
5. The General cross-section editor is opened on the screen.
6. Define the new cross-section.
7. Close the editor.
8. Confirm the new cross-section.
9. Close the New cross-section dialogue.
10. Close the Cross-section manager.
The procedure to open the General cross-section editor in order to edit an existing
general cross-section
1. Open the Cross-section manager:
a. either via tree menu item Library > Cross-sections,
b. or using menu function Libraries > Cross-sections,
c. or by means of button [Cross-sections] on toolbar Project.
2. In the list of defined cross-section, select the one you need to change.
173
SCIA.ESA PT
3. Click button [Edit] to edit the selected cross-section.
4. The Cross-section edit dialogue is opened on the screen.
5. If only some of the general parameters need to be altered, make the change in the property table of the
dialogue.
6. If the shape or property of only a partial section need to me modified, press button [Edit] in the
property table of the dialogue.
7. The General cross-section editor is opened on the screen.
8. Make the necessary changes.
9. Close the editor.
10. Confirm the result in the General cross-section editor.
11. Close the Cross-section manager.
GCS
GCS parallel
The UCS axes are parallel with the GCS axes but the
origin is not in the origin of the GCS.
Move
Rotate
Previous
174
SCIA.ESA PT
Note: For more information about working plane and user co-ordinate systems in general
see chapters Basic working tools > Working plane and Basic working tools > User co-ordinate
system (UCS).
Zooms in.
Zoom out
Zooms out.
Zoom Cut-out
Zoom All
Zoom Selection
Note: For more information about adjusting the view in general see chapter Basic working
tools > Adjusting the viewpoint.
Depiction
ON
175
SCIA.ESA PT
Colour palette
As in the main graphical environment of SCIA.ESA PT, the user may adjust colour for individual types
of lines. In the General cross-section editor the following colours related to the cross-section may be set
in addition to standard line types.
The setup dialogue may be opened via button (
Cross-section outline
Cross-section midline
Cross-section fibre
Cross-section corrosion
Cross-section joints
Cross-section insert point
Fonts
Once again, the General cross-section editor enables the user to set required font type and size.
The setup dialogue may be opened via button (
Labels of nodes
Main labels
Dimension lines
Similarly to dimension lines used in picture gallery or paper-space gallery, it is possible to set the basic
parameters of dimension lines used for dimensioning of general cross-sections.
The setup dialogue may be opened via button (
Dot grid
The definition and use of the dot grid are identical with those of the main SCIA.ESA PT graphical
environment.
Note: For more information about dot grid in general see chapter Basic working tools >
Dot grid.
One entity is selected each time the user clicks the mouse
button.
rectangular cut-out
intersection line
polygonal cut-out
select-all
176
SCIA.ESA PT
previous
clear selection
Note: For more information about selections in general see chapter Basic working tools >
Selections.
Only snapped
points
If this option is ON, the first two variants are automatically turned OFF
and only characteristic points of already defined entities may be used to
snap to. In other words, only the object SNAP mode is enabled.
Midpoints
Endpoints / Nodes
Intersections
Orthogonal points
This option snaps to a point that forms a perpendicular with the selected
object.
Tangential points
This option snaps to the centre of a circle, arc or polyline arc segment. The
cursor must pass over the circumference of the circle or the arc so that the
centre can be found.
Points on line /
curve N-th
Points in line /
curve % of length
This option is similar to the one above. But the division of a beam is
defined by percents and not by the number of segments.
Note: For more information about SNAP modes in general see chapter Basic working tools
> Cursor SNAP modes.
Geometric manipulations
Several geometric manipulations are available to modify the already input polygonal partial crosssections. The functions are analogous to geometric functions for ESA PT structural entities (e.g.
beams).
Geometric manipulations
Move
Copy
Multicopy
Rotate
Scale
Mirror
Trim
Extend
177
SCIA.ESA PT
Edit polyline
Insert node
Remove node
Convert curve to
line
Convert line to
circle arc
Note: For more information about geometric manipulations in general see chapter
Geometry.
Dimension lines
Once the general cross-section is defined (or partly defined), it is possible to add dimension lines to the
drawing of the section.
There are three types of drawing lines: (i) vertical, (ii) horizontal, and (iii) general.
Style
Label
offset = 5
178
SCIA.ESA PT
offset = 50
Plot line
short
long
Label alignment
left
179
SCIA.ESA PT
centre
right
180
SCIA.ESA PT
6. Use the same approach to define additional vertices of the polygon.
7. When finished, close the function:
a. either by pressing [Esc] key,
b. or via right mouse buttons pop-up menu and its function End of command.
Note 2: When you start inputting individual vertices, the program draws the outline of the section.
If possible, the program also closes the polygon and gives the idea of what the cross-section would look
like if you input the vertex and then immediately close the function. If however, it is not possible to close
the polygon (without intersecting one or more segments), the polygon is let open and only the defined
part of the polygon is drawn.
The two pictures below demonstrate what has been said in the note above. Please note, that the vertex at
the cursor (small square) has not been input yet.
181
SCIA.ESA PT
182
SCIA.ESA PT
Example:
Lets assume that a polygon has been input as shown below.
Another polygon is supposed to follow the circular part of the first polygon.
Step back
This button goes one step back in the definition of the polygon. If a polygon is being defined, the last
vertex is removed. If a circle is being defined by means of three points and two points have been
183
SCIA.ESA PT
defined so far, this function removes the second point of the circle but leaves the first circle point
unaffected.
184
SCIA.ESA PT
Buckling y-y
Buckling z-z
Fabrication
Display final
shape
Refresh
Example
Final shape ON
185
SCIA.ESA PT
Final shape OFF
Corrosion
Here, the user may define that the partial section has been exposed to the
elements and has been "weakened" due to corrosion.
Phase
The partial section may belong to a particular phase (or stage) of the
construction process.
Overlap
If two partial sections overlap, this parameter says which of the two parts
is of higher priority and should be taken as the leading part. The other part
is then cut accordingly (see the example below).
Corrosion example
If corrosion is defined, the corresponding partial cross-section is drawn with a dashed line next to the
outline of the section. The dashed line shows the corroded part of the section. Sectional characteristics
are automatically calculated from the part of the section that has NOT corroded.
Overlap example
Lets assume a general cross-section consisting of two overlapping partial sections: (i) a square and (ii)
a triangle.
186
SCIA.ESA PT
The square is made of concrete (will be drawn in grey colour), the triangle of steel (will be drawn in
blue).
First, lets set the overlap for the square to 1 and let the overlap for the triangle on the default value
equal to zero.
The square is of higher priority, its shape is taken as the leading one, and a part of the triangle is
automatically cut off.
Second, if the overlap priorities are swapped, i.e. the overlap for the square is set to 0 and the overlap
for the triangle is set to 1, the result will be the opposite. The triangle will remain unaffected and a part
of the square will be removed from the final cross-section.
187
SCIA.ESA PT
Editing dialogue
Procedure for changing the properties in the editing dialogue
1. Open the Cross-section manager.
2. Select the cross-section to be modified.
3. Click button [Edit].
4. The editing dialogue is opened on the screen.
5. On its right hand side there is a list of sectional properties.
6. The first three groups may be edited here see below for details.
7. Change the required parameters.
8. Close the editing dialogue via button [OK].
9. Close the Cross-section manager.
Parameters that may be changed in the editing dialogue:
Name
Mat 1, 2, etc.
Colour
Buckling y-y
Buckling z-z
Fabrication
188
SCIA.ESA PT
4. The editing dialogue is opened on the screen.
5. Click button [Edit] located in the property table.
6. The General cross-section editor is opened on the screen.
7. On its left hand side there is a list of sectional properties.
8. Change the required parameters.
9. Close the editor.
10. Close the editing dialogue via button [OK].
11. Close the Cross-section manager.
Parameters that may be changed in the editor are described in chapter Properties of the final general
cross-section.
Note: For library cross-sections, the parameters that may be changed in the editor depend on the
type of the section. For example, the depth and width will be offered in the property table for
rectangular concrete section, while the selection of a different size or type will be available for rolled
cross-section.
189
SCIA.ESA PT
mirrored,
enlarged to the given scale,
trimmed,
stretched.
The application of above-mentioned functions is the same as the application of corresponding functions
in the main SCIA.ESA PT environment.
This functions enables the user to add a new intermediate vertex to the
outline or midline, respectively, of an already defined solid or thin-walled
section.
This function removes the selected node from the outline or midline,
respectively, of an already defined solid or thin-walled section.
Further, co-ordinates of vertices of both polygonal outline of a solid section and midline of a thinwalled section can be manually edited in the property table. The user just has to select the required node
(or nodes) and retype the appropriate co-ordinate in the property table.
Finally, for library sections, the property table provides for the modification of the:
insertion point (which leads to a change of the position of the section within the general cross-section).
rotation.
Note: All the available modification functions and procedures may be freely combined for any of
the partial sections in order to achieve the required final shape and dimension of the overall general
cross-section.
Note: For more information on parameters see chapter Advanced tools > Parametric input
> Using the parameters in the project of the main Reference manual of SCIA.ESA PT.
190
SCIA.ESA PT
5. It is now possible to assign the defined parameters to appropriate dimensions.
Note 1: Whenever the value of parameters is changed, the corresponding cross-section is reshaped
accordingly.
Note 2: Whats more, the parameters appear in the editing dialogue of the cross-section.
Therefore, it is easy to change the cross-section section without necessity to open the General crosssection editor.
Note: The dimensions stated in this example are in metres. Generally, be careful with units when
defining new parameters.
First of all, define the section in usual way. Input the bottom left corner of the section to the origin of
the global co-ordinate system (This is not a general condition, but it is assumed in our example).
Type
Evaluation
Value / Formula
Css length
Value
0.6
Css length
Value
1.0
H1
Css length
Formula
H * 0.5
191
SCIA.ESA PT
D
Css length
Value
0.25
D1
Css length
Formula
H1 + D / 2
B1
Css length
Formula
B/3
B2
Css length
Formula
B/3*2
In the property table set the global Z co-ordinate to parameter H (see below).
Clear the selection. Select the top right corner and set the global Z co-ordinate to parameter H and the
global Y co-ordinate to parameter B (see below).
Z = H; Y = B
Clear the selection. Select the bottom right corner and set the global Y co-ordinate to parameter B (see
below).
192
SCIA.ESA PT
Y=B
Clear the selection. Select the centre of the left circular opening and adjust the global Y and Z coordinates to parameter B1 and H1 respectively (see below).
Z = H1; Y = B1
Clear the selection. Select the centre of the right circular opening and adjust the global Y and Z coordinates to parameter B2 and H1 respectively (see below).
Z = H1; Y = B2
Clear the selection. Select the top most point of the left circular opening and adjust its global Y and Z
co-ordinates to parameter B1 and D1 respectively (see below).
193
SCIA.ESA PT
Z = D1; Y = B1
Clear the selection. Select the top most point of the right circular opening and adjust the global Y and Z
co-ordinates to parameter B2 and D1 respectively (see below).
Z = D1; Y = B2
Close the General cross-section editor. In the editing dialogue, you can see the three Value-type
parameters B, H, D that fully define the cross-sections dimensions (see below).
194
SCIA.ESA PT
The same parameters may be reviewed, though not changed, in the Cross-section manager (see
below).
Any time in the future, you may edit these three values and reshape the cross-section.
195
SCIA.ESA PT
It may also be convenient to make copy or copies of this cross-section and create a set of cross-sections
of different size.
Whats more, dimension lines may be added to the cross-section. If provided with proper labels they
may significantly improve the clearness of the parameters (see below).
An example of the "D" dimension line is in the figure below (see the parameter values on the left).
196
SCIA.ESA PT
Geometry
Elements of a model
A model of a structure consists of many parts or elements. Some of them form the geometry of the
model and some of them define other properties of the structure or define effects that the structure is
subject to.
node
beam
plate, wall
Plates and walls model slabs and load bearing walls ob the
analysed structure. Both entity types may contain openings or
subregions. Before calculation the finite element mesh is
generated on them.
load
support
mass
CAD shape
Nodes
Introduction to nodes
The term "node" is a common finite element method term. However, when talking about SCIA.ESA PT
program, we have to make a strict definition of what the word "node" means in the context of this
software.
First of all, we have to distinguish between a standard finite element node and an ESA node. The two
node types have something in common, but there are also some differences.
FE node
A standard finite element node will be always referred to as an "FE node". Normally, the user will not
encounter this type of node when creating a model of a structure. The FE nodes must be dealt with just
before the calculation of the project, and usually only in special cases. For common projects, the user
can rely totally on the automatic finite element mesh generator integrated in the SCIA.ESA PT
program.
197
SCIA.ESA PT
Node
The word "node" will be used to talk about ESA nodes i.e. about nodes (or points, if you prefer) that
the user deals with.
A node is the simplest entity applied in SCIA.ESA PT program. A node is the basic element. The nodes
define other entity types. For example, a beam is defined primarily by its two end-points that are
nothing else but two nodes.
Each node has got some properties including:
position in modelling space (i.e. co-ordinates),
nodal co-ordinate system (used to define the direction of direction-related properties such as degrees of
freedom).
Each node may belong to just one beam or to as many beams as required. If a node belongs to several
beams, the beams are mutually connected in such a node and internal forces from one beam are
transferred into the other beams. If required, special boundary conditions can be defined for the
connection and thus only some of the internal forces (e.g. only bending moments or shear forces) may
be transferred into the adjacent entities.
What the node and FE node have in common is that both are a proper finite element node. That means
that the finite element mesh generator will ALWAYS place an FE node into an ESA node. On the other
hand, the generator may add some more FE nodes in between the user-defined ESA nodes, in order to
ensure that the finite element mesh corresponds with the required fineness.
There are several types of nodes depending on their "relation" to the beam they are part of.
Types of nodes
SCIA.ESA PT recognises primarily two types of nodes:
an absolute node,
a linked node.
It is important to understand the differences between the two types as the type of node can have a
significant influence on the model properties and behaviour and it also affects functions used for the
modification of model geometry.
Absolute node
An absolute node is defined by its "absolute" position, or we can say absolute co-ordinates, in space.
An absolute node is used to define end-points of members (e.g. beams).
Linked node
A linked node is usually defined by its position, or we can say relative co-ordinate, on a beam.
As the term "linked" suggests, a linked node is used to "link" two entities together.
On the screen, a linked node is marked by a unique graphical symbol. The linked node mark looks like
a pair of short parallel lines drawn in a node.
198
SCIA.ESA PT
Column B1 has two end-nodes N1 and N2. Both nodes are absolute.
Column B2 has two end-nodes N3 and N4. Node N3 is absolute, node N4 is linked and is bound
(linked) to beam B3.
Horizontal beam B3 has three nodes N2, N4, and N5. Nodes N2 and N5 are absolute. Node N4 is linked
is related to beam B3.
The linked node N4 guarantees that column B2 is connected to beam B3 and that internal forces in any
of the two beams are transferred into the other one. This configuration represents the state usually
required in practice.
To demonstrate what happens if the linked node is not applied, lets consider the sample structure as
shown in the following figure.
The structure here is very similar to the previous one. However, there exists a seemingly small
difference and the difference leads to significant consequences.
Column B2 has two end-nodes N3 and N4. And both nodes are absolute.
Horizontal beam B3 has just two end-nodes N2 and N5 which are both absolute.
Because there is no node lying on horizontal beam B3 in the place where column B2 intersects with this
horizontal beam, the two beams do not have a single common node and are not connected to each other.
Both the beams would act as separate structures and not as a single column-beam unit.
The differences between the two node types concerning modification functions (such as move, rotate,
etc.) are given in chapters describing the modification functions.
199
SCIA.ESA PT
200
SCIA.ESA PT
3. Confirm the question box (or question boxes).
Tip: For more information about function Check structure data see chapter Calculation >
Check of data.
If the user is not sure whether there are any free nodes in his/her project, it is always possible to use the
second approach because it means that the program automatically finds any free nodes in the project
and informs the user about the findings. The user then may decide whether the discovered free nodes
should be deleted or kept.
Beams
Introduction to beams
From the definition point of view, beams used in SCIA.ESA PT can be divided into several types
concerning their orientation (vertical, horizontal, etc.) or cross-section (constant, variable). In addition,
there exists another division taking account of the function of beams or their position in the structure
(see chapter CAD Model)
Regardless of the type, each beam is primarily defined by its two end-points and by a set of properties.
The properties can be defined in advance (i.e. before the beam is inserted into the modelled structure) or
afterwards. Once a beam is inserted, it is not bound to its position forever. If required, it can be moved
to another location, rotated, prolonged, shortened or adjusted in any other way to correspond with the
changing demands. Also its properties such as material, cross-section, type of transmitted internal
forces, etc. can be modified any time and as many times as required.
There are two criterions concerning the definition of beams:
Which type of beam can be inserted (defined) directly in one-step action.
Which type of beam can be defined via additional adjustment of appropriate properties on already
inserted (defined) beams.
column
horizontal beam
What all the above-mentioned beam types have in common is that they have a constant cross-section.
201
SCIA.ESA PT
Type
The beam type is not essential for the definition of a beam but may
take effect later. For example, some functions performing design
and check to technical standards take account of the type.
Cross-section
Alpha
Eccentricity ey, ez
This item specifies the way the local axes of the beam are
determined.
LCS Rotation
This value defines the rotation of local axes of the beam. The
rotation is measured around the beams longitudinal axis, i.e. Xaxis.
FEM type
This item says which type of finite element will be used for the
beam.
Buckling length
Layer
Any entity including a beam can be put into a layer. The layer can
thus comprise entities that have something in common (e.g. one
floor, columns of one floor, columns of the same length, etc.)
Once layers are defined and assigned, they can be used to e.g.
display just a particular part of the structure, make selection of that
particular part, etc.)
Name
The name is used mainly for a unique identification of beams (or all entities in general). The name can
be displayed on a screen, printed in output documents, used for selections, etc. For example, the name
together with an advanced feature of the program command-line can be used for very fast multiple
selection of all beam whose name starts with the same letter or letters (e.g. SEL B1? selects all beams
whose name consists of letter B and a number within the range from 10 to 19).
The name is typed as a simple text.
202
SCIA.ESA PT
Type
The type is not very important for the very act of beam insertion (or definition). The beam type has also
no effect on calculation of deflections and internal forces.
However, if one thinks about further analysis and evaluation of the structure in design (code check)
modules and if one wants to perform detailing works (e.g. define lattice girder connections), the beam
type must be set properly. Especially the module for design and checking of connections uses the type
as a crucial piece of information.
The required type can be selected from a list of available options.
Cross-section
The beams shape is defined by the selected cross-section type. Beams of "general beam", "column" and
"horizontal beam" type have got a constant cross section over their length. On the other hand, "haunch
beams" and "arbitrary beams" can have the cross section variable along the longitudinal axis.
The orientation of the cross-section in the beam local co-ordinate system can be adjusted via angle
Alpha (see below).
The appropriate cross-section can be:
either selected from a list of already defined cross-sections,
or defined as a new cross-section in the project via the [Cross-section manager] button.
Alpha
This parameters defines the inclination of the cross-section Z-axis from the beam local Z-axis. This
parameter together with "LCS rotation" provide for an arbitrary "positioning" of a cross-section in a
model.
The angle is input in the pre-adjusted angle unit that is shown in square brackets in the corresponding
table cell.
Eccentricity
If required, an eccentricity may be input in order to provide for more precise definition of structure
shape. The eccentricity is defined in the definition axes of the cross-section.
The eccentricity is defined by two values: eccentricity in Y-direction and eccentricity in Z-direction.
Both values are input into the appropriate table cells in units that have been pre-adjusted in project
settings and that are shown in square brackets in the table cells.
Tip: If the eccentricity value is such that the "eccentric insertion point" coincides with an
outer corner of the cross-section, the eccentricity may be defined simply by means of the
"Insertion point" parameter (see above).
203
SCIA.ESA PT
to specify that the beams local Z-axis is parallel to the Z-axis of the current UCS.
LCS rotation
Sometimes it may be convenient to rotate the local co-ordinate system. For example, if the user wants to
define some load acting in a general direction and introduce it in beams local co-ordinate axes.
The angle defines the rotation of the local co-ordinate system around the X-axis of the same system.
The angle is input in the pre-adjusted angle unit that is shown in square brackets in the corresponding
table cell.
FEM type
From the finite element analysis point of view, the beam can act like a standard beam or like a hinged
(pinned) rod. The difference is that the standard beam is capable of transferring all the internal forces,
while the latter variant only provides for transferring of the axial force.
The required option can be selected from a provided list.
Layer
Each beam can be "put into" a specific layer. The layer, that could be called group, thus can comprise
such beams that will be in the future treated simultaneously. A good and well thought out grouping of
beams in layers can significantly facilitate the manipulation with the model, including even the
evaluation of results. And whats more, a professional use of layers may save a lot of the users
valuable time.
The required layer may be selected from a list of already defined layers. Or, a new layer may be defined
for the beam.
Buckling parameters
Buckling parameters are described in detail in Book Steel Code Check chapter Buckling parameters
> Code independent buckling parameters
and in chapter related to individual national codes.
Additional information can be found in Book Steel Code Check chapter Buckling parameters >
Buckling parameters related to a particular standard.
For adjustment of buckling parameters see chapter Adjusting the buckling parameters.
204
SCIA.ESA PT
Beam types
General beam
A general beam has got only the common beam parameters. Once these parameters are specified, the
beam may be inserted into the model.
In order to insert a new general beam into a model of the structure that is being analysed, you just
follow the general procedure for the definition of a new beam. Attention must only be paid to the
specification of beams position. A general beam is defined by its two end-points (or we can say nodes).
Therefore, the beams position must be specified by insertion of two points: first, the starting or begin
point and then the end point.
205
SCIA.ESA PT
Column
A column is an always vertical beam of a constant cross-section. In addition to common beam
parameters, it has the following properties:
Length
Insertion point
In order to insert a new column into a model of the structure, the general procedure for the definition of
a new beam should be followed. Attention must only be paid to the specification of beams position. A
column is defined by its base point (starting point) only. Therefore, the beams position must be
specified by insertion of a single point.
Note: The statement that the column is always vertical is related to the user co-ordinate system.
Therefore, if the user defines such a UCS whose Z-axis is inclined or even horizontal, a column defined
in this UCS will not be vertical from the global co-ordinate systems point of view. It will vertical in the
context of the current UCS.
206
SCIA.ESA PT
Horizontal beam
A horizontal beam is always horizontal and has a constant cross-section. In addition to common beam
parameters, beam has the following properties:
Direction
Length
Insertion point
In order to insert a new horizontal beam into a model, you just follow the general procedure for the
definition of a new beam. Attention must only be paid to the specification of beams position. A
horizontal beams position is specified by insertion of a single point that determines the location of the
adjusted insertion point.
Note: The statement that the horizontal beam is always horizontal is related to the user co-ordinate
system. Therefore, if the user defines such a UCS whose Z-axis is inclined or even horizontal, a
horizontal beam defined in this UCS will not be horizontal from the global co-ordinate systems point of
view. It will horizontal in the context of the current UCS.
Haunch beam
A haunch beam is a beam whose cross-section varies along the length of the beam. It is also possible
that a part of the beam is of a constant cross-section and only the remaining part contains a haunch.
Therefore, the list of haunch beam parameters may be rather long. It contains the following items:
Haunch placement
Cross-section
Alignment
Length of haunch
207
SCIA.ESA PT
Co-ordinate definition
Haunch placement
The variants for the placement are:
From start
From end
Symmetrical
From start
whole length
208
SCIA.ESA PT
From end
whole length
Symmetrical
whole length
Cross-section
The cross-section defined here replaces the original cross-section of the beam on which the haunch is
defined. That means that the original beams cross-section can be of any type. When a haunch is
defined on a beam, the original cross-section is completely forgotten and the haunch cross-section is
applied.
Examples
A haunch on a basic cross-section of I shape with the height equal to 300 millimetres and top flange
thickness 50 millimetres.
Height of haunch
Shape of haunch
H = 500 mm
H = 1000 mm
H = 1000 mm
and
top flange thickness
increased to 200 mm
Note: It is important to be aware of the fact that only specific cross-sections can be used for
haunches. For example, it is not possible to use a rolled cross-section as it not possible to change its
height over the length of a beam.
209
SCIA.ESA PT
Alignment
The alignment of the haunch may be of several types.
In order to explain clearly the meaning of individual option, lets assume a horizontal beam with a
haunch whose cross-section is of variable height as well as of variable width.
Default
Centre line
side view
plan view
The top surface of the beam
remains flat and horizontal. The
bottom surface is inclined in order
to provide for the change of the
height.
Top
surface
side view
Bottom
surface
side view
210
SCIA.ESA PT
The left surface of the beam
remains flat and horizontal. The
right surface is inclined in order to
provide for the change of the
width.
Left
surface
plan view
Right
surface
plan view
Type of cross-section
Cross-section or
cross-sections
Alignment
Tip: The individual spans can be of different cross-section. And as material is a parameter
of cross-section, it is possible that the individual spans are of different material.
Type of cross-section
The cross-section of the span and its change can be defines in several ways.
Prismatic
Parametric haunch
Two cross-sections
Cross-section / Cross-sections
For prismatic cross-section, this item offers the selection of just one required cross-section.
For parametric haunch, two cross-sections must be specified. However, both of are based on one base
cross-section. The user can specify parameters of the two end-sections. Each of the end-sections may be
either identical with the base cross-section, or changes of the base cross-section dimensions can be
specified.
If the "two cross-sections" option is chosen, the user just selects two end cross-sections.
211
SCIA.ESA PT
Example
212
SCIA.ESA PT
The first situation means a real insertion of a new beam into the model. The latter means that
appropriate properties are defined on already an existing beam in the model. The procedures for the
definition of a "haunch" beam and a beam with a variable cross-section are given in separate chapters.
The principle of the procedure for insertion of a new beam is identical for both a general beam and a
column and a horizontal beam. It is clear that there are some differences between the individual beam
types, and therefore there must be slight differences also in the defining procedure. However, the
differences are so small that a united procedure may be presented here and the differences discussed in
chapters dealing with appropriate beam type.
) that appears just above the command line once the program gets into
) that appears just above the command line once the program gets into the
213
SCIA.ESA PT
) that appears just above the command line once the program gets
Note: Please note, that it is possible to enter multiple "shaped" beams from within one call of
Drawing a member function. You can enter one shape (e.g. polygon), press [Esc] to finish the definition
of the polygon. You however are still "inside" the Drawing a member function. Therefore, you may for
example click [New arc] button, define an arc and again you are still "inside" the Drawing a member
function. This fact can be easily visually verified on the screen. As far as you are still "inside" the
Drawing a member function, the inserted beams are drawn in RED colour. Only when you close the
Drawing a member function, the beams are redrawn in violet colour which means that they are
selected.
214
SCIA.ESA PT
Note: A standard beam (i.e. horizontal beam, column or general beam) is defined with a specific
cross-section. This cross-section is one of the beams parameters. However, when a haunch is defined
on this beam, the haunch defines its own cross-section and assigns it to the beam. The original crosssection is overloaded (forgotten for the moment). However, if the haunch is later deleted, the beam
remains in its position and takes back its original cross-section.
Slabs
Slab types
Plate
Parameters
Name
Type
Specifies the type of the slab. The user may select from types: (i)
plate, (ii) wall, and (iii) shell.
Material
Thickness
215
SCIA.ESA PT
See below.
Thickness value
If the variable thickness type is selected, the user must specify the
direction in which the thickness varies.
Point 1
Defines the first point used for the definition of variable thickness.
Point 2
Member system-plane at
Eccentricity
LCS type
LCS Z axis
The orientation of the local Z axis of the slab may be easily turned
around. This check box does it. See figures below.
LCS angle
Layer
Example of a slab
Variable thickness
The variable thickness of a slab can be input in the property table of a slab. Two points must be input to
define the gradient of thickness change. Corresponding thickness values are specified for each point.
The adjusted gradient is related to the global co-ordinate system. It is advisable to input the two points
in place where the thickness change starts and ends. Otherwise it may happen that due to the
extrapolation of thickness, the final thickness value becomes negative, which would result in an error
message during the calculation of the project.
Example of a slab of variable thickness
216
SCIA.ESA PT
Note: The definition of a slab of variable thickness is a two-step procedure. First, a slab of a
constant thickness must be input. This slab may be then modified and changed into a slab of variable
thickness. The reason is that the "property" of variable thickness is bound to the particular nodes of the
slab that are not yet known in the phase of slab input. In other words, variable thickness is similar to a
haunch on a beam it is an additional property of a slab, not the basic, fundamental parameter.
217
SCIA.ESA PT
swapped orientation
Wall
Parameters
Name
Type
Specifies the type of the slab. The user may select from types: (i)
plate, (ii) wall, and (iii) shell.
Material
Thickness
Thickness value
Member system-plane at
Eccentricity
LCS type
LCS Z axis
The orientation of the local Z axis of the slab may be easily turned
around. This check box does it.
LCS angle
Layer
Height
Insertion point
The wall may be input using its base or its top edge.
218
SCIA.ESA PT
Slab components
Introduction to slab components
There may be a situation that it is convenient to separate a part of a main slab and specify special
parameters for this part. SCIA.ESA PT enables the user to define various types of such a part.
Subregion
Opening
Internal edge
The number of subregions and opening in the main slab is not limited. Individual subregions and
openings may even overlap the main region or intersect each other. The final shape is found as the
intersection of all defined subregions and openings with the order of definition taken into account.
It is not possible, e.g. to insert a subregion into an opening. However, it is possible to do so if at least
one edge of the subregion lies on any edge of the opening.
On the other hand, it is possible to define a main slab into an opening inserted into another main slab.
Subregion of a slab
Parameters
Name
Material
Thickness
Thickness value
If the variable thickness type is selected, the user must specify the
direction in which the thickness varies.
Member system-plane at
Eccentricity
219
SCIA.ESA PT
Opening in a slab
Parameters
Name
An opening may be input in two ways: (i) as a normal opening that lies fully inside the main slab, (ii) as
an opening that overlaps the main slab such an opening then serves as a "cut" to the main slab.
220
SCIA.ESA PT
normal opening
opening as a cut
definition phase
opening as a cut
final shape
221
SCIA.ESA PT
The second picture then shows the tooltip that appears on the screen whenever the mouse cursor passes
over the node.
222
SCIA.ESA PT
Type
Cross-section
Alignment
Effective width
Two types of effective width can be input. Both the value are used
for the modelling of composite cross-section. Value "for internal
forces" is used to recalculate internal of the created composite
cross-section section. Value "for check" (see below) is used to
define the cross-section for the needs of design and check of
reinforced cross-section.
Usually, a rectangular section is attached to the slab creating the
final T or L section. However, also other library cross-sections can
be used to form various composite sections (e.g. steel I section +
concrete reinforced plate).
223
SCIA.ESA PT
for check
See above.
FEM type
Layer
2D member
General parameters
Length
Shape
Beg. node
Specifies the starting node of the rib. This parameter can be edited,
which would affect the location and length of the rib. Before
editing, you must find the name of node you want to use as the
beginning node.
End node
CAD model
This set of parameters can be used to specify the CAD shape of the rib. The CAD shape is important
especially if drawings and/or impressive pictures of the structure are to be made.
See chapter Geometry > CAD model > Parameters of CAD model for more details.
Note: If two overlapping slabs are input, the question that arises is "what property should be
assigned to the intersection of the two slabs?" The answer is simple: "The parameters of the later input
slab are those of the highest priority."
224
SCIA.ESA PT
Note: As soon as the function is invoked and the master slab selected, working plane is
automatically moved to the plane of the selected master slab. When the definition of the slab-component
is over, the working plane returns back to its original position.
225
SCIA.ESA PT
Note: As soon as the function is invoked and the master slab selected, working plane is
automatically moved to the plane of the selected master slab. When the definition of the slab-component
is over, the working plane returns back to its original position.
Note: As soon as the function is invoked and the master slab selected, working plane is
automatically moved to the plane of the selected master slab. When the definition of the slab-component
is over, the working plane returns back to its original position.
226
SCIA.ESA PT
5. Press [Esc].
6. Input the starting and end point of the rib.
7. Close the function.
Geometric manipulations
Geometric manipulations with slabs
Slabs like any other entity may be moved, shifted, rotated, etc. Standard geometry-manipulation
functions may be applied to slabs with a few exceptions:
a slab is manipulated (i.e. copied, moved, etc.) including all its components (i.e. subregions, openings,
etc.),
slab components may be freely manipulated inside the area of the main slab,
it is not possible to copy or move any slab component to another main slab,
if node or nodes (vertices) of a slab (both main and component) are manipulated, the operation is valid
only if the final slab remains planar (i.e. all the vertices of a slab must lie in one plane both before and
after the manipulation),
geometry manipulation functions applicable to slabs are: (i) copy (single and multiple), (ii) move, (iii)
stretch, (iv) rotate, (v) scale, (vi) mirror.
individual nodes of a slab may be moved to a new location using the Drag&Drop feature or via standard
geometry manipulation functions like move, rotate, mirror, stretch, scale.
Note: To move a node, you must first select the node and then invoke the required function (either
the Drag&Drop feature or any of standard geometry manipulation functions.
227
SCIA.ESA PT
First, use function Modify > Polyline edit > Edit polyline insert node and insert two vertices into
the required slab edge. One of the inserted vertices should in the corner of the "flange" of the final Lshape. The other vertex can be inserted anywhere between the first inserted vertex and the "flangeedge" of the plate.
And finally, move the other "flange" vertex to its final position.
228
SCIA.ESA PT
In addition, individual slab edges may be treated as a standard polyline segment or "line", which means
that they may be converted to arcs.
Example
Lets take the L-shaped plate created in the previous example. Lets call function Modify > Curves edit
> Convert line to circle arc. In this first step simply define an arbitrary arc (turned to the right side, of
course) as it will be modified to the final shape in the second step.
Finally, use function Modify > Curves edit > Edit curve arc by radius to input the proper final
radius of the circular arc.
229
SCIA.ESA PT
Catalogue blocks
Introduction to catalogue blocks
Catalogue blocks represent a powerful tool that allows the user to define the "whole" structure in a
single step. The word "whole" has been put into the quotation marks as the structure created here may
either (i) really form the whole structure that should be analysed, or (ii) be just a part of a larger,
complex model.
The catalogue block is a smaller, or we can say standard or template, structure the geometry of which
has been defined in advance by the developer of SCIA.ESA PT. The user has to specify only the
dimensions and properties of his/her particular application. The whole geometry-definition process is
confined to a simple filling in of a short table.
SCIA.ESA PT offers a wide range of catalogue blocks (standard template structures) such as 2D and 3D
lattice girders, towers (masts), 2D and 3D frames and much more. The procedure for their definition has
been unified and, therefore, once the user becomes accustomed to the definition of one of the catalogue
block types, he/she is capable of inserting all other types.
planar frame
frame 3D
tower 2D
tower / mast
two-dimensional lattice
girder - straight variant
two-dimensional lattice
girder - curved variant
three-dimensional lattice
girder - straight variant
three-dimensional lattice
girder - curved variant
curve
230
SCIA.ESA PT
Beam parameters
Name
Dimensions
The dimensions define the size and consequently also the shape of the
beam. Meaning of individual dimension parameters can be clearly seen on
the accompanying picture.
Cross-section
2D Frame parameters
Name
Dimensions
The dimensions define the size and consequently also the shape of the
frame. Meaning of individual dimension parameters can be clearly seen on
the accompanying picture.
Cross-section
231
SCIA.ESA PT
3D Frame parameters
Name
Dimensions
The dimensions define the size and consequently also the shape of the
frame. Meaning of individual dimension parameters can be clearly seen on
the accompanying picture.
Cross-section
Dimensions
The dimensions define the size and consequently also the shape of the
lattice girder. Meaning of individual dimension parameters can be clearly
seen on the accompanying picture.
The parameters define not only the size and shape, but also number of
spans of the girder.
Cross-section
232
SCIA.ESA PT
Dimensions
The dimensions define the size and consequently also the shape of the
lattice girder. Meaning of individual dimension parameters can be clearly
seen on the accompanying picture.
The parameters define not only the size and shape, but also number of
spans of the girder.
Cross-section
233
SCIA.ESA PT
Mast parameters
Name
Dimensions
The dimensions define the size and consequently also the shape of the
mast. Meaning of individual dimension parameters can be clearly seen on
the accompanying picture.
Cross-section
Note: If the current project is of 3D type, the user may choose from a set of three-dimensional
masts. It the project is of 2D type, only two-dimensional musts are available.
234
SCIA.ESA PT
Curve types
circle (x)
circle (y)
circle (f)
ellipse (x)
ellipse (y)
ellipse (f)
235
SCIA.ESA PT
parabola (x)
parabola (y)
hyperbole (x)
hyperbole (y)
hyperbole (f)
chain curve
(x)
sinusoid
spiral
A segment of a spiral.
Curve parameters
Name
The dimensions and other parameters define the size and the shape of the
appropriate curve. Meaning of individual dimension parameters can be
clearly seen on the accompanying picture.
This number specifies how many line segments is used to substitute the
exact curve shape. The higher the number is the smoother is the final
generated curve.
Cross-section
236
SCIA.ESA PT
Note: Which way is actually chosen depends on two factors: (i) where (what part of the
program) is the manager called from, and (ii) habits of a particular user.
237
SCIA.ESA PT
Note 1: Step 2 may be preceded by one more intermediate step. If no cross-section has been defined
when the Catalogue block manager is being opened, the dialogue for the definition of a new crosssection is opened first. After at least one cross-section is defined, dialogue and Cross-section manager
are closed, then the Catalogue block manager is finally opened.
Note 2: Step 8 is available ONLY IF the Catalogue block function was called from within service
Structure. Otherwise, the catalogue blocks defined in steps 1 to 7 are added into the project and saved
with it when the project is saved, but they are not included into the model.
Note 3: When a catalogue block has been defined and is being inserted into the modelling space,
the mouse cursor is attached to one of the block nodes. If required, the user may change this node and
define a new insertion point of the catalogue block. To do so, button [Change the insertion point] ( )
that is located at the end of the toolbar above the command line must be pressed. The catalogue block is
then temporarily placed "somewhere" into the modelling space and the user may select the new
insertion point (using any SNAP options that may be convenient for this). Once the new insertion point
is selected, the mouse cursor is attached to it and the user may finish the insertion of the catalogue
block.
Control buttons
238
SCIA.ESA PT
Control Buttons
Button [OK]
Button [OK] confirms the selection of a particular type and variant. Once this button is pressed a
dialogue for editing of catalogue block parameters is opened. When the parameters are specified and
confirmed, a new catalogue block is added to the List of already defined catalogue blocks.
Button [Close]
This button closes the New catalogue block dialogue.
239
SCIA.ESA PT
Graphical window
Property table
It comprises all the parameters the catalogue block and provides for their
insertion and editing .
Legend drawing
Control buttons
Graphical window
The graphical window displays the catalogue block. For some of the types also dimension lines and
labels are available. The drawing immediately reflects any modifications of geometry parameters made
in the property table.
Property table
The property table contains all the parameters that are necessary for full definition of the selected
catalogue block structure. The parameters can be both input or edited in this table.
The parameters can be divided into three groups: name, geometry parameters, and specification of
cross-section or cross-sections. The number of cross-sections that must be specifies depends on the type
of the catalogue block. E.g. curves require just one cross-section, and e.g. 3D frames need three ones.
If the graphical window displays also dimension lines, then there exists a special interconnection
between the property table and graphical window. The principles, main features and advantages of this
interconnection are described in detail in book Cross-sections, chapter Specifying sectional parameters
and properties.
Control buttons
Button [OK]
This button closes the dialogue and accepts all the inputs and changes made in it.
If a new catalogue block has been defined in the editing dialogue it is inserted into the project.
If an existing catalogue block has been modified here, the changes are taken into account and saved into
the project.
Button [Cancel]
This button closes the dialogue and all the inputs and changes made in it are abandoned.
If a new catalogue block has been defined in the editing dialogue it is NOT inserted into the project.
If an existing catalogue block has been modified here, the changes are not taken into account.
240
SCIA.ESA PT
User blocks
Introduction to user blocks
SCIA.ESA PT enables the user to make a library of his/her projects that are used over and over again.
These projects may be at any time included into a newly created project or appended to an earlier
created and currently edited project.
The projects in this user-created library are called User blocks and the library is called User block
library.
241
SCIA.ESA PT
Tip: The user blocks may be stored not only in the given User block library folder, but they
may be arranged in a tree of subfolders. The subfolders may then group user blocks that have
something in common. This arrangement may lead to easier and clearer application of user
blocks, especially if a long time passes from the time they were created and stored.
2.
3.
A User block wizard opens on the screen. Its left hand side window shows the organisation of the User
block library folder, i.e. it shows any possible subfolders. The right hand side window then displays all
available user blocks saved in the appropriate folder or subfolder.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Position the user block to the desired place and click the left mouse button to put the block there.
8.
Note: It the User block is a parameterised project, the program asks the user to provide all
necessary parameters in order to complete the definition of the user block.
242
It shifts the object from one position to another. The trajectory is a straight
line and the orientation of the object remains unchanged.
SCIA.ESA PT
rotation
It rotates the object around a given point. The trajectory is a circle or a part
of a circle.
mirroring
Thus, for geometric entities one can use the following set of move functions:
(Simple) Move
Rotation
Mirroring
In addition to move of entities, some other modification functions can be applied, such as copying,
deleting, changing of dimensions, connecting and disconnecting of members, dividing and joining of
members, etc. These functions are described in separate chapters.
Tip: If the modification is supposed to be done with a large or complex model or if the
modification itself is going to be rather excessive, it is highly recommended to make a backup
copy of the project prior to the intended changes. The program contains UNDO function,
nevertheless, it is always better to have got a backup copy so that one can:
return to the original if the manipulations lead to a state that is even less suitable than the
original,
compare the results of both variants if the results of the modified structure may seem to
be strange or unexpected.
Note: Please, note that any kind of model modification will lead to the necessity to carry our all the
previously performed calculations once more because the change in the structure geometry, the repositioning of load, and the modification of boundary conditions do result in a different distribution of
internal forces.
243
SCIA.ESA PT
If all the nodes relating to a particular beam are selected for the move operation, the result is the move
of the whole beam. This feature can be therefore deliberately used for the repositioning of beams.
An absolute node can be moved to an arbitrary new position. The connected beam follows the move of
the node and, as a result, the beam connected to the moved node may change its orientation or length
or both. A curved beam may also change its curvature.
A linked node can be moved in two ways. First, it may be moved the same way as an absolute node.
Second, it can be shifted in a way so that it remains bound to the beam it relates to. The latter result is
achieved if nodal co-ordinates are modified in the property table.
As the first step, lets consider that the right hand column is connected to the horizontal beam by means
of a linked node. The linked node is marked by the short double line drawn at the connection of the
members.
Now, lets move the horizontal beam up and right. The result can be seen in the figure below. The right
hand column has remained connected to the horizontal beam, has inclined to the right and has changed
its length. On the other hand, the left hand column has stayed in its original position without any
change. There is no linked node on the horizontal beam in the point of connection with this column.
244
SCIA.ESA PT
In the second step of the example, lets assume that the linked node is missing also at the connection of
the horizontal beam with the right hand column. Consequently, when the beam is moved (again up and
right), both the columns undergo no change at all (see the figure below).
245
SCIA.ESA PT
Both the approached call the same function for move of geometric entities.
The function works with selected entities and moves them to a new location. The selection can be made:
either before the activation of the function,
or after the activation of the function.
The procedure for the Move operation done with a previously made selection of
entities
1. Make the selection of entities you want to be moved or adopt the existing selection made for other
purposes.
2. Call function Move.
3. Define the first reference point. (The vector along which the selected entities move is defined by two
reference points. The first reference point is the Start point and defines the origin of the move vector.
The second reference point is called the End point and defines the end point of the move vector.
Please note that the first reference point does not have to be located on the entity being moved, it can
be defined anywhere within the modelling space.)
4. Define the second reference point.
5. The move operation has been completed and the selection remains unchanged.
The Move operation done with a selection created as a part the function
procedure
The Move function can be, of course, called also without any existing, previously made selection. The
selection of the entities that are supposed to be moved is then made as a part of the Move operation
procedure. Once the operation is completed and the function closed, the selection is cleared and does
not exist any more. However, it may be renewed via the Previous selection function.
The procedure for the Move operation done with an afterwards-created selection of
entities
1. Call function Move.
2. Make the selection of entities you want to be moved.
246
SCIA.ESA PT
3. Press [Esc] key to end the selection part of the procedure.
4. Define the first reference point. (The vector along which the selected entities move is defined by two
reference points. The first reference point is the Start point and defines the origin of the move vector.
The second reference point is called the End point and defines the end point of the move vector.
Please note that the first reference point does not have to be located on the entity being moved, it can
be defined anywhere within the modelling space.)
5. Define the second reference point.
6. The move operation has been completed and the selection is cleared.
Move of one or more previously selected entities using the right mouse button
pop-up menu
The procedure is very similar to the procedure for the Move operation called from menu and done with
a previously made selection of entities. The only difference is the way the Move function is called.
The procedure for the Move operation using the right mouse button pop-up menu
1. Make the selection of entities you want to be moved or adopt the existing selection made for other
purposes.
2. Click the right mouse button.
3. A pop-up menu appears on the screen.
4. Select the Move function.
5. Define the first reference point. (The vector along which the selected entities move is defined by two
reference points. The first reference point is the Start point and defines the origin of the move vector.
The second reference point is called the End point and defines the end point of the move vector.
Please note that the first reference point does not have to be located on the entity being moved, it can
be defined anywhere within the modelling space.)
6. Define the second reference point.
7. The move operation has been completed and the selection remains unchanged.
Move of a single entity using the right mouse button pop-up menu
If only a single entity should be moved, the procedure may be even simpler and shorter. During this
approach, no selection is necessary to be made and, therefore, no selection remains active after the
operation.
The procedure for Move of a single entity using the right mouse button pop-up menu
1. Place the mouse cursor on the midline of the entity you want to move.
2. Click the right mouse button.
3. A pop-up menu appears on the screen.
4. Select the Move function.
5. Define the first reference point. (The vector along which the selected entities move is defined by two
reference points. The first reference point is the Start point and defines the origin of the move vector.
The second reference point is called the End point and defines the end point of the move vector.
Please note that the first reference point does not have to be located on the entity being moved, it can
be defined anywhere within the modelling space.)
6. Define the second reference point.
7. The move operation has been completed.
247
SCIA.ESA PT
Tip: The Drag&Drop approach for the move operation is convenient mainly if the target
position of the moved entity end-point lies (i) on a point of a grid, (ii) in an end-point of another
entity, (iii) in an intermediate point (e.g. one quarter, one half, centre of an arc, etc.) of another
entity, or (iv) in any other point that is easily and uniquely accessible by the mouse cursor.
The function works with selected entities and rotates them to a new location. The selection can be
made:
either before the activation of the function,
or after the activation of the function.
The procedure for the rotation (selections is made after the function is started)
1. Call function Rotate.
2. Make the selection of entities you want to be rotated.
3. Press [Esc] to end the selection.
4. Define the centre of rotation.
5. Define the first reference point. (The angle of rotation is defined by means of two reference points.
These points together with the centre of rotation define the rotation angle.)
6. Define the second reference point.
7. The move operation has been completed and the selection is cleared.
248
SCIA.ESA PT
Mirroring an entity
Any entity can be mirrored to a new location. The "mirror" is perpendicular to the current working
plane. The user just has to define the inclination of the mirror. Once again, as in the case of move and
rotation, there are two possible ways to carry out the operation and two ways to activate the function
itself.
249
SCIA.ESA PT
Function Mirror can be activated in two ways:
using menu item Modify > Mirror,
using the [Mirror] (
The procedure for the mirroring (selections is made after the function is started)
1. Call the Mirror function.
2. Make the selection of entities you want to be rotated.
3. Press [Esc] to end the selection.
4. Define the first reference point. (The plane of the mirroring is always perpendicular to the current
working plane. The precise orientation of the mirror is then defined by means of two reference points.)
5. Define the second reference point.
6. The mirroring operation has been completed and the selection is cleared.
250
SCIA.ESA PT
making a single copy of the original using menu function,
making a single copy of the original using the pop-up menu of the graphical window,
making multiple copies at a time with an advanced definition of copy parameters (e.g. the copied
members may rotate simultaneously with being shifted)
a)
b)
251
SCIA.ESA PT
6. Define the second reference point.
7. The operation is performed, copies are created, the function is closed and the selection remains
unchanged.
Tip: This approach can be applied even if no entity has been already inserted into selection.
The fact that the mouse cursor is positioned on an entity has bigger priority that the fact that any
selection has been made. Therefore, it is possible to prepare a selection for any operation, then
position the mouse cursor over a single entity and copy this particular entity. The selection
remains untouched.
Connect selected
nodes with new
beams
Distance vector
Rotation
252
By default, the copied members are just shifted along the specified vector
(see above). It is however possible to rotate the copied members during
their "move".
SCIA.ESA PT
The distance input either in the table or by means of two reference points
can specify:
If only one copy is being made, the meaning of the two options becomes
identical.
How to define the
rotation
If only one copy is being made, the meaning of the two options becomes
identical.
Rotation around
The rotation may be defined around UCS axes or around the distance
vector. It is obvious that the latter enables the user to input just one angle
around the distance vector.
It is clear from the list of parameters that this variant of copy function provides for advanced definition
of copying vector (i.e. the vector that define the direction and distance for the copy operation).
a)
b)
253
SCIA.ESA PT
The picture below shows a possible application of Multicopy function. A spiral staircase can be
"generated" just in one multicopy step.
b)
254
SCIA.ESA PT
either: use menu function Tree > Calculation, Mesh > Check structure data,
b)
or: start tree menu function Calculation, Mesh > Check structure data.
Tip: For more information about function Check structure data see chapter Calculation >
Check of data.
255
SCIA.ESA PT
The procedure for the editing of properties of a multiple beams beam at a time
1. Make sure that no entities are in the current selection.
2. Select the entities you need to edit.
3. The properties for the selected entities are displayed in the property window (for details see chapter
Selections versus editing of properties).
4. Edit any parameters you need to.
5. Clear the selection.
Note: Please, be careful when editing the properties of multiple entities at the same time. Once you
type and confirm the value into a particular cell of the property window, the change is immediately
made for all currently selected entities. Even if the original value of the edited property was different
for individual entities, it becomes unique with the change being confirmed. The change is confirmed as
soon as you either type the value and press Enter, or as soon as you type the value and leave the cell.
The cell may be left either using the left mouse button click on another cell or pressing Tab key.
Note: When the Buckling length manager is opened, it displays ONLY those buckling length
definitions that correspond to conditions of the selected beam or beams. If e.g. a beam with one
buckling segment is selected, the manager hides any buckling length system for more then one segment.
256
SCIA.ESA PT
In-axis modification
Manipulation where only the "in-axis" modification can be carried out leads to the situation that the
linked node remains in its original position. This group of manipulation functions consists of a limited
number of functions: trim, extend, enlarge, break in defined points.
Out-of-axis modification
Manipulation where only a general modification of the beams orientation can be performed cause that
the linked node is manipulated as well and may change its position. This is the case of majority of
manipulation functions, e.g. move, rotate, mirror, stretch, scale, etc.
If the manipulation brings any ambiguity to what should be done with the linked node, the linked node
is disconnected and the connection of the two beams is broken. This may happen in function Join (two
beams into one).
Examples
The original structure
257
SCIA.ESA PT
The cantilever end moved
up and right using function
Move node.
Note: The distinction between "in-axis" and "out-of-axis" modification is not based on the actual
result of the manipulation that has been carried out. It is based on the principle, i.e. on the fact WHAT
CAN BE DONE by means of selected manipulation function. If the function provides for an "out-ofaxis" manipulation, rules for "out-of-axis" manipulation are applied even if the final position of the
beam looks like after an "in-axis" manipulation.
258
SCIA.ESA PT
b)
SCIA.ESA PT
b)
b)
Note: If any entities have been selected prior to calling this function, the selection is stored by the
computer and cleared. All the selections necessary for the successful performance of the function must
be made from within the function according to the instructions given on the command line. Once the
function is closed, the original selection is restored.
260
SCIA.ESA PT
Example:
before trimming
after trimming
b)
Note: If any entities have been selected prior to calling this function, the selection is stored by the
computer and cleared. All the selections necessary for the successful performance of the function must
be made from within the function according to the instructions given on the command line. Once the
function is closed, the original selection is restored.
Example:
before extending
after extending
261
SCIA.ESA PT
b)
2. In the dialogue that appear on the screen, type the value by which the selected entities should be
enlarged.
3. Select entities that should be enlarged.
4. Press [Esc] to end the function.
Note: If any entities have been selected prior to calling this function, the selection is stored by the
computer and cleared. All the selections necessary for the successful performance of the function must
be made from within the function according to the instructions given on the command line. Once the
function is closed, the original selection is restored.
b)
Note: If any entities have been selected prior to calling this function, the function itself does not
require making of any other selection. The function is applied on the selection made beforehand.
The procedure for the breaking of entities in the point of their intersection
1. Start function Break in intersections:
a)
b)
262
SCIA.ESA PT
Note: If any entities have been selected prior to calling this function, the function itself does not
require making of any other selection. The function is applied on the selection made beforehand.
b)
Note 1: The entities that are being coupled together, must lie on one line. Otherwise, it is not
possible to create a single beam from them.
Note 2: If any entities have been selected prior to calling this function, the function itself does not
require making of any other selection. The function is applied on the selection made beforehand.
b)
Note: The change of beam orientation can be easily verified when local co-ordinate system of the
edited entity is displayed. The direction of the local X-axis inverts once the function is finished.
263
SCIA.ESA PT
Example:
before reversing
after reversing
either call menu function Modify > Polyline edit > Edit polyline Insert node,
b)
>
) on toolbar
2. Select the polylines where the inner nodes (vertices) should be inserted.
3. Press [Esc] to end the selection.
4. Define the points where the inner nodes should be located.
5. Press [Esc] to end the function.
6. The nodes are inserted into the selected polylines in the defined points.
Note: If any entities have been selected prior to calling this function, the function itself does not
require making of any other selection. The function is applied on the selection made beforehand. Only
the points for the inner nodes must be then specified.
either call menu function Modify > Polyline edit > Edit polyline Delete node,
b)
>
2. Select the polylines from which the inner nodes (vertices) should be removed.
264
) on toolbar
SCIA.ESA PT
3. Press [Esc] to end the selection.
4. Select the nodes that should be removed.
5. Press [Esc] to end the function.
6. The selected nodes are removed from the selected polylines.
Note: If any entities have been selected prior to calling this function, the function itself does not
require making of any other selection. The function is applied on the selection made beforehand. Only
the inner nodes for the deletion must be specified.
either call menu function Modify > Polyline edit > Join curves into polyline,
b)
>
) on toolbar
Note: If any entities have been selected prior to calling this function, the function itself does not
require making of any other selection. The function is applied on the selection made beforehand.
either click button [Geometrical manipulations with curves] > [Edit arc angle] (
on toolbar Geometrical manipulations,
b)
or use menu function Modify > Curves edit > Edit curve arc by angle.
>
2. Select the arcs that should be edited. It is possible to select and edit multiple arcs at time.
3. Press [Esc] key to end the selection.
4. The editing dialogue is opened on the screen.
5. Type the new value.
6. Confirm with [OK] button.
7. The modification of the shape is made accordingly.
Note: If any entities are selected prior to calling this function, the function itself does not require
making of any other selection. The function is applied on the selection made beforehand.
265
SCIA.ESA PT
either click button [Geometrical manipulations with curves] > [Edit arc bulge] (
on toolbar Geometrical manipulations,
b)
or use menu function Modify > Curves edit > Edit curve arc by bulge.
>
2. Select the arcs that should be edited. It is possible to select and edit multiple arcs at time.
3. Press [Esc] key to end the selection.
4. The editing dialogue is opened on the screen.
5. Type the new value.
6. Confirm with [OK] button.
7. The modification of the shape is made accordingly.
Note: If any entities are selected prior to calling this function, the function itself does not require
making of any other selection. The function is applied on the selection made beforehand.
either click button [Geometrical manipulations with curves] > [Edit arc radius] (
on toolbar Geometrical manipulations,
b)
or use menu function Modify > Curves edit > Edit curve arc by radius.
>
2. Select the arcs that should be edited. It is possible to select and edit multiple arcs at time.
3. Press [Esc] key to end the selection.
4. The editing dialogue is opened on the screen.
5. Type the new value.
6. Confirm with [OK] button.
7. The modification of the shape is made accordingly.
Note: If any entities are selected prior to calling this function, the function itself does not require
making of any other selection. The function is applied on the selection made beforehand.
266
SCIA.ESA PT
either click button [Geometrical manipulations with curves] > [Edit Bezier weight factors]
( > ) on toolbar Geometrical manipulations,
b)
or use menu function Modify > Curves edit > Edit curve Bezier weight factors.
2. Select the arcs that should be edited. It is possible to select and edit multiple arcs at time.
3. Press [Esc] key to end the selection.
4. The editing dialogue is opened on the screen.
5. Type the new value.
6. Confirm with [OK] button.
7. The modification of the shape is made accordingly.
Note: If any entities are selected prior to calling this function, the function itself does not require
making of any other selection. The function is applied on the selection made beforehand.
It is also possible to edit the shape of a Bezier curve using the Drag&Drop feature.
either click button [Geometrical manipulations with curves] > [Convert curve to line] (
> ) on toolbar Geometrical manipulations,
b)
or use menu function Modify > Curves edit > Convert curve to line.
2. Select the arcs that should be edited. It is possible to select multiple arcs at time.
3. Press [Esc] key to carry out the conversion.
Note: If any entities are selected prior to calling this function, the function itself does not require
making of any other selection. The function is applied on the selection made beforehand.
267
SCIA.ESA PT
The procedure for the conversion of a straight line into a circular arc
1. Open function Convert line to circle arc:
a)
either click button [Geometrical manipulations with curves] > [Convert line to circle arc]
( > ) on toolbar Geometrical manipulations,
b)
or use menu function Modify > Curves edit > Convert line to circle arc.
Note: If just one entity is selected prior to calling this function, the function itself does not require
making of any other selection. The function is applied on the selection made beforehand. On the other
hand, if several entities are selected prior to calling this function, the function clears stores the
selection, clears it, asks the user to select a single entity for the manipulation, performs the action and
restores back the original selection.
The procedure for the conversion of a straight line into a parabolic arc
1. Open function Convert line to parabolic arc:
a)
either click button [Geometrical manipulations with curves] > [Convert line to parabolic
arc] ( > ) on toolbar Geometrical manipulations,
b)
or use menu function Modify > Curves edit > Convert line to parabolic arc.
Note: If just one entity is selected prior to calling this function, the function itself does not require
making of any other selection. The function is applied on the selection made beforehand. On the other
hand, if several entities are selected prior to calling this function, the function clears stores the
selection, clears it, asks the user to select a single entity for the manipulation, performs the action and
restores back the original selection.
The procedure for the conversion of a straight line into a Bezier curve
1. Open function Convert line to Bezier:
a)
268
either click button [Geometrical manipulations with curves] > [Convert line to Bezier] (
> ) on toolbar Geometrical manipulations,
SCIA.ESA PT
b)
or use menu function Modify > Curves edit > Convert line Bezier.
Note: If just one entity is selected prior to calling this function, the function itself does not require
making of any other selection. The function is applied on the selection made beforehand. On the other
hand, if several entities are selected prior to calling this function, the function clears stores the
selection, clears it, asks the user to select a single entity for the manipulation, performs the action and
restores back the original selection.
either click button [Geometrical manipulations with curves] > [Convert line to spline] (
> ) on toolbar Geometrical manipulations,
b)
or use menu function Modify > Curves edit > Convert line to spline.
Note: If just one entity is selected prior to calling this function, the function itself does not require
making of any other selection. The function is applied on the selection made beforehand. On the other
hand, if several entities are selected prior to calling this function, the function clears stores the
selection, clears it, asks the user to select a single entity for the manipulation, performs the action and
restores back the original selection.
269
SCIA.ESA PT
b)
b)
Note: It is important to know what one wants to connect and make the selection accordingly. This
note is important especially for curved beams. If the two connected beams have two or more
intersections and both the beams are selected for the operation, the connection (linked nodes) are
created in all the intersection points. Therefore, if the connection of such beams is required in one
specific point only, it is necessary to select the required end-point of the first beam (i.e. its node) and
the other beam. Then the connection is generated in the selected node only.
The procedure for the definition of the connecting point (for later insertion of the
other entity)
1. Open function Node on beam:
a)
either using menu function menu Tree > Structure > Node on beam,
b)
2. Select the beam where the point (i.e. linked node) should be defined.
3. Specify the location of the linked node.
270
SCIA.ESA PT
b)
2. In the Property window specify the parameters of the cross-link, i.e. its name and property: fixed versus
hinged.
3. Select the beams that should be connected.
4. Close the function.
5. The cross-link is generated and displayed in the form of a thick dot with thin short lines along the
connected beams.
It is possible to use an alternative procedure, which means that first, the selection of beams is made and
only then the function is called. If applied, this procedure does not require the user to close the function
but does not allow for the modification of cross-link parameters. They would have to be edited
afterwards.
Connection
Says that the node is connected (linked) to an entity. States the "owner" of
the node.
Coordinate
Specifies the co-ordinate type by means of which the position of the node
on its "owner" is defined.
Position x
LCS
The node can have its local coordinate system. To define it, at least one
UCS must be defined by the user. If it is done, it is possible to coincide the
LCS of the node with the required UCS.
(see also Defining a local co-ordinate system of a node).
Note 1: It is possible to edit the linked node even if it has not been attached to the second entity.
Thus e.g. its relative position on the beam can be modified.
Note 2: It is possible to modify several nodes at a time. The user must be aware of that the change
made in the Property window will be applied to all selected nodes.
271
SCIA.ESA PT
Note 3: The Property window shows among others the beams that are connected in the selected
node.
Connection
Note 1: It is possible to modify several nodes at a time. The user must be aware of that the change
made in the Property window will be applied to all selected nodes.
Note 2: The Property window shows among others the beams that are connected in the selected
cross-link.
b)
272
SCIA.ESA PT
b)
Note: It does not matter whether a node or a beam is selected. Always either the linked node that is
selected directly or the linked node connecting the selected beam or beams is removed.
b)
CAD Model
Introduction to CAD model
CAD model, as the name itself suggests, represents the shape of structure with reference to requirements
of design and detailing.
The calculation model is usually simplified to some extent because the numerical analysis does not
require or is not able to process all detailed information about the model. When however, a drawing
should be prepared or some detail of the structure properly designed (e.g. a connection of two steel
beams) more information is needed.
SCIA.ESA PT stores the two kinds of information separately. Basic geometry information is used for
calculations, CAD model information is used for detailing, preparation of drawings, check of
connections, etc.
priority value
perpendicular alignment
This option specifies the alignment of the beam to its middle axis.
eccentricity definition
eccentricity ey, ez
x-offset beginning
273
SCIA.ESA PT
x-offset end
end cut
If ON, this option allows the user to define an additional end cut
gap that will be combined with the x-offset in order to create the
final length of the beam.
In addition, there is one more parameter related to CAD model. The basic beam parameter Type defines
the structural type of beam. This parameter defines the priority of the beam if the priority is specified
according to member.
Priority
The priority is taken into account when connection of intersecting or touching beams is solved. The
meaning will be best explained on a small example.
Lets assume a column with a beam attached to its head. The calculation model looks like:
Now, lets display the CAD model. The priority of the column (B17) is set to 100. The priority of the
inclined beam (B18) is set to 80. The automatically created detail will look like:
Now, lets decrease the priority of the column (B17) to 50. The result will be:
274
SCIA.ESA PT
Perpendicular alignment
If adjusted to default value, the alignment of the CAD model is taken from the alignment of the
calculation model.
Eccentricity
The eccentricity may be defined in several ways:
whole member
purlin on rafter
Purlin on rafter
The effect of this option is shown on the following two pictures. The first one shows the pairs of
intersecting beams without defined eccentricity.
275
SCIA.ESA PT
In the second picture, option Purlin on rafter is assigned to beams in one direction. As a result they are
put atop the other two beams.
Note: The priority of "purlins", i.e. the beams with Purlin on rafter option must be lower than the
priority of the intersecting beams. Otherwise, the setting will have no effect.
The procedure for adjusting the CAD model for a new beam
1. Start the function for the definition of a new beam.
2. In the property table adjust the required beam parameters.
3. At the bottom part of the table fill in the parameters of CAD model.
276
SCIA.ESA PT
Note: If the CAD model is being displayed for the first time, or if changes were made to the some of
the CAD parameters of arbitrary beam or beams, it may be sometimes necessary to regenerate (or
generate) the CAD model.
Note: Due to time response optimisation, the changes made in the Property window may not be
taken into account immediately. In such a situation, the user has to use manual regeneration of the
CAD model.
) on toolbar View.
277
SCIA.ESA PT
Model data
Introduction to model data
A model of a structure created in SCIA.ESA PT consists not only of structural members (such as
beams, columns, slabs, etc.) but also of a whole set of additional entities. These additional entities are as
important for successful calculation and design as the geometry itself.
The additional entities are called additional data. The term additional data covers loads, supports,
hinges, masses (in case of dynamic analysis), etc. The load represents a complex and rather coherent
group and therefore it is dealt with in a separate chapter.
Entities such as supports, foundations, and hinges are called Model data. They are described in
separate chapters. In SCIA.ESA PT menus and dialogues they are usually treated separately as well, but
occasionally the term Model data is used when the action or setting is related to all model data (e.g.
view parameters).
Supports
Types of supports
Point supports
There are three basic types of point supports in SCIA.ESA PT. Each of them, however, can be of many
different configurations.
Standard support
Foundation block
278
SCIA.ESA PT
This support is used to model
the case where the supporting
is realised by a column.
Column
Standard support
A standard support defines an idealised supporting restricted to a single point. The user may define the
way the support acts in individual directions, i.e. in translation along and rotation around axes of
selected co-ordinate system.
Free
Rigid
Flexible
Nonlinear
Friction
Note: If supports of Press only type (both rigid and flexible) appear in the model, a NONLINEAR
calculation MUST be executed. Linear calculation can be run as well, but it does NOT take account of
the press only behaviour. The nonlinear calculation requires a definition of a nonlinear load case
combination. Unless a nonlinear combination is defined, the nonlinear calculation is not accessible in
the calculation dialogue.
Rx12,Ry12,Rz12
where Rx defines the inclination from X axis, and Ry and Rz
define the inclination from Y and Z axis respectively. The angle is
input in adjusted angle units.
Size x;
Size y
These two parameters define the size of the support. The size
parameter is taken into account only if the support is at a slab. The
size is used to calculate the appropriate reduction of slab bending
moment in the surroundings of the support.
Note: Parameter Angle mentioned above and the adjustment of orientation described below are
available for all support types, not only for the standard support.
279
SCIA.ESA PT
Orientation of a support
Support in a node
Support on a beam
Foundation block
A support may be defined in the form of a foundation block. The supporting is then specified by the
material and dimensions of the block together with the properties of the soil below and above the
footing surface.
The support of Foundation block type requires the definition of the following parameters.
Foundation block
Foundation
Upper soil
Note: A foundation block can be used only if the Subsoil functionality has been selected in the
Project settings and if material Concrete has been specified for the project.
Column
If only a part of the final structure is modelled (e.g. just one or a few floors instead of the whole
building), it may happen that a support in the model is in fact a column in the real structure. SCIA.ESA
PT enables the user to model even such situation.
The support is defined through the following parameters. The program automatically calculates the
stiffness of the support.
Length
Hinged
Connection
The column may either end in the support or may continue (e.g. to
another floor).
Cross-section
280
SCIA.ESA PT
Line supports
There are three basic types of linear supports in SCIA.ESA PT. They are similar to point support types.
Standard
support
Foundation
strip
Wall
Foundation strip
A linear support may be defined in the form of a foundation strip. The supporting is then specified by
the properties and dimensions of the strip together with the properties of the soil below and above the
footing surface.
This type of support is described in chapter Foundation strip and requires the following parameters to
be input.
Foundation
Width
Upper soil
281
SCIA.ESA PT
Note: A foundation block can be used only if the Subsoil functionality has been selected in the
Project settings.
Wall
A structure member may be in real life very often supported by a wall. If this is the case and only a part
of the real structure is being modelled (e.g. one floor), SCIA.ESA PT allows definition of such
supporting condition with minimal effort.
The program automatically calculates the stiffness of the support from the following parameters:
Material
Width
Height
Hinged
Tells whether the wall is rigidly fixed into the supported member
or is pinned into it.
Connection
Note: A supporting wall can be used only if material Concrete has been specified for the project in
the Project settings.
Constraint conditions
Constraint conditions
Free
Rigid
Flexible
282
SCIA.ESA PT
Geometry
System
Edge
Position x1
Position x2
Coordination definition
Origin
Type
Subsoil
If necessary for the selected type, this item specifies the subsoil
parameters.
Type
Individual
Soilin
Both
Both of the above mentioned types are combined on the same slab.
Friction support
Parameters
From reaction
The user may select the reaction that defines the force pushing
against the support.
C flex
mju
Coefficient of friction.
If friction of X / Y / Z or XY / XZ / YZ type is selected, one mju
value must be input.
If friction of X+Y / X+Z / Y+Z type is selected, two mju values
must be input.
Independent
From reaction
X, Y, Z
XY, XZ, YZ
283
SCIA.ESA PT
friction force should be determined from the reactions calculated
in Y and Z direction. The friction force is calculated from the
following formula:
Note: Friction can be input in one or two directions. It is not possible to define friction in all
three direction otherwise the "thrust" could not determined.
Note: Composed friction (e.g. YZ or Y+Z) can be input in one direction only.
Note: Option Independent friction is available ONLY if simple friction (X, Y, Z) is defined
in two directions.
When inserted into the model, a friction support (friction defined in Y and Z direction) is marked with
the following symbol (remember that in order to see the symbol, view parameters must be adjusted to
show model data).
Examples:
Lets assume a plane XY and a support that can slide on it in any direction with a friction.
X
friction
C flex x
1E5
mju x
0.20
from reaction
friction
C flex y
1E5
mju y
0.55
from reaction
Independent friction
YES
284
SCIA.ESA PT
Lets assume a pipe in a borehole in X-direction.
X
friction
C flex x
1E5
mju x
0.20
from reaction
YZ
flexible
stiff y
5E5
flexible
stiff z
3.5E6
b)
c)
Standard support
b)
c)
Column or wall
5. Input necessary parameters for the selected support type (point or linear).
6. Specify the orientation of the support.
7. Specify the location of the support:
a)
b)
Specify the position of the support on a beam (in the case of point support on a beam).
c)
Specify the position of the start-point and end-point of support on a beam (in the case of linear
support on a beam).
285
SCIA.ESA PT
2.
3.
4.
Input necessary parameters for the selected support type (point or linear).
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Note: In order to use friction supports the Project Setup dialogue options must be assigned
appropriately. Options Nonlinearity and Friction supports must be selected.
Note: See also chapters under Model data > Supports, chapters Point supports and
Defining a new support in particular.
),
),
286
).
SCIA.ESA PT
Function
Free
Flexible
Foundation
Introduction to foundation
A structure is usually laid on the ground. The contact between the structure and the ground is made by
means of foundation blocks, strips, or plates. The real supporting condition is very often idealised by
means of simplified supports for purpose of numerical analysis of the structure.
SCIA.ESA PT offers tools that provide for direct modelling of such supporting conditions. The user
may define the composition of foundation soil, dimensions and other parameters of foundation structure
(block or strip) and properties of the soil above the footing surface.
287
SCIA.ESA PT
The program automatically calculates final values of stiffness and uses them for numerical solution.
Type
Dimensions
The input of dimensions can be performed in a dialogue with selfexplanatory interactive drawing of the block. That means that the
user may click on a dimension line in the drawing and the
corresponding item of the dialogue gets the focus. Therefore, its
very simple to specify the dimensions of the foundation block.
Eccentricity
Cast conditions
Material
The foundation block editing dialogue makes it possible to display the foundation block in 2D or 3D
mode.
The 2D mode shows side view, plan view and dimension lines for all input values.
The 3D mode enables the user to make a good visualisation of the defined foundation block
The above-mentioned properties are defined in the editing dialogue for the foundation block. The
editing dialogue can be opened from the Foundation block manager.
In addition, another important parameter of the foundation block support must be defined. It is the soil
that is below the footing surface. This last parameter is defined in the property dialogue of support, i.e.
it is defined at the moment the support is being inserted into the model.
288
SCIA.ESA PT
Foundation strip
A foundation strip is used as a kind of linear supporting. It is defined by its width and by the properties
of soil below the footing surface.
All the properties of the foundation strip are defined in the property dialogue of support, i.e. at the
moment the support is being inserted into the model.
289
SCIA.ESA PT
Height
Defines the height of the upper soil layer. The height is measured
from the top-surface of the foundation block.
In addition, the user may specify the level of underground water that also influences the characteristics
of the support.
Note: The upper soil parameters are taken into account if the foundation block is checked
for stability.
b)
Note: If no foundation block has been defined so far and the user opens the Foundation
block manager, the program may automatically open the Foundation block editing dialogue
directly. Once the editing dialogue is closed, the Foundation manager appears on the screen
and the user may follow to procedure given above.
Note: If no subsoil and no type of foundation block has been defined and the user tries to insert a
support of Foundation block type, the program automatically creates a default subsoil type and a
default foundation block type. It is up to the user to edit these entities and input proper values of their
characteristics.
290
SCIA.ESA PT
Note: If no subsoil has been defined and the user tries to insert a support of Foundation strip type,
the program automatically creates a default subsoil type. It is up to the user to edit this entities and
input proper characteristics of it.
Subsoil
Introduction to subsoil
Supports of a "foundation" type, i.e. foundation block and foundation strip, are laid on the soil that
forms the base for the structure. The parameters of this soil must be defined in order to allow the
program to perform accurate calculations.
In SCIA.ESA PT the "under-foundation" soil is called subsoil and can be defined using functions:
either: tree menu function Library > Subsoils,
or: menu function Libraries > Subsoils.
Once at least one subsoil type is defined, it can be used for the definition of foundation blocks or
foundation strips.
b)
Parameters of subsoil
Constants C1 and C2 for
directions X, Y, Z
291
SCIA.ESA PT
Soil density
Fic
Cc
Ccu
Sigma oc
Type
C1y
C1z
C2x
C2y
C2z
Note: In the complete set of 6 parameters C, four parameters are significant and, if
available, can be determined from the C parameters of subsoil 2D model in EPW Soilin module
and from the stiffness of boundary bonding "k" modelling the effect of settlement basin:
C*1x (MN/m2)
C*1y (MN/m2)
C*1z (MN/m2)
C*2z (MN)
292
SCIA.ESA PT
It is not recommended to use the remaining two parameters. Reliable experimental data are not
available for C2x and C2y.
C2x
C2y
C1x
C1y
Note: Usually, C2x is considered equal to C2y and C1x equal to C1y.
Note: See also chapter Model data > Foundation > Subsoil.
Hinges (pins)
Beams
Introduction to hinges
If a structure consists of more than one member, it is necessary to define the connection of the
individual entities. The connection may be rigid or free or anything in between.
In SCIA.ESA PT the rigid connection is realised by means of linked nodes or cross-links and described
in chapter Connecting and disconnecting the entities. The "something in between" connection may be
realised by means of hinges (described in this chapter) or by means of hinged cross-links (see chapter
Connecting and disconnecting the entities). And there is no need to define a free connection, just let the
beams unconnected.
The difference between individual types of connections can be summarised as follows.
A linked node is a connection where an end-point of one entity is connected to any point of another
entity.
A cross-link is the connection of two intersecting entities. The both entities remain "undivided" in the
connection, they just pass through it.
A hinge may be inserted into an end-point of a beam if other than rigid connection is required.
Parameters of a hinge
Name
Position on a beam
The hinge can be inserted into the starting point of a beam, into the
end point of a beam, or to both ends.
293
SCIA.ESA PT
Constraint conditions in
individual directions
Constraint conditions
In each direction (translations along X, Y, and Z local beam axes, rotation around X, Y, and Z local
beam axes) the condition may be:
rigid
free
flexible
nonlinear
The behaviour of the hinge must be specified by means of a nonlinear function. A particular function may be selected in the Hinge
property dialogue. Unless the function has been defined earlier, it
must be defined when the hinge is being inserted into the model. It
is possible to call the Nonlinear function manager directly from
the Hinge property dialogue.
),
294
).
),
SCIA.ESA PT
Slabs
Hinges in slabs
A connection of two slabs may be modelled as a fixed one or a hinge may be inserted to create a pinned
connection. Two configurations of slab hinge are allowed:
free connection
There is no rotation restraint in the hinge and the two slabs may
freely rotate around the hinge.
flexible connection
Under any configuration, all translations are fully transferred from one slab into the other.
Parameters
Name
fix
Stiffness
Position x1
Position x2
Coordinate definition
Origin
295
SCIA.ESA PT
Example
Lets input two identical rectangular slabs. In fact, each slab consists of two square slabs attached
closely to each other. This configuration has been chosen with a view to inserting the hinge. Both ends
of both slabs are fixed.
And now, lets insert a hinge into one of the two slabs into the middle of the span. The model can be
clearly seen on the figure below.
Lets subject the slabs to uniform distributed load acting in the direction perpendicular to the slab. The
result bending moment clearly demonstrates the effect of the hinge.
The top slab (in the figure above) is with the hinge in the middle of the span. The bending moment is
zero there. The bottom slab (in the figure above) is without a hinge and therefore, the middle of the span
there is the place where the bending moment reaches its maximum.
The results can be seen also in the following figure showing diagrams of bending moment displayed on
a longitudinal section across the slab.
296
SCIA.ESA PT
SCIA.ESA PT
7. Confirm the settings with button [OK].
8. The operation is completed.
298
SCIA.ESA PT
2. Icon Copy add data (
299
SCIA.ESA PT
Loads
Introduction to loads
Load represents probably the most important part of the model. The user has always to pay a great
attention to proper definition of load the structure is subject to.
SCIA.ESA PT comes with a set of tools that facilitate this very important task. The program not only
provides for numerous load types (concentrated force, linear moment load, thermal load, etc.) but also
enables the user to manage the loads in a very clear and effective way through load cases, load groups,
load case combinations and result classes. Each of these topics is described in detail in a separate
chapter.
Note 1: If the current load case is of Self weight type, it is not possible to define any load in it.
Therefore, if service Loads is called with a Self weight load case active, the menu remains empty.
Note 2: The service Loads contains a long list of various load types. However, the actual offer in
the list depends on several factors. First, the Standard user level of the user interface may hide some of
the sophisticated loads. Second, the type of the load case that is set as active controls the individual
load types in the list.
Load types
Introduction to load types
Load types available in a particular project may depend on the type of project (2D, 3D, etc.) and on the
functionality adjusted for the project. In general, it can be said that loads applicable in SCIA.ESA PT
can be divided into the following groups:
self weight
thermal load
climatic load
displacement of specified
points
The number of available load types is really large. In order to simplify the operation of the program, a
lot of the types may be "switched off" by the user. This results in a simplified and more lucid menu of
the program. By default, only the basic load types are offered by the program. If the user wants to use
some advanced load types, he/she must select appropriate options in the functionality settings.
Note: The display style of loads is controlled by appropriate view parameters. By default, service
Loads set the view parameters related to loads ON. Therefore, whenever you are in the service (Loads),
the loads are automatically displayed. However, as soon as you close service Loads, the program
returns to the standard setting of view parameters. It may happen that the view parameters for loads
are OFF, which means that the defined loads disappear from the screen. They DO NOT disappear from
the project. They are just not displayed. In order to see the loads even from outside the Loads service,
set the appropriate view parameters ON.
Direction
Specifies the base direction of the load. The direction may further
300
SCIA.ESA PT
specified by the Angle item.
Type
The point load may be a force load, wind load, snow load, or
predefined load.
Angle
Specifies the angle by which the load is rotated from its basic
direction.
Value
System
Value
The meaning of the Value depends on the Type of load.
For Force load, the Value is the real value of the load.
For Wind load, the Value represents the loading area. The real wind pressure is defined by wind curve
specified in the project settings.
For Snow load, the meaning is analogous to Wind load.
For Predefined load the meaning is analogous to Wind load.
Co-ordinate definition
Origin
Tell where the origin for the position co-ordinate measurement is.
Repeat
Delta x
301
SCIA.ESA PT
(available only if Repeat is greater than 1)
Eccentricity ey
Eccentricity ez
Co-ordinate definition
The location of the load on the beam may be defined in absolute or relative co-ordinates. If absolute coordinates are selected, the distance is defined in real length units set for the project. In the case of
relative co-ordinates, the position of the load on the beam is defined by value from within the interval
<0, 1>. In both cases, the distance is measured from the point defined in the Origin item.
Direction
Specifies the base direction of the load. The direction may further
specified by the Angle item.
Type
The point load may be a force load, wind load, snow load, or
predefined load.
Angle
Specifies the angle by which the load is rotated from its basic
direction.
Distribution
Value
System
Bottom flange
Defines the distribution of load on a built-in beam see Out-ofbalance factor below.
Q factor
Location
Position x1
Position x2
Co-ordinate definition
Origin
Tell where the origin for the position co-ordinate measurement is.
Eccentricity ey
Eccentricity ez
302
SCIA.ESA PT
Value
The meaning of the Value depends on the Type of load.
For Force load, the Value is the real value of the load.
For Wind load, the Value represents the loading width. The real wind pressure is defined by wind
curve specified in the project settings.
For Snow load, the meaning is analogous to Wind load.
For Predefined load the meaning is analogous to Wind load.
System
The definition of load direction may be defined:
in the local co-ordinate system of a beam,
in a selected user-co-ordinate system,
in the global co-ordinate system.
Location
The location depends on the setting of the System.
For local and user co-ordinate system, the location can be only Length.
However, for load defined in the global co-ordinate system, also a Projection may be selected.
For more information see chapter Direction of loads.
Co-ordinate definition
The location of the load on the beam may be defined in absolute or relative co-ordinates. If absolute coordinates are selected, the distance is defined in real length units set for the project. In the case of
relative co-ordinates, the position of the load on the beam is defined by value from within the interval
<0, 1>. In both cases, the distance is measured from the point defined in the Origin item.
303
SCIA.ESA PT
Out-of-balance factor
The Out-of-balance factor can be defined if option Bottom flange is ON. The Bottom flange
parameter is meaningful only for line load applied on Built-in beams. This parameter enables the user
to define the distribution of the load along the bottom flange. If parameter Bottom flange is ON,
parameter Q, i.e. the out-of-balance factor, can be input.
Q-factor = 0
Q-factor = 1
general position
Direction
Type
The load may be a force load, wind load, snow load, self-weight or
predefined load.
Distribution
The load may be either constant along the edge or linearly variable
(trapezoidal).
Value
System
Location
Edge
Position x1
Position x2
Co-ordinate definition
Origin
Tell where the origin for the position co-ordinate measurement is.
Value
The meaning of the Value depends on the Type of load.
For Force load, the Value is the real value of the load.
For Wind load, the Value represents the loading width. The real wind pressure is defined by wind
curve specified in the project settings.
For Snow load, the meaning is analogous to Wind load.
For Predefined load the meaning is analogous to Wind load.
System
The definition of load direction may be defined:
in the local co-ordinate system of a edge,
in a selected user-co-ordinate system,
304
SCIA.ESA PT
in the global co-ordinate system.
Location
The location depends on the setting of the System.
For local and user co-ordinate system, the location can be only Length.
However, for load defined in the global co-ordinate system, also a Projection may be selected.
For more information see chapter Direction of loads.
Co-ordinate definition
The location of the load on the edge may be defined in absolute or relative co-ordinates. If absolute coordinates are selected, the distance is defined in real length units set for the project. In the case of
relative co-ordinates, the position of the load on the edge is defined by value from within the interval
<0, 1>. In both cases, the distance is measured from the point defined in the Origin item.
Example
Parameters
Name
Direction
Type
Value
System
Note: Predefined load and snow load add a new parameter to the property table: Coefficient. The
default value of this parameter is 1 (minus one) to ensure that the defined load acts downwards and is
of the same value as defined.
305
SCIA.ESA PT
306
SCIA.ESA PT
Linear
The meaning of parameters from the Geometry group is identical with Line force on beam.
Linear
307
SCIA.ESA PT
Translation of support
A node of the structure may be subject to a prescribed displacement. In such a case, the user defines the
direction and magnitude of the known displacement.
The definition of this load type and the meaning of the individual parameters is analogous to Point force
in node. However, due to the nature of the load, the number of parameters is reduced.
Note: The translation of support cannot be defined in flexible and non-linear supports.
308
SCIA.ESA PT
The definition of this load type and the meaning of the individual parameters is analogous to Point force
on beam. However, due to the nature of the load, the number of parameters is reduced.
Rotation of support
A node of the structure may be subject to a prescribed rotation. In such a case, the user defines the
direction and magnitude of the known rotation.
The definition of this load type and the meaning of the individual parameters is analogous to Point force
in node. However, due to the nature of the load, the number of parameters is reduced.
Note: The translation of support cannot be defined in flexible and non-linear supports.
309
SCIA.ESA PT
The definition of this load type and the meaning of the individual parameters is analogous to Point force
on beam. However, due to the nature of the load, the number of parameters is reduced.
Longitudinal strain
The whole beam may be subject to a longitudinal strain. This strain can be either uniform along the
beam or may vary linearly.
The definition of this load type and the meaning of the individual parameters is analogous to Line force
on beam. However, due to the nature of the load, the number of parameters is reduced.
310
SCIA.ESA PT
Flexural strain
The whole beam may be subject to a flexural strain. This strain can be either uniform along the beam or
may vary linearly.
The definition of this load type and the meaning of the individual parameters is analogous to Line force
on beam. However, due to the nature of the load, the number of parameters is reduced.
Epsilon [mm/m]
k [mrad/m]
311
SCIA.ESA PT
where
alpha
Ts
Curvature
where
alpha
delta T
It follows from geometry that k = 1 / R, where R is a radius of a spherical surface the shape of which
the members takes if the change of shape due to an increase of temperature is not prevented.
Note: If the increase of temperature is not linear across the member, the distribution of
temperature increase must be linearised. The results must be then revised and stress resulting from the
difference between the given and linearised increase of temperature must be obtained by a special
calculation and added to this result.
Example
Imagine the following rather theoretical situation. Lets have a circular slab supported in its centre
only.
First, lets subject this slab to the uniform elongation of 10 mm/m. It is possible to imagine that both
surfaces of the slab are heated.
312
SCIA.ESA PT
After calculation, we may see the overall and symmetrical expansion of the slab (the figure shows both
the original slab and the deformed finite element mesh).
Second, lets subject the slab to non-uniform expansion (curvature) of 10 mrad/m. It is possible to
imagine that only one surface of the slab is heated.
After calculation, we may see the bowl-like deformation of the slab that results from this type of load.
The figure shows the both the original slab and the deformed finite element mesh. The second figure
presenting the side-view is more illustrative.
313
SCIA.ESA PT
Loaded beams
Direction
Storage capacity
Other reasons
Division
Status
X, Y
Height
Point
Only if Height is set to Point: Defines the point from which the
height is calculated.
Slope
Only if Height is set to Point: Defines the slope from the selected
point.
Number of point.
Location
hdn
314
SCIA.ESA PT
A
315
SCIA.ESA PT
Example
When defined in the model, the pond load may look like:
Dynamic loads
Harmonic load
There is no need to carry out a special dynamic calculation for a weakly damped structure. The method
of expansion into eigenmodes can be used to determine the final amplitude of deformation line as a
linear combination of the eigenmodes (the phase shift between individual eigenmodes can be ignored
for weak damping). This type of calculation only requires the definition of logarithmic decrement,
frequency of excitation impulse in Hz and amplitude of nodal impulses (see Defining the harmonic load
case).
The results may than be reviewed the same way as results of a standard static calculation (see also
Evaluating the results for harmonic load).
If the phase shift between individual eigenmodes cannot be ignored due to stronger damping, the
problem must be solved as a response to a general dynamic load.
Seismic load
During earthquake, the subsoil (sub-grade or foundation) bearing a structure moves. The structure tries
to follow this movement. As a result, all masses in the structure begin to move. Subsequently, they
subject the structure to inertial forces. Supports can generally move in all directions, but normally only
horizontal moves are taken into consideration. The user may define the direction that s/he considers to
be crucial for the structure or s/he may evaluate the effect of shakes acting in different directions.
Inertial forces arise from the move. It is sufficient to determine these forces and apply them on the
structure. Thus, the dynamic calculation is transformed into a static one. But the whole thing is not that
simple. We do not know the precise movement of subsoil and therefore we are not able to determine the
seismic forces precisely. But we can apply formulas of a technical standard or employ the frequency
spectrum of a real earthquake.
Usually, horizontal movement of a structure is assumed for seismic load. That means that the
earthquake acts in a plane horizontal to XY plane. The direction can be specified by means of
coefficient for individual co-ordinate axes.
316
SCIA.ESA PT
For example:
earthquake in X-direction
set X = 1 and Y = 0
earthquake in Y-direction
set X = 0 and Y = 1
On the other hand, it is possible to take account of Z-directions as well. This can be achieved by
specifying the coefficient for Z axis.
Note: We must be careful with the coefficients as earthquake "X=1; Y=0; Z=0.667" is not
equal to earthquake "X=1; Y=0; Z=-0.667" nor to earthquake "X=-1; Y=0; Z=0.667".
The seismic calculation runs automatically, which means that both self-weight and input masses are
used to generate load for individual eigenmodes.
The evaluation is performed separately for each force and displacement component using generally two
available formulas:
Square root of the sum of squares taking account of the extreme value:
where:
Sdyn
component in consideration
Sm
Sj
The final force may be both negative and positive. Both possibilities are considered in combinations.
Note: Whatever procedure we apply to the evaluation of quantity X, the result is always
positive value. But we can have also a negative value because in seismicity the vibration is
around the equilibrium position. The results of seismic calculation are always positive in
SCIA.ESA PT. The only exception is with internal forces. Here, the co-ordinate system
convention in not used. Instead, the "elasticity" convention (lower and front fibres under tension)
is applied. Signs of some shear forces and bending moments may be inverted and "minus" may
appear in the results of seismic calculation.
One more fact must be borne in mind. In static analysis we are curious about relations between
individual internal forces e.g. extreme axial force and corresponding bending moment. Such relations,
however, cannot be determined for results of seismic calculation because each component is evaluated
separately which, as you have surely noticed, is not a linear problem.
When evaluating results of seismic analysis, the one may say "this is the maximal axial force", "this is
the maximal axial stress", "this is the maximal vertical displacement". But one cannot calculate stress in
a section from the axial force and bending moment even though they appear in the same line of result
table. This is the effect of the squares and roots in the formulas above. Accurate stress can be obtained
only in appropriate module for design and checking (steel, concrete, etc. structures).
317
SCIA.ESA PT
General seismisity
If a structure is designed for a particular earthquake, we can employ seismicity defined by means of a
frequency spectrum. The following data must be specified:
table of frequencies and accelerations,
coefficients of accelerations,
direction coefficients,
evaluation type.
For more information see chapter Defining the seismic load case.
Free loads
Introduction to free loads
Free load is related to slabs. The load is not defined by the entity it acts on, but by a specific load
border. Free loads are defined by means of "loading entities" that may overlap or affect one or more
slabs.
line
point
Note: The loading entity may be oriented arbitrarily but can be input only in the XY plane of the
current UCS. Therefore, before one can input the free load, it is necessary to adjust the working plane
accordingly.
Each loading entity keeps a record of what was the orientation of the UCS when the entity was defined.
The orientation of the UCS is important as some of the loading parameters may be related to this UCS.
Whenever any already defined free load entity is selected, the appropriate UCS is activated.
If an inclined slab is subject to free load (the word inclined means that the plane of the slab and the
loading plane of the loading entity are not parallel), the final load value is calculated from the projection
of defined load onto the selected slab.
Free load is independent of finite element mesh and possible refinement or "coursing" of the mesh does
not affect the calculated results.
It is possible to manually define which particular slabs should be subject to a particular free load.
Alternatively, the program may automatically detect all affected slabs and apply the load on them. The
former approach enables the user to extract specific slabs from the effect of the defined load.
Both entities located under and above the defined load are subject
to the defined load.
-Z
If ON, the load is supposed to act only in the space located along
the negative half of Z-axis of the User coordinate system. That
means that ONLY the entities located UNDER the XY-plane of
the UCS are subject to the load in question.
If ON, the load is supposed to act only in the space located along
the positive half of Z-axis of the User coordinate system. That
means that ONLY the entities located ABOVE the XY-plane of
the UCS are subject to the load in question.
318
SCIA.ESA PT
Selected
Direction
Type
Value
Validity
Select
System
319
SCIA.ESA PT
Direction
Type
Distribution
The load may be either constant along the edge or linearly variable
(trapezoidal).
Value
Validity
Select
System
Location
Direction
Type
The load may be a force load, wind load, snow load or predefined
load.
Distribution
The load may be either constant across the slab or linearly variable
(trapezoidal).
Value
Validity
Select
System
Location
320
SCIA.ESA PT
Load direction
Direction of loads
Point force load
Point force load defined in a node or on a beam can be acting in the following directions:
global co-ordinate system
Both point force load in node and point force load on beam can be
defined to act in the direction of the global co-ordinate system.
Point force load in node can be acting in the direction of local coordinate system of the node.
See also chapter Geometry > Nodes > Defining a local co-ordinate
system of a node.
Point force load on beam can be acting in the direction of local coordinate system of the beam.
321
SCIA.ESA PT
Both point moment load in node, point moment load on beam, and
line moment load on beam can be defined to act in the direction of
the global co-ordinate system.
Both point and line moment load on beam can be acting in the
direction of local co-ordinate system of the beam.
322
SCIA.ESA PT
local co-ordinate system
of node
323
SCIA.ESA PT
324
SCIA.ESA PT
4. Select the slabs where the load should act (you may select both main slabs and subregions).
5. Close the function.
325
SCIA.ESA PT
2. Specify the parameters of the load and its size.
3. Confirm the settings with [OK] button.
4. Select slabs where the load should be applied.
5. Close the function.
),
),
),
),
),
).
All the above-mentioned buttons start the corresponding function with default settings. The settings are
shown in the property window where they can but do not have to be edited.
Note: The fast definition of load does not work if the current load case is either of Self weight or
wind or snow type.
326
SCIA.ESA PT
project. The procedure for move of load is therefore identical to the procedure for move of model data
(see chapter Model data > Modifying the existing model data > Moving the model data).
Load cases
Introduction to load cases
Individual loads are not defined "freely". They must be included in load cases. The load cases
correspond with the professional terminology specified in national technical standards dealing with
loads of civil engineering structures. The application of load cases in SCIA.ESA PT follows the load
management procedures that are usual and also obligatory in civil engineering practice.
It is possible to specify a great number of load case parameters to control the way the program treats
each particular load case and especially the loads defined into it.
327
SCIA.ESA PT
Note: By default, the first load case is automatically created once a new project is opened. The
default load case is of Self weight type. Unless the user defines another load case and sets it as an
active one, it is not possible to define any load (except the self weight). See also Note 1 in chapter
Introduction to loads.
Basic parameters
Name
Description
Type
Load group
Variable
328
SCIA.ESA PT
Other parameters depend on the adjustment of the load case type.
Specifies the load case where only self-weight of the structure can
be defined.
Standard
Creep
Direction
This item tells the program the direction in which the generated self-weight is acting.
Dynamic
Defines a general static load case. Any load can be defined in such
a load case.
Temperature
Static wind
Defines a load case for wind loads. Only wind load can be defined
in such a load case.
Earthquake
Snow
Defines a load case for snow loads. Only snow load can be defined
in such a load case.
Coefficient
It defines the factor used for the load case when combinations of load cases are generated. This
parameter is defined only for some codes.
Duration
For static standard loads, the duration of the load impact can be specified.
Long
Medium
Short
Default type.
Instantaneous
All standard static loads are considered during the generation of load case combination as a normal
variable load. Loads of long and short duration are applied only to combinations for the calculation of
deformation of concrete structures according to the second ultimate state. Loads of medium and
instantaneous duration are taken into account only for check of timber members.
Other parameters
329
SCIA.ESA PT
There are other parameters available for each load case. However, these additional parameters depend
on the active code adjusted for the project. The meaning of individual additional parameters is based on
corresponding articles of appropriate codes and it goes beyond the scope of this book.
Note: The settings may affect the functionality of the program. For example, lets assume that the
user defines a new load case and sets its specification to Static wind. If later service Loads is opened,
the user may define only wind loads, nothing else.
Note 1: The display style of loads is controlled by appropriate view parameters. By default, service
Loads set the view parameters related to loads ON. Therefore, whenever you are in the service (Loads),
the loads are automatically displayed. However, as soon as you close service Loads, the program
returns to the standard setting of view parameters. It may happen that the view parameters for loads
are OFF, which means that the defined loads disappear from the screen. They DO NOT disappear from
the project. They are just not display. In order to see the loads even from outside the Loads service, set
the appropriate view parameters ON.
Note 2: The adjustment of the active load case for displaying of results is an integral part of
service Results and is described in corresponding chapter of the manual.
330
SCIA.ESA PT
Dynamic load cases can be input only after mass groups and their combinations have been defined. A
dynamic load case can be input as a standard variable load case; only its type must be set to dynamic.
Impulses, usually but not exclusively point impulses in nodes, can then be defined in these load cases.
A load factor can be defined for a dynamic load case. The meaning of the factor is the same as for static
load case. Other parameters of a dynamic load case depend on its type.
The meaning of the nodal impulse differs according to the type of dynamic load case. No impulses
appear in eigenvalue problem (free vibration analysis) or in seismic calculation. For harmonic vibration,
impulses of exciting forces must be specified.
In case of dynamic wind, impulses from static wind are defined. The impulse size is 1 kN/m2 regardless
of the height (i.e. the product of node-corresponding area and shape coefficient). For orthogonal
vibration, one must specify the node-corresponding length of cylindrical parts of the structure where
vibration can occur.
Frequency
Note: Prior to the definition of the first load case, at least one mass group combination must have
been already defined. In addition, Dynamics must have been selected in the Functionality list of the
Project setup dialogue.
331
SCIA.ESA PT
If the option is ON, the user can select required spectrum for Xdirection. The selection contains all the defined spectra stored in
the spectrum database (see Defining the seismic spectrum). Button
next to the combo box opens the Spectrum manager and the user
may modify the existing spectrum or add a new one.
For more about the definition of a spectrum see chapter Defining
the seismic spectrum.
seismic spectrum Y
seismic spectrum Z
direction X
direction Y
direction Z
acceleration coefficient
overturning level
evaluation type
Evaluation type
sum
extreme
CQC
Note: Prior to the definition of the first load case, at least one mass group combination must have
been already defined. In addition, Dynamics must have been selected in the Functionality list of the
Project setup dialogue.
table
332
SCIA.ESA PT
name
control buttons
The operation of the dialogue is quite straightforward and similar to other curve defining dialogues in
SCIA.ESA PT (e.g. see chapter Advanced input data > Initial deformations > Initial deformation curve).
Load groups
Introduction to load groups
Load groups define "how the individual load cases may be combined together" if inserted into a load
case combination.
Load groups are important especially for the automatic generation of load case combinations. Thanks to
the load groups, the user can easily specify which load cases MUST, MUST NOT, or CAN act together.
333
SCIA.ESA PT
4. Click button [Edit] to open the editing dialogue.
5. Input the required values for individual load group parameters.
6. Confirm with button [OK].
7. If required, repeat steps 2 to 6.
8. Close the Load group manager.
The relation tells what the relation of load cases in the particular
load group is.
Load
This parameters tell whether the load group is used for permanent
or variable loads.
Relation
The relation may be:
Together
All load cases of the same load group of this type are always
inserted into every new load case combination if at least one of the
load cases should be put in.
Exclusive
Two load cases from the same load group of this type will never
appear in the same combination.
Standard
This option provides for users sorting purposes. It allows the user
to sort load cases but it does not affect the process of generation of
load case combinations.
Load
Each load group may be used either for permanent loads or for variable loads. Permanent and variable
loads cannot appear in the same combination.
Note: There may be some other parameters available in the editing dialogue. These
parameters depend on the active code adjusted for the project and the explanation of their
meaning goes beyond the scope of this general manual.
334
SCIA.ESA PT
But when either user or code-related combination is used, there are two critical points:
the user uses the combination as
a "black box"
The user just trusts the program and cannot see nor
evaluate what goes on "behind the scenes".
The user can see and evaluate all the linear combinations
created from the selected set of load cases included into
the combination. But the number of these combinations
may be enormous and usually leaving the user confused
and the final checking uncertain, notwithstanding the
deteriorated speed of the program response.
foreground use
Note 1: Regardless of the approach selected, the numerical results will be the same, as for
both approaches the calculations are performed for the same combinations.
Note 2: In addition, if there a special need arises, the user still has the choice to explode the
defined combination into all the possible linear combinations that may be then evaluated one by
one.
Note: A nonlinear combination MUST be defined if the user wants to perform nonlinear
calculation. A stability combination MUST be defined if the user wants to run a buckling analysis. If
such a combination (nonlinear or stability one) has not been input, the corresponding calculation is
NOT even available in the Calculation dialogue.
Envelope - serviceability
Linear - ultimate
Linear - serviceability
Code dependent
combinations
According to the active code set for the project the program may
offer a set of other combinations based on the particular technical
standard.
one
particular
user-specifies
335
SCIA.ESA PT
Envelope
An envelope contains all the load cases specified by the user and combined in all possible ways
according to defined Action type, Load type and Load group of individual load cases inserted into the
combination. Usually, more than one linear combination can be generated from the envelope.
IMPORTANT NOTE: This type of combination was called User combination in previous releases
of SCIA.ESA PT
Envelope ultimate
The user can enters the multiplication coefficients for individual load cases. The program generates
several combinations for the inserted load cases if there are any variable load cases. All possible
combinations of specified load cases are generated.
A small example will show the difference between Linear-ultimate (see below) and User-ultimate
combination:
A project contains two load cases: LC1 - type permanent and LC2 - type variable.
The linear-ultimate combination with the contents LC1/ coefficient1 and LC2/ coefficient2 will give the
following combination:
C1 : coefficient1 * LC1 + coefficient2 * LC2
The user-ultimate combination with contents LC1/ coefficient1 and LC2/ coefficient2 will give the
following combinations :
C1 : coefficient1 * LC1 + coefficient2 * LC2
C2 : coefficient1 * LC1
(LC2 is a variable load: both situations (with this load and without this load) are considered by the
program).
Ultimate combinations are used for a strength check (steel code check, reinforcement calculation).
Envelope serviceability
This type of combination is similar to User-ultimate. Serviceability combinations are used for a
serviceability check (deformation check).
Linear combination
A linear combination is a combination of load cases in which the user explicitly specifies which
particular load cases should be included in a specific combination. The result is exactly what the user
does, nothing less and nothing more.
Linear ultimate
The linear-ultimate combinations are the combinations known from other programs: the specified load
cases are multiplied by the given coefficients and the total sum is then made. Nor additional
combinations are generated.
Ultimate combinations are used for a strength check (steel code check, reinforcement calculation).
Linear serviceability
This type of combination is similar to Linear-ultimate. Serviceability combinations are used for a
serviceability check (deformation check).
336
SCIA.ESA PT
Code-related combination
A code-related combination is an extension of the envelope. Once again, all the load cases specified by
the user are combined in all possible ways according to specified Action type, Load type, Load group
of individual load cases and with respect to regulations of the particular technical standard (code).
Usually, more than one linear combination can be generated for the code-related combination.
There are two control buttons and a filter that both enable the user to manipulate with exploded
combinations.
Control buttons
[Explode to envelope]
[Explode to linear]
337
SCIA.ESA PT
Filter
The filter enables the user to view only those combinations in the Load case combinations manager
that s/he is interested in at the particular moment.
Input
combinations
Contents of
combination
338
SCIA.ESA PT
339
SCIA.ESA PT
In order to explode a combination, one of two control buttons must be used:
[Explode to envelope]
[Explode to linear]
The name of exploded combinations is derived from the name of the "principle" or "mother"
combination. If e.g. the "mother" combination is named "UEC" then the background combinations are
named "UEC1", "UEC2", "UEC3", etc. (notice that the number immediately follows the "mother"
combination name and compare with the name of background combination above)
Note 1: Any envelope can be exploded to all possible combinations. This means that even a
user-combination that was created from a code-related combination as a result of Explode
operation can be further exploded.
Note 2: If a code-related combination is exploded to all possible combinations, the number
of created linear combinations may be very large. Consequently, it may be rather difficult to
evaluate all the combinations properly. Therefore, this action is recommended for experienced
user only.
Combination key
Whenever a table of extremes (either local, beam or global) is given in the Document, it shows not only
the value and place, but also the load case or combinations in which each particular extreme was
achieved.
If the user is only using code-related combinations, the information that the extreme was achieved in
this "huge" combination may be insufficient. As stated already several times, a code-related
combination may combine several tens or even hundred linear combinations.
Therefore, SCIA.ESA PT enables the user the option to attach a legend to result tables. This legend is
called Combination key and it contains a list and composition of linear combinations (formed from the
code-related combination) for which any of extreme values has been achieved.
Only the linear combinations that appear in the result table are stated in the Combination key.
340
SCIA.ESA PT
Example
Example for Envelopes
Lets assume a continuous beam of two spans. The beam is subject to load sorted into five load cases.
LC1 permanent self weight, distributed load in both spans
LC2 variable distributed load in the left span, load group G1
LC3 variable distributed load in the right span, load group G1
LC4 variable crane, concentrated force in the middle of the left span, load group G2
LC5 variable crane, concentrated force in the middle of the right span, load group G2
The variable load cases are divided into two groups:
G1 imposed floor load, standard group
G2 crane, exclusive group, only one of the load cases may be acting at the same time
The user defines the following envelopes:
LC1 + 1.2*LC2 + 1.2*LC3 +1.3*LC4 + 1.3*LC5
The program will then generate (explode) the following linear combinations:
LC1
LC1 + 1.2*LC2
LC1 + 1.2*LC3
LC1 + 1.3*LC4
LC1 + 1.3*LC5
LC1 + 1.2*LC2 + 1.2*LC3
LC1 + 1.2*LC2 + 1.3*LC4
LC1 + 1.2*LC2 + 1.3*LC5
LC1 + 1.2*LC3 + 1.3*LC4
LC1 + 1.2*LC3 + 1.3*LC5
LC1 + 1.2*LC2 + 1.2*LC3 + 1.3*LC4
LC1 + 1.2*LC2 + 1.2*LC3 + 1.3*LC5
341
SCIA.ESA PT
LC1
V1
V2
V3
V4
S1
342
self weight
SCIA.ESA PT
S2
Lets define a code-related combination to Eurocode. The combination definition contains all the
defined load cases.
Name
Type
Load cases
Coefficiens
UEC
EC ultimate
LC1
1.00
V1
1.00
V2
1.00
V3
1.00
V4
1.00
S2
1.00
S2
1.00
User
ultimate
LC1
1,35
UEC.2
User
ultimate
LC1
1,35
V1
1,50
V2
1,50
V3
1,50
V4
1,50
LC1
1,00
V1
1,50
V2
1,50
V3
1,50
V4
1,50
LC1
1,35
S1
1,50
S2
1,50
LC1
1,00
S1
1,50
S2
1,50
LC1
1.35
V1
1.35
V2
1.35
V3
1.35
V4
1.35
S2
1.35
S2
1.35
UEC.3
UEC.4
UEC.5
UEC.6
User
ultimate
User
ultimate
User
ultimate
User
ultimate
343
SCIA.ESA PT
UEC.7
User
ultimate
LC1
1.00
V1
1.35
V2
1.35
V3
1.35
V4
1.35
S2
1.35
S2
1.35
344
SCIA.ESA PT
The coefficient can be defined in the Load case manager (see below).
SCIA.ESA PT distinguishes between three types of load case combinations. It is important to know
what happens to the load factor in each of the types. The following text is valid ONLY if Czech
standard is adjusted as a current code of SCIA.ESA PT. If another code is adjusted, the possible
application of load factor is not accessible.
Linear combination
If a linear combination is being defined, a coefficient may be input manually for each of the load cases
included into the combination. So far, this is true for any national code implemented in SCIA.ESA PT.
For Czech standard however, the combination input dialogue offer an option to apply the load factor
defined previously for a load case.
This gives an advantage especially if one load case is included into several combinations. There is no
need to input a coefficient for each new combination. It is sufficient enough to input the load factor
once for the load case and then simply apply it for each combination.
In order to apply the load factors to all load cases included into a combination, the user must only press
button [Apply] in item Coefficient for CSN. The appropriate load factors are assigned to
corresponding load cases.
345
SCIA.ESA PT
Envelope combination
Here, the same can be said as for linear combination.
Code-related combination
If a code-related combination is defined, the option for application of load factors becomes inaccessible.
The reason is that the algorithm for automatic generation of envelope and linear combinations from the
input set of load cases uses load factors defined by the appropriate standard. They can be reviewed in
Project setup dialogue on Combinations tab.
346
SCIA.ESA PT
None
No initial imperfection is imposed.
Simple inclination
dx
dy
dy
1/f
Radius of curvature
Note: The given curvature is considered for all the beams in the structure. In other words, all the
beams are subject to the same initial curvature. The program automatically determines which direction
of curvature is critical and uses that direction for calculation.
Inclination function
dx inclination functions:
Z
347
SCIA.ESA PT
1/f
Radius of curvature
dx inclination function: Z
dx inclination function: Y
dy inclination function: Z
dy inclination function: X
Note 1: The inclinations in both X- and Y-direction are evaluated as a sum of inclination
components dependent on vertical and horizontal direction. I.e. the final inclination in X-axis is equal
to the sum of (dx inclination function: Z) and (dx inclination function: Y), and the final inclination in Yaxis is equal to the sum of (dy inclination function: Z) and (dy inclination function: X).
Note 2: The given curvature is considered for all the beams in the structure. In other words, all the
beams are subject to the same initial curvature. The program automatically determines which direction
of curvature is critical and uses that direction for calculation.
The results obtained for the specified load case are imposed as the
initial imperfection for further calculations. It means that the
results for the specified load case must be calculated first. Only
then the further calculations may be performed.
Note: The results for the given load case must be already calculated. Otherwise the program issues
a warning.
Buckling shape
The results obtained from the specified buckling calculation are imposed as the initial imperfection for
further calculations. It means that the results for the specified stability combination must be calculated
first. Only then the further calculations may be performed.
Stability
Eigen shape
Max deformation
The program takes the selected eigen shape and finds the
maximum deformation for it. This found maximum is re-adjusted
to the value specified in this item. The deformation of the rest of
the structure is adjusted proportionally.
Note: Stability calculation must have been already completed. Otherwise the option is not
available.
348
SCIA.ESA PT
Inclination function
dx inclination function: Z
dx inclination function: Y
dy inclination function: Z
dy inclination function: X
Stability combination
Stability combinations are similar to standard combinations and are used for stability calculations.
Result classes
Introduction to result classes
Result classes represent a very powerful and useful tool for the evaluation of results. They allow the
user to define a set (a class) of results for selected load cases and load case combinations. The program
then treats the class like an envelope of results.
349
SCIA.ESA PT
4. Type the name and description of the result class.
5. In the list of available load cases and combinations on the right hand side select the required items that
should be inserted into the result class (Multiple selections are supported).
6. Press button [Add] to insert the load case or combination into the result class.
7. Repeat steps 5 to 6 for all load cases and combinations that should be inserted into the result class.
8. Confirm the definition with button [OK].
9. Repeat steps 2 to 8 for other classes, if required.
10. Close the Result class manager.
The picture above shows the editing dialogue for a new result class.
Load generators
Introduction to load generators
Load generators represent a tool that may be used for simplified definition of load. They provide for the
transformation of load from specified load area into a given planar section of the structure. It is also
possible to use generators to determine wind or snow load per given vertical section of the structure.
The generation of wind and snow load can be performed directly to a specific national technical
standard or according to a user-defined snow weight of wind distribution along the height of the
350
SCIA.ESA PT
building. Arbitrary polygonal areas can be used to define the load area for recalculation of the load into
a planar section.
Wind generator
Wind generator
Wind generator enables the user to subject a structure to the effect of wind. It is possible to apply values
and formulas given in a particular standard, or specify a user-defined curve of wind pressure along the
height of a building.
The load calculated from the given wind definition is applied on the planar section of the structure. The
section is defined by the current working plane. Thus, various sections may be subject to various
generated loads.
Note 1: The wind load generator may be used to generate the load on a single planar section of the
structure at a time. The section is defined by the current working plane. The working plane MUST be
defined as vertical. Otherwise, the wind load generator cannot be applied.
Note 2: The wind load generator can be used ONLY on an undivided building. If a structure
consists of two or more separate and unconnected parts in the particular planar section, the load is
generated on one of the parts only.
Note 3: Only the part of the structure that is ABOVE the terrain level is considered in the load
generation. The terrain level parameter may be thus used to exclude some part of the structure from
being subject to the generated wind load. The terrain level is always defined in global co-ordinate
system.
Code wind
If option Code is selected, the user may then specify additional parameters defined in the particular
national standard. The sample pictures below show dialogues for the adjustment of code related
parameters for EC and NEN standards.
351
SCIA.ESA PT
352
SCIA.ESA PT
It is possible to define multiple wind curves. They are stored and can be easily revised, edited, deleted
and selected in a standard SCIA.ESA PT database manager.
Note: The type of wind load adjusted in this Project Setup dialogue is later used when function
Load > Wind generator is applied.
353
SCIA.ESA PT
The dialogue also displays the contour of the structure or its part (i.e. the planar section) that will be
considered for the load generation. Beams that will be subject to the generated load are drawn in thick
line. The active beam is in red while the others are in green. The remaining beams of the structure, i.e.
those that will not be subject to the generated wind load, are drawn in thin line.
354
SCIA.ESA PT
If the wind load is to be generated to a specific code, it is possible that some of the loaded beams are
divided into several intervals. The division is controlled by the regulations of the particular standard.
In addition, the user may decide to divide any of the existing intervals or beams into two parts. This
division may be applied recursively, so any of the beams can be divided into as many intervals as
necessary. And vice versa, any of the two adjacent intervals may be connected to create one interval and
ultimately a single beam.
Hatches drawn at the thick-line, i.e. loaded, beams indicate the direction of the generated load. Hatches
attached to a beam from outside of the structure contour mean that the load produces pressure. Hatches
drawn on the inside of a beam indicate that the load produces suction.
Parameters
Direction
Inside coefficients
Preference
Frame distance
Terrain level
Coefficients
Control buttons
Set coefficients
Next
Previous
Divide
355
SCIA.ESA PT
The point of division is defined in a dialogue that opens
after the action is started.
Connect
Regenerate
This button resets the program default values. It sets all the
coefficients to their default values and deletes all possible
intervals created by the user.
Print picture
Note: Czech standard (CSN) does not take the Inside coefficient into account, even though it may
be defined.
The frame will be subject to wind load whose intensity will be specified by means of a user-defined
height-pressure curve. For simplicity and for good demonstration, the curve is defined so that:
the pressure is constant and equal to 1 kN/m2 over the first storey,
the pressure changes linearly to 2 kN/m2 over the second storey,
356
SCIA.ESA PT
the pressure is constant and equal to 2 kN/m2 over the third storey,
Once the wind curve is input, the wind load generator may be started. Lets set the frame distance to 3
metres.
Lets accept the default parameters for the direction, inside coefficients and preference.
Then, lets adjust shape coefficient on the first beam. Lets set the outside coefficient to 1.0 and the
inside coefficient to 0 (zero).
357
SCIA.ESA PT
358
SCIA.ESA PT
And the coefficients on the last beam will be:
On closing the dialogue of the wind load generator, the defined load is displayed on the screen.
In order to review and, if necessary, modify any of the defined wind parameters, it is possible to apply
the SCIA.ESAs editing procedure. Lets assume that the load along the second floor of the right hand
side column should be reviewed.
So, lets select the load.
359
SCIA.ESA PT
The properties, including all parameters are displayed in the Property Window.
There are two coefficients in the Property Window named Coef1 and Coeff2. These represent the total
value of the shape coefficient at the beginning and at the end, respectively, of the selected beam.
All the input data can also be clearly verified in a load table in either Preview window or Document
window.
360
SCIA.ESA PT
Note:
The graphical representation of the wind load uses the following convention:
1) The graphical size of the load "diagram" takes account of both acting width, shape coefficient and
wind pressure.
2) The numerical value at the load "diagram" may show the acting width or the final load value. The
adjustment may be made using the Set view parameters function. See the Note in chapter Basic
working tools > View parameters > Overview of view parameters > Labels and descriptions.
3) The value of the shape coefficient can be read in the property table once the required load is
selected.
Snow generator
Snow generator
Snow generator enables the user to subject a structure to the effect of snow. It is possible to apply
values and formulas given in a particular standard, or specify a user-defined value of snow weight.
The load calculated from the given snow definition is applied on the planar section of the structure. The
section is defined by the current working plane. Thus, various sections may be subject to various
generated loads.
Note 1: The snow load generator may be used to generate the load on a single planar section of the
structure at a time. The section is defined by the current working plane. The working plane MUST be
defined as vertical. Otherwise, the snow load generator cannot be applied.
Note 2: The snow load generator can be used ONLY on an undivided building. If a structure
consists of two or more separate and unconnected parts in the particular planar section, the load is
generated on one of the parts only.
361
SCIA.ESA PT
Code snow
If option Code is selected, the user may then specify additional parameters defined in the particular
national standard. The sample picture below show dialogues for the adjustment of code related
parameters for EC standard.
Note: The type of snow load adjusted in this Project Setup dialogue is later used when function
Load > Snow generator is applied.
SCIA.ESA PT
The dialogue also displays the contour of the structure or its part (i.e. the planar section) that will be
considered for the load generation. Beams that will be subject to the generated load are drawn in thick
line. The active beam is in red while the others are in green. The remaining beams of the structure, i.e.
those that will not be subject to the generated snow load, are drawn in thin line.
If the snow load is to be generated to a specific code, it is possible that some of the loaded beams are
divided into several intervals. The division is controlled by the regulations of the particular standard.
In addition, the user may decide to divide any of the existing intervals or beams into two parts. This
division may be applied recursively, so any of the beams can be divided into as many intervals as
necessary. And vice versa, any of the two adjacent intervals may be connected to create one interval and
ultimately a single beam.
Hatches drawn at the thick-line, i.e. loaded, beams indicate the direction of the generated load. Hatches
attached to a beam from outside of the structure contour mean that the load produces pressure.
Parameters
Load mode
Valley effect
Frame distance
363
SCIA.ESA PT
Coefficients
Control buttons
Set coefficients
Next
Previous
Divide
Connect
Regenerate
This button resets the program default values. It sets all the
coefficients to their default values and deletes all possible
intervals created by the user.
Print picture
sk
Ce
exposure coefficient
Ct
thermal coefficient
364
SCIA.ESA PT
The snow load acting on the roof is determined from:
s = mii . Ce . Ct . sk
where:
mii
shape coefficient
Ce
Ct
sk
The thermal coefficient can be lower than 1.0 in buildings where big thermal loses appear thought the
roof. The exposure coefficient can express the effect of wind on reduction of snow layer size.
Direction
Selects the direction of the load. The load may act along one of the
co-ordinate axes only (i.e. in the X-direction, Y-direction, or Zdirection).
System
365
SCIA.ESA PT
q [kN/m2]
Specifies the intensity (size) of the area load. This load will be
then recalculated onto selected beams.
Loaded beams
The area load, whose size is input in the field above, can act on all
the beams located in the loading plane, or on only some of them
(i.e. on the user-selected beams).
),
This button starts the generator itself. If the generator is not started
manually by the user in the phase of definition of a new plane
load, the generation is performed automatically before calculation.
Note:
It is highly recommended to generate the loads on beams manually
using this button. It gives the user an invaluable possibility to
review WHAT exactly has been defined and generated and
compare it with WHAT the user wanted.
366
SCIA.ESA PT
Edit plane geometry
This button enables the user to edit the geometry of the loading
polygon.
See separate chapter Editing the loading polygon.
Buttons of the toolbar has the following meaning (from the left).
New circle centre,
radius point
New rectangle
New polygon
New Bezier
New spline
Select line
Step back
This button goes one step back in the definition of the polygon.
For example:
If a polygon is being defined, the last vertex is removed. Or, if a
circle is being defined by means of three points and two points
have been defined so far, this function removes the second point of
the circle but leaves the first circle point unaffected.
367
SCIA.ESA PT
Another polygon is supposed to follow the circular part of the first polygon. The procedure may be:
1. Start function Plane load.
2. Input the first point to the right of vertex P4 of the defined polygon.
3. Input the second point directly in vertex P4.
4. Press button [Select line] on the toolbar.
5. Select edge P4-P5 of the first polygon.
6. Select edge P5-P7 of the first polygon.
7. Select edge P7-P6 of the first polygon.
8. Press button [New straight] line on the toolbar.
9. Input the remaining vertices of the new polygon.
368
SCIA.ESA PT
Note: After any modification of the polygon, button [Refresh] should be pressed to start regeneration of the load. If the user does not carry out the generation of the load manually, it will be
performed automatically before the calculation of the project.
Note: It is recommended to press button [Refresh] to start re-generation of the load. If this is not
done manually now, it will be performed automatically before the calculation of the project.
369
SCIA.ESA PT
7. If the working plane was moved to the plane of the polygon at the beginning of this function, it is
moved back to its original location now.
370
SCIA.ESA PT
9. Clear the selection (the polygon was selected as the first step).
Inserting an opening
The procedure to insert a new opening
1. Select the polygon
2. Start function Edit plane load geometry:
a. using Action button Edit plane load geometry,
b. or using window pop-up menu and its function Edit plane load geometry.
3. If the working plane is not in the plane of the polygon, it is moved there automatically.
4. The vertices of the polygon are highlighted.
5. Start function Insert opening:
a. using the Action button in the Property window,
b. using the window pop-up menu.
6. Define the new opening polygon. Proper adjustment of SNAP function can help with this task. The
opening may overlap the original polygon.
7. Close the new opening.
8. Close the function of insertion.
9. Close the function of polygon editing.
10. Clear the selection (the polygon was selected as the first step).
371
SCIA.ESA PT
Pond water
Introduction to pond load
Ponding of rainwater is a phenomenon that occurs during a heavy rainfall on slender flat roofs. The
water flows to the lowest point of the structure. Because the rainfall is excessively intensive, the drains
cannot drain the water. Thus the water stays at the same place and the water level raises until the level
of emergency drains is reached. Before that however the structure deforms. Due to the deformation
more water flows to the lowest pond (= ponding of water also known as water accumulation) and the
structure deformation increases, thus more water ... , thus larger deformation..., etc.
The described situation occurs mainly in the combination of flat roofs, roofs with slender roof
structures, large area roofs.
Since the collapse of view roofs in 2002, the ponding of rainwater is a hot issue in the Netherlands.
372
SCIA.ESA PT
373
SCIA.ESA PT
7. Confirm with [OK].
8. Close the function.
Note: The loading area may be edited any time later. The procedure of the modification of
loading areas is similar to the modification of loading polygon in plane load generator.
Note: Pond load may be defined ONLY in a variable load case.
Theoretical background
References
NEN6702 Loadings and deformations: 2001
Theory
NEN6702, Art. 8.7.1.1
Ponding of rainwater is a local effect. Therefore the load should be considered as a free load and thus a
chessboard combination should be considered.
where
Pi;rep(x)
d(i-1)(x)
The water depth caused by the deflection of the roof in iteration (i1) at location (x) in m.
dhw(x)
The water depth above the non-deformed roof area in m acc. to art.
8.7.1.5
dnd
the numerical value of the water depth above the emergency drain
in m
hnd
the depth of the emergency drain above the roof or roof edge, in m
the roof area (vertical projection at ground plane) that drains using
a certain emergency drain, in m2
374
SCIA.ESA PT
Span loads
Introduction to spans
It may happen that a beam extends over several spans. A continuous beam and a multi-span frame are
good example of this.
The frame below has four spans that are 2 m, 4 m, 4 m, and 2 m long, respectively.
If the user designs such a type of structure, s/he may need to define a load that extends just over a single
span (e.g. like in the enclosed picture).
375
SCIA.ESA PT
SCIA.ESA PT enables the user to do this easily. The only thing the user has to do is adjust a proper
"extent" of the load. This parameter can be adjusted during the definition of a new load. The parameter
may even be changed for already existing loads. The standard procedure described in ESA help chapter
Modifying the existing load > Changing the load parameters may be used.
The application of "span loads" itself is straightforward and requires no special preliminary steps. It is
even offered in the Standard user interface level.
Note: A linked node does not have to be only in a real "connection" of two beams. It is possible to
define a linked node anywhere along a beam and let it "unlinked" to any other member.
Types of spans
Span defined by means of polyline
In order to have spans "prepared" by means of a polyline, the following procedure must be used for the
definition of a new beam.
376
SCIA.ESA PT
3. Do NOT define the start point of the beam. Instead, click button [New polyline] (
located just above the command line.
) on the toolbar
Second, when function Drawing a member is closed, a beam is created (automatically) along the
polygon.
377
SCIA.ESA PT
The top horizontal beam covering all the spans of the frame is not connected to the columns yet.
So, select the top horizontal beam and the inner columns. (Surface of beams is displayed in this picture
for better clearness.)
Call function Modify > Connect nodes to beams. Or, if you prefer, use icon of the same name ( )
located on toolbar Geometrical manipulations. New linked nodes are created in the points of "touch"
between the horizontal beam and the columns.
The detailed view shows the graphical symbol used for linked nodes.
378
SCIA.ESA PT
Lets assume that the user want to "divide" the beam into three segments, i.e. have three spans on it.
Adjust the SNAP function to the picture. Option Points on line-curve Nths should be set to 3.
379
SCIA.ESA PT
Call function Node on beam, select the beam and define the point, i.e. the position of the new linked
node.
The detailed view shows the graphical symbol used for linked nodes.
380
SCIA.ESA PT
4. Input the starting point and end point of the load position.
5. Confirm the settings with [OK] button.
6. Select beams where the load should act.
7. Close the function.
Example
Lets assume a continuous five span beam. Lets assume that this beam is subject to three different
loads:
line force load extending over the whole first span,
thermal load extending from the point in one fourth of the third span to the point in three fourths of the
same span,
moment load acting in the middle of the last, i.e. fifth span.
The beam is shown in the picture below.
381
SCIA.ESA PT
First, lets define the line load over the first span. Call function Line force on beam and fill in the
parameters according to the picture. REMEMBER to set the extent to span.
Confirm the settings and select the first span of the beam.
Confirm the settings and select the third span of the beam. The load is inputted accordingly.
382
SCIA.ESA PT
Finally, lets input the moment load acting in the middle of the last span. Call function Moment > on
beam and fill in the table as given below.
Confirm the settings and select the top right span of the beam. The moment is added to the beam.
383
SCIA.ESA PT
The action of modification of span length depends on whether the load on it has been defined
"relatively" or "absolutely". If the load has been defined in relative co-ordinates, everything is clear and
the user does not have to think about it much.
On the other hand, if the span-load is defined in absolute co-ordinates, the user must pay attention to the
operation.
If the span in question is made longer, no special measures need to be taken. The after-modification
span is longer than the original one and the load can be put on the new span without any corrections.
If however, the "after-modification span" is shorter than the original, and especially, if the "aftermodification span" is even shorter than the extent of the load, the load must be corrected in order to fit
the "after-modification span".
Well explain the problem on a simple example.
Lets have a three-span continuous beam subject to a uniformly distributed load over the top right span.
The length of the loaded span is 5 metres. Lets move the spans left node to shorten the span to 3
metres only. The load that is defined in absolute co-ordinates (i.e. it extents from ordinate 0,000 to
ordinate 5,000) cant fit onto the shortened span.
For several reasons, an automatic check and correction of this situation is not performed and the user
must take the initiative. S/he must use function Calculation > Check structure data to correct any
invalid data.
On opening the function a function-control dialogue is displayed. For our case, an attention should be
paid to its bottom part called Check of additional data. This option must be ticked.
384
SCIA.ESA PT
Pressing button [Check] starts the checking procedure. If any invalidities are discovered, the dialogue
offers to continue and correct them. Before pressing button [Continue], make sure that option Correct
position is selected.
At the end, the program informs about the number of corrections made to the project data.
It can be seen on the screen that the load has been corrected appropriately.
Note: If the user does not make the check of data personally, the situation is not so crucial as it
may seem. SCIA.ESA.PT performs the check of data before each calculation. So, if the user forgets or
does not bother to perform the check of data manually, the data are checked automatically and, if
necessary, corrected before the calculation.
385
SCIA.ESA PT
386
SCIA.ESA PT
Masses
Introduction to masses
Masses represent a kind of load that is used with dynamic analysis. The mass then models the effect of
some real load. The real load is idealised and introduced in the form of a material point, i.e. mass.
To some extent, the masses are analogous to loads and mass groups are analogous to load cases.
Mass types
Point mass
Point mass represents a mass concentrated into a single point. It may be considered as analogous to
point load. Point mass may be positioned into a node or into an intermediate point of a beam.
387
SCIA.ESA PT
Line mass
Line mass represents a mass concentrated into a line. It may be considered as analogous to line load.
388
SCIA.ESA PT
389
SCIA.ESA PT
Mass groups
Introduction to mass groups
Mass groups are analogous to load cases. Individual masses may be combined in mass groups and later
combinations of these mass groups may be created.
Here, the user may select a load case that should be used for an
automatic generation of masses.
This parameter tells the program to generate masses from all load
defined in the load case specified above.
390
SCIA.ESA PT
Calculation
Introduction to calculation
Once the model of an analysed structure is created, the calculation of required type may be performed.
SCIA.ESA PT applies the deformation variant of finite element method. The employed beam finite
element takes account of shear deformation.
Detailed information about the applied calculation methods may be found:
in the following chapters and
in a separate book Advanced calculations accessible via menu function Help > Contents > Advanced
calculations.
Note: The check of data is important from one more point of view. By default the intersecting
beams are not joined to each other. If they are supposed to act together, a linked node must be defined
in their intersection. The Check of data function traces such places and suggests the user to make an
automatic connection of affected beams. This operation may thus resolve possible future problems with
numerically unstable solution.
Check of nodes
Search nodes
This option is ALWAYS ON. This check ensures that nodal data
are correct. This option is a kind of protection against possible
damage of saved data.
Ignore parameters
391
SCIA.ESA PT
step. If the two nodes are defined by means of the same
parameters, they are considered duplicate and merged into one. If,
however, the two nodes are defined using different parameters or
different formulas, the nodes are let unchanged.
If the Check of nodes discovers any disorder or "mess" in nodal data, another dialogue is displayed.
Members with undefined
nodes
Free nodes
If any free nodes are found in the project (i.e. nodes that do not
belong to any member) the user may delete them.
It is recommended to delete any free nodes unless the user has
a specific reason for their existence in the project (e.g. free nodes
may represent a temporary state during the definition of a complex
model).
Duplicate nodes
Any duplicate nodes found in the project are reported here and it
up to the user whether they will be deleted or not.
It is recommended to delete duplicate nodes.
Check of beams
Check beams
This check goes through the model and traces double beams, i.e.
beams of identical position, orientation and length. If such beams
are discovered, the user may decide whether they should be
preserved or whether only one of the identical beams should be
kept in the project.
Note: Any two beams are considered identical if they have identical end nodes. If two different
beams defined by means of four different end nodes "lie" one on another, they are not identical under
the terms of this check. However, if standard check options are selected, the check procedure discovers
duplicate nodes first, merges them, and consequently also the two beams become identical under the
conditions of the check.
Check of structure
Search nodes on beams
The program traces places where beams end points are located on
another beam and the two beams are not linked together. The
program links such beams together by means of inserted linked
nodes.
The program checks all additional data (e.g. loads, supports, etc.)
and verifies the position of these data on members. For example,
some loads might have got out of beam during manipulation
functions. Such improper data are corrected.
Note: For the procedure read chapter Performing the check of data.
392
SCIA.ESA PT
Mesh
Minimal distance between two
points
1D elements (beams)
Minimal length of beam element
393
SCIA.ESA PT
Maximal length of beam element
Generation of nodes in
connections of beams
No members
The refinement is applied to 2D members only.
Only beam members
The refinement applied to 2D members and beams the type
of which is adjusted to "beam (80)"
All members
The refinement applied to 2D members as well as to all
beam members.
2D elements (slabs)
Generation of refinement bands
along the lines
394
SCIA.ESA PT
Maximal out of plane angle of a
quadrilateral
Mesh refinement
Mesh refinement
The finer the finite element mesh is, the more accurate the obtained results are (i.e. the closer to the
theoretically correct ones) and the more time consuming the solution is and the more disk space is
needed both during the calculation and for storage of the results. The mesh size should be adjusted
considering the load the structure is subject to and taking account of the requirements on the
calculation.
The generation of the mesh is based on the adjusted size for 2D elements. The generator creates such
elements whose edge size is as close to the adjusted value as possible. Also the division of slab / shell
borders and internal edges is based on this. Any internal nodes of slabs / shells are taken into account as
well.
395
SCIA.ESA PT
The mesh must be made finer in certain areas. The mesh may be refines in a circular area around a
specific point, in a band along a defined line or over the whole slab / shell.
If any two refinement areas overlap anywhere, the smaller element size is used. The refinement area
does not have be fully inside the "master" slab /shell. Only a part of the refinement area may be located
inside it.
Radius
Defines the radius of circular area where the mesh will be refined.
Ratio
Defines the ratio between the average element edge size in the
centre of refinement area and the average preset element size.
dx, dy, dz
Size
Note: If this type of refinement is used without proper attention, it may result in really "strange"
shapes of finite elements along the selected line. This may happen especially if the size along the line is
too far from the standard element size that is used for other edges of the elements along the selected
line (see the figure below).
396
SCIA.ESA PT
Size
Calculation types
General calculation parameters
Any type of calculation can be controlled by means of a set of parameters.
Advanced solver option
If this option is ON, the user may specify which load cases, or
load case combination in case of other than linear calculation, will
be calculated. Otherwise, all non-calculated load cases or
combinations are always calculated.
Type of solver
Number of sections on
average member
Maximal acceptable
translation
397
SCIA.ESA PT
Maximal acceptable
rotation
Note: The adjustment of these parameters may affect the layout of the calculation dialogue
that opens on the screen when a calculation is started.
Geometrical nonlinearity
If this option is ON, the second order effects are considered during
the calculation.
It is possible to select either Timoshenko or Newton-Raphson
method.
For both methods, the exact solution of beams is implemented. It
takes account of normal forces and shear deformation for any kind
of loading. Transformation of internal forces into the deformed
beam axis is included.
Number of increments
398
unlimited
1000
999
99
SCIA.ESA PT
Note: Static non-linear calculation can ONLY be performed after the static calculation of the same
project has been carried out successfully. In other words, non-linear calculation is a two-step
procedure: (i) linear calculation must be completed, (ii) non-linear calculation can be started.
Note: The dynamic calculation can be carried out for mass combinations only.
399
SCIA.ESA PT
Buckling analysis
Adjustment of general parameters may control the calculation.
Note: The buckling calculation can be carried out for stability combinations only.
Note: The adjustment of these parameters may affect the layout of the calculation dialogue
that opens on the screen when a calculation is started.
400
SCIA.ESA PT
The Calculation settings dialogue summarises the parameters that control the calculation process.
Calculation type
Here the user may select the required type of calculation.
Solved
If any type of calculation has already been performed, it is marked here.
Dynamics
The number of eigenfrequencies that will be calculated is shown here. It may be adjusted in Solver
Setup dialogue.
401
SCIA.ESA PT
Note: All the calculation parameters may be adjusted in the Solver Setup dialogue.
For small models the dialogue may just "flash" on the screen and disappear again.
On finishing the calculation, the program shows the dialogue with the result of the calculation.
If everything is OK, the Solver report dialogue can be closed and the user may proceed to the
evaluation of results. If anything went wrong during the calculation, a message is displayed and its up
to the user to resolve the situation.
402
SCIA.ESA PT
or tree menu function Calculation, Mesh > Hidden calculation,
or button [Hidden calculation] (
) on toolbar Project.
Solution methods
Direct solution
This is a standard Cholesky solution based on a decomposition of the matrix of the system. The
advantage is that it can solve several right sides at the same time. This type of solution is effective
especially for small and middle-size problems when disk swapping is not necessary. The limit depends
on the size of the problem and on the size of available RAM memory.
403
SCIA.ESA PT
It can be said that this solution is more convenient for most of problems.
Disadvantage of this solution may emerge with extremely large problems. The calculation time may rise
significantly if RAM size is insufficient. Whats more, if the available disk space is not large enough,
the problem cannot be solved at all.
If the problem is excessive and of poor numerical condition, the rounding error may be so big that it
exceeds the acceptable limit. This may result in imbalance between resultants of load and reactions. The
difference between the total sums of loads and reactions should not be greater than about 0.5%. But
even the value of 0.1% suggests that the results may be suspicious.
Iterative solution
The Incomplete Cholesky conjugate gradient method is applied.
Its advantage is minimal demand on RAM and disk size. Therefore, the solution is convenient
especially for extremely large problems that cannot be solved by means of direct solution or whose
calculation time would be enormous for that kind of solution due to excessive disk operations.
Another advantage is that due to the ability of continuous improvement of accuracy the method is able
to find technically accurate solution even for equation systems that would be numerically unstable in
the direct solution.
The disadvantage is that the method can employ only one right side at a time and this increases the time
demands for equation systems with several right sides.
Timoshenko method
The algorithm is based on the exact Timoshenkos solution of a beam. The axial force is assumed
constant during the deformation. Therefore, the method is applicable for structures where the difference
of axial force obtained by 1st order and 2nd order calculation is negligible (so called well defined
structures). This is true mainly for frames, buildings, etc. for which the method is the most effective
option.
The method is applicable for structures where rotation does not exceed 8.
The method assumes small displacements, small rotations and small strains.
If beams of the structure are in no contact with subsoil and simultaneously they do not form ribs of
shells, no fine division of beams into finite elements is required. If the axial force is lower than the
critical force, this solution is robust. The method needs only two steps, which leads to a great efficiency
of the method.
The first step serves only for solution of axial force. The second step uses the determined axial forces
for Timoshenkos exact solution. The original Timoshenkos solution was generalised in SCIA.ESA PT
and the shear deformations can be taken into account.
Newton-Raphson method
The algorithm is based on Newton-Raphson method for solution of non-linear problems. The method is
robust for most of problems. It may, however, fail in the vicinity of inflection points of loading
diagram. This may occur for example at compressed beams subject to small eccentricity or to small
transverse load. Except for the mentioned example, the method can be applied for wide range of
problems. It provides for solution of extremely large deformations.
The load acting on the structure can be divided into several steps. The default number of steps is eight.
If this number is not sufficient, the program issues a warning.
The rotation achieved in one increment should not exceed 5.
The accuracy of the method can be increased through refinement of the finite element mesh or by the
increase in total number of increments. For example, the solution of a single beam divided to a single
finite element will not give sufficient results.
404
SCIA.ESA PT
In some specific cases, high number of increments may solve even problems that tend to a singular
solution which is typical for the analysis of post-critical states.
Note: This method requires that a beam is divided to at least four (4) finite elements. Usually, such
division is adjusted automatically whenever Newton-Raphson method is selected for calculation.
Advanced calculations
Advanced calculations
More details about various advanced types of calculation can be found in a separate book: Advanced
calculations.
405
SCIA.ESA PT
Results
Opening the service Results
Service Results may be opened after a calculation has been successfully finished.
Service Results can be opened using:
tree menu item Results,
menu function Tree > Results,
icon Results (
) on toolbar Project.
As soon as the service is opened in the tree menu window, the Property window is filled with
parameters corresponding to active function of service Results. The parameters in the Property window
can be used to adjust "WHAT" is displayed and "HOW" it is displayed.
Common parameters are:
Load type
For each of the above specified load type a set of available items
(load cases, combinations, result classes) is offered.
Selection
The user may display the results either on all or only selected
beams.
Filter
The set of beams where the results are displayed may be specified
by means of a filter.
Values
Drawing setup
Other specific
parameters
Note: If a calculation has not been performed yet or the structure has been somehow modified after
the calculation has been carried out, service Results is not accessible (to be precise, it is not offered in
the tree menu).
Note: The collection of functions offered in the service may vary according to the project type and
authorised modules.
406
SCIA.ESA PT
Selection
All
User
Filter
No
No filter is applied.
Wildcard
Cross-section
Material
Layer
combination
result class
The choice of a particular load case, combination, or result class can be then made in item located just
below Types of loads in the Property window of service Results. Only one load case, combination or
result class may be selected at a time.
Representation
outline lines only
407
SCIA.ESA PT
outline lines only with
hatches in sections
filled form
Limits
The limits may be adjusted to control the colour of the diagram. The user specifies two numerical
values. Three colours are used to display the diagram. The colours may be adjusted in the Setup >
Colours and lines dialogue. Rules for use of individual colour are explained in the enclosed table:
Colour:
Result if below min
Colour:
Result if above max
Colour:
Result if between min
and max
This colour is used for those sections where the value of displayed
component is lower that the minimum limit.
This colour is used for those sections where the value of displayed
component is greater that the maximum limit.
This colour is applied for the sections where the value of displayed
component is between the limits.
1000
Minimum
-4000
Colour:
blue
red
408
green
SCIA.ESA PT
The diagram will look like:
Another example
The settings described above may be used to "hide" specific range of the result values. For example, if
you want to see just the positive branch of the diagram, it is possible to use the following trick.
Maximum
Minimum
Colour:
Result if below min
Colour:
e.g. blue
409
SCIA.ESA PT
Description
Values
Sections in labels
Angle of text
The user may specify the inclination of the text for diagram labels.
All the diagrams for the same beam use the same scale.
Same height
All the diagrams for the same beam use the same height.
2.
Select required group (or set) for the display (e.g. internal forces, bill of material, etc.).
3.
4.
5.
6.
Results on beams
Displaying the internal forces
The procedure to display diagrams of internal forces
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
410
SCIA.ESA PT
Principal
Extreme
Drawing
Section
Min
Max
Extreme
The individual options for parameter Extreme are demonstrated in the table below. For each parameter
option a corresponding simple drawing is added.
No
Section
Local
411
SCIA.ESA PT
Beam
Global
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Set other display parameters (Display parameters for diagrams of deformation on beams are
analogous to parameters for internal forces on beams).
7.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Set other display parameters (Display parameters for diagrams of deformation of nodes are
analogous to parameters for internal forces on beams).
7.
412
SCIA.ESA PT
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Extreme
Rotated supports
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Extreme
Rotated supports
413
SCIA.ESA PT
All permanent load cases are considered together. Only the total
reaction (sum of all permanent load cases) is given.
Variable load cases which are not in an exclusive group. They can
act simultaneously with all other variable loads.
- not exclusive
Variable load cases
- exclusive
Extremes
These load cases cannot act simultaneously with other load cases
of the same exclusive group.
This section contains extreme values composed from all
permanent and variable load cases.
Filter
Here, the user may limit the selection to specific entities only.
Coefficient
Rotated support
This option has influence only when rotated supports exist the
project.
If this option is not marked, the reactions in the global axes are
drawn.
If this option is marked, the reactions in the axes of the support are
drawn.
Note: More information about display settings for results may be found in chapter Opening
the service Results and Displaying the internal forces.
414
SCIA.ESA PT
415
SCIA.ESA PT
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Set other display parameters (Display parameters for diagrams of bill of material are analogous to
parameters for internal forces on beams, although their number is considerably lower).
7.
416
SCIA.ESA PT
4. Use function Print / Preview data to create a table in the Preview window.
a. either use menu function File > Print data > Print / Preview data,
b. or use function Print data > Print / Preview data on toolbar Project.
5. Review the results.
Example
Note: More information about display settings for results may be found in chapter Opening
the service Results and Displaying the internal forces.
Shear
von Mises
Fatigue
Kappa
The stress ratio. This ratio is used in some fatigue check rules (e.g.
DIN).
417
SCIA.ESA PT
Note: More information about display settings for results may be found in chapter Opening
the service Results and Displaying the internal forces.
The procedure for selection of required nodes and definition of the "configuration" of
connection
1. Open service Results.
2. Activate (doubleclick) function Connection input.
3. If required, type the name of the connection.
4. Select the co-ordinate system. The internal forces will be then determined in the selected system.
5. Confirm with [OK].
6. Select node or nodes where the connection forces should be displayed. A circular mark is drawn around
each of the selected nodes.
7. Close the function.
8. If more than one connection has been defined, clear the selection and select the first one.
9. The Property window displays the parameters of the connection including all the entering beams.
10. Select, i.e. unmark, the beam that is the "owner" of the connection.
418
SCIA.ESA PT
11. Select, i.e. mark, all the beams that contribute to the connection.
12. If necessary, clear the selection and select another connection.
Note: The internal forces in the connection may be then displayed using function Connection
forces.
Selection
Type of load
The results for load case, load case combination or class may be
displayed.
Filter
Here, the user may limit the selection to specific entities only.
Values
Individual components
Drawing setup
This item enables the user to adjust the view parameters for the
result diagrams.
Extreme
Section
Note: More information about display settings for results may be found in chapter Opening
the service Results and Displaying the internal forces.
419
SCIA.ESA PT
Note: If you double-click the Calculation protocol function in service Results, a small preview
window is opened on the screen. This window contains the required information about the last
performed calculation.
axial force
Vy
shear force Vy
Vz
shear force Vz
Mx
bending moment Mx
My
bending moment My
My
bending moment Mz
ux
displacement ux on beams
uy
displacement uy on beams
uz
displacement uz on beams
deformed
structure
displacement of nodes
Rx
force reaction Rx
Ry
force reaction Ry
Rz
force reaction Rz
Mx
moment reaction Mx
My
moment reaction My
Mz
moment reaction Mz
420
SCIA.ESA PT
Note: If the command line is hidden, the toolbar does not appear. In order to see the toolbar,
display the command line first using function View > Toolbars.
421
SCIA.ESA PT
rib-beam itself, the flange of the T-section is made of the appropriate effective width of the slab. The
effective width of the slab is then used to determine internal forces from the slab that must be added to
the internal forces calculated in the rib itself. The internal forces in the slab are transformed into the
local coordinate system of the rib before the integration.
T
T1
the centre of gravity of the left hand side part of the effective width
T2
the centre of gravity of the right hand side part of the effective width
T3
The coordinates of centres of gravity are used to determine lever arms in Y and Z direction:
Lever Arm Z1 = T1z Tz
Lever Arm Z = Tz 0z
Lever Arm Y = Ty 0y
The final internal forces in the rib can be calculated from the formulas below:
N = N beam + N slab, left + N slab, right
Vy = Vy beam + Vy slab, left + Vy slab, right
Vz = Vz beam + Vz slab, left + Vz slab, right
Mx = Mx beam + Mx slab, left + Mx slab, right
My = My beam + My slab, left + My slab, right +
N slab, left * (Lever Arm Z1) N slab, right * (Lever Arm Z2) +
N beam * Lever Arm Z3;
Mz = Mz beam + Mz slab, left + Mz slab, right +
N slab, left * (Lever Arm Y1) N slab, right * (Lever Arm Y2) +
N beam * Lever Arm Y3;
422
SCIA.ESA PT
Results on slabs
Displaying the deformation of nodes on slabs
The procedure to display the deformation of nodes
1. Open service Results.
2. Select function 2D members > Deformation of nodes.
3. Select the slabs for the display of results.
4. Select the required type of loads.
5. Select the quantity to be displayed.
6. Select the drawing style.
7. If required, change the Drawing setup.
8. Set any other parameter.
9. If necessary, regenerate the diagrams.
423
SCIA.ESA PT
Style of isolines
The style of "isolines" can be adjusted in any function for display of results on slabs using button
Drawing setup.
Available styles are shown in the following table.
424
SCIA.ESA PT
One colour
Smooth
425
SCIA.ESA PT
Coloured mesh
Isolines
426
SCIA.ESA PT
Isobands
427
SCIA.ESA PT
Map
Note: Not all the options are necessarily available for every result quantity. Only some may be
accessible for some results.
Note: Some additional parameters may be available for every particular style. These advanced
parameters may differ from style to style.
In addition, the type of averaging of the result values over the finite elements can be adjusted.
In centres
428
SCIA.ESA PT
In nodes, no averaging
In nodes, averaging
Similar to the option above, but the results values from adjacent
finite elements are averaged to smooth the distribution of the result
from one element to another
In nodes, averaging on
macro
429
SCIA.ESA PT
Note: The averaging may not be available for every result quantity. Only some results may be
subject to this type of "postprocessing".
Refresh of results
In order to refresh (regenerate the display of) results on the screen a special Action button is located in
the Property Window of SCIA.ESA PT user interface. This button is called Refresh.
430
SCIA.ESA PT
Note: Whenever a change made in the Property Window requires a subsequent refresh of the
screen, item Refresh in Action buttons is highlighted in red.
431
SCIA.ESA PT
When service Results is opened and function Internal forces on beam is selected, no result diagrams
appear on the screen.
432
SCIA.ESA PT
In the Property window, make required adjustments, e.g. set Type of loads to Load cases, and under
Load cases select LC1 (i.e. the self weight). Press button [Refresh] in the Action buttons.
Once button [Refresh] is pressed, the diagram is displayed (this time, bending moment diagram for self
weight load).
In order to see the diagram for another load case, make the required setting in the Property Window.
433
SCIA.ESA PT
And the same may be repeated once more for the last load case.
434
SCIA.ESA PT
The same may procedure may be now be repeated for any other result quantity, load case, load case
combination, or for any other display-style related adjustments.
Selected sections
Selected sections for result diagrams
Beams
Diagrams of result quantities are normally displayed in sections whose density is defined in the Solver
setup dialogue. If the need arises the density may be reduced significantly by means of "user-defined"
sections. The user may simply define a very limited (or excessive, if s/he likes) set of specific points on
the structure (called sections) and the calculated results will be shown in these particular points only.
A section on a beam has the following parameters.
Name
Position x
Coordination definition
Origin
Repeat
Delta x
Slabs
Similarly to beams, it is possible to define a specific section or section across the slab where the results
should be displayed. A section on a beam has the following parameters.
Name
Vector
Vector
Perpendicular to element
In element plane
Along X / Y / Z
435
SCIA.ESA PT
436
SCIA.ESA PT
Finally, lets display the diagram of calculated bending moment My. Using the default setting
(parameters Section set to Ends), the diagram may look like:
Now, lets change the setting of parameter Section to Ends. The calculated values of bending moment
will be drawn in end points of each defined beam.
Now, lets change the setting of parameter Section to Input+Ends. The calculated values of bending
moment will be drawn in end points of each defined beam and in three defined sections.
437
SCIA.ESA PT
Now, lets change the setting of parameter Section to Input. The calculated values of bending moment
will be drawn only in the defined sections.
Slab
By default any result diagram is displayed by means of isolines / isobands. If required, it is however
possible to limit the display to a diagram along a defined section user defined sections.
Whenever a function displaying some result quantity on slabs is started, the parameters controlling the
behaviour of this function are displayed in the Property window. One of the parameters is called
Drawing. The meaning and consequences of this parameter will be demonstrated on a simple slab.
438
SCIA.ESA PT
Further, lets define a section cutting the section e.g. in the middle.
Lets calculate the slab and display e.g. internal forces. Set parameter Drawing to its default value
Standard.
439
SCIA.ESA PT
440
SCIA.ESA PT
Graphic output
Introduction to graphic output
Making a project of a structure represents not only the creation of a precise model and performing of an
exact calculation but also a preparation of a complete documentation providing for clear lucid
representation of results.
SCIA.ESA PT offers the user a set of powerful tools for this task.
Direct graphical print
Picture gallery
The Picture gallery is a tool that enables the user to collect and
further edit various pictures. The pictures may be "scanned"
screens of the program or they may be created manually, or both
in one. The pictures collected here may be printed, used in the
Paper space gallery or inserted into the Document.
To sum up, the main purpose of this output option is to prepare
separate pictures for further processing.
Document
>
) on toolbar Project,
b. or using menu function File > Print picture > Print picture,
c. or using the pop-up menu of the graphical window and its function Print picture.
2. The Graphic output dialogue is opened.
3. Make any modifications or amendments to the drawing.
4. If required, add the title block (stamp).
5. Adjust the page for printing.
6. Print the drawing on the connected printing device using button [Print].
441
SCIA.ESA PT
Select
Line
When pressed, allows the user to draw a single line on the page.
The first left mouse button click defines the staring point of the
line. The second click defines the end point of the line.
In order to end the "line mode", button [Select] (
pressed.
Polyline
Rectangle
) must be
) must be
) must be
Text
Group
Ungroup
Delete
Edit properties
Undo
Update automatic
text
Stamp + header
wizard
Page setting
Zoom buttons
Save
Save as template
E.g. if a DATE and TIME item is in the drawing, the update fills
these item with current date and time.
For information about the adjustment of various parameters for individual items of the graphic output
drawing see chapter Editing the items of graphic output drawing.
Snap to endpoint
442
SCIA.ESA PT
Cursor step
Zoom wheel
button [Print]
button [Cancel]
Fast dragging
Save to file
Save template
Copy
Order
Groups
Delete
Properties
Copy objects
2.
3.
4.
5.
Align objects
Undo
443
SCIA.ESA PT
Landscape
Page margins
Grid, step
Show grid
Snap
Step
Specifies the step of the grid, i.e. the distance between two points
of the grid.
Grid
Grid origin
Printer
Printer setup
Display mode
Graphics
Advanced
Line thickness multiplier
Line pattern
This line thickness is used when the drawing is printed. If there are
lines in the drawing that are thinner than the specified minimal
line thickness, they are printed thicker to comply with the adjusted
limit.
Character set
Bold
Italic
Underline
Strikeout
Colour
444
SCIA.ESA PT
Header + footer at left +
right side
Positions the header and footer to the left and right hand side of
the page instead to the top and bottom sides.
Alignment
Height
Offset
Rotation
Footer
Alignment
Height
Offset
Rotation
BMP
Windows bitmap.
EMF
WMF
DXF
DWG
Fast dragging
445
SCIA.ESA PT
program on lower-capacity computers or in the case of complex
drawings.
Note: If the template is supposed to be used not for the Paper space gallery drawings, but for
Graphic output (i.e. Print picture function) field Print picture in the Setup > Options dialogue must be
specified.
Width
Pattern
The procedure for the editing of properties is given in chapter Editing the items of graphic output
drawing.
Polyline
For a polyline, it is possible to set the following properties:
Colour
Width
Pattern
The procedure for the editing of properties is given in chapter Editing the items of graphic output
drawing.
446
SCIA.ESA PT
Rectangle
For a rectangle, it is possible to set the following properties:
Colour
Width
Pattern
Specifies the line style (solid, dashed, etc.) of the rectangle (i.e.
rectangle border).
Brush colour
Brush pattern
Corner co-ordinates
The procedure for the editing of properties is given in chapter Editing the items of graphic output
drawing.
Circle
For a circle, it is possible to set the following properties:
Colour
Width
Pattern
Specifies the line style (solid, dashed, etc.) of the circle (i.e. circle
border).
Brush colour
Specifies the colour of the filling of the circle. The circle may be
hatched, if required and then the Brush controls the filling of the
circle area.
Brush pattern
Corner co-ordinates
Radius
The procedure for the editing of properties is given in chapter Editing the items of graphic output
drawing.
Text
Various formatting information may be specified for the inserted text.
Text
Height
Horizontal align
Vertical align
Angle
Colour
Font type
Character set
Bold
Italic
Underline
Strikeout
447
SCIA.ESA PT
The procedure for the editing of properties is given in chapter Editing the items of graphic output
drawing.
Automatic text
SCIA.ESA PT offers a whole set of automatic text items. These text items look like a standard text on
the drawing. However, they may be updated any time to reflect the current situation. Whats more, they
may be edited and formatted like standard text.
Date
Time
Date + time
Project name
Project comment
Project type
Plane
The procedure for the editing of properties is given in chapter Editing the items of graphic output
drawing.
Note: It is possible to combine in one text field an automatic text with a manually typed text. Thus
the user may create texts like e.g. "Project: &PROJECT_NAME&, Load case:
&LC_NAME&".
Title block
Title block (sometimes called a stamp) summarises the important information about the contents of a
drawing. It is an essential part of standard hand-made drawings. Therefore, also SCIA.ESA PT comes
with the possibility to add this drawing item.
The title block parts and parameters are:
Header
Display
Line
Contains the text for individual lines of the header of the title
block.
Alignment
Height
Specifies the text height for individual lines of the header of the
title block.
Separator
Font
Font
Character set
Bold
Italic
448
SCIA.ESA PT
Underline
Strikeout
Stamp
Display stamp
If ON, the width of the stamp is set in a way so that the stamp fits
the current page.
If OFF, the width of the stamp may be specified manually (see
below).
Width
Number of rows
Number of columns
Separators
Frame
Display frame
Advanced
Clear drawing
Colour
Selects the colour for the title block (both the header, stamp, and
frame).
Preview
Shows preview of the title block (including the header).
The procedure for insertion of an automatic text item into a title block
1. In the Title block editing dialogue select the text item you want to make automatic.
2. Press the small button at the right hand side of the input field.
3. Select the required automatic text item.
4. Confirm with [OK] button.
449
SCIA.ESA PT
Note: The Company logo has been imported later from an external BMP file and positioned
inside the title block. It is not an integral part of the title block itself.
Picture
The properties of a picture are:
Picture size
Width
Height
Background
Transparent
Filled
Colour
Clipping box
Use
Edit
Default box
On scale
Use
Scale
If the option above is ON, the user may specify the scale for the
printing.
Advanced
Rotation
OpenGL
Hidden lines
Specifies the mode that is used to draw hidden lines and surfaces.
Perspective
Lock view
Line pattern
450
SCIA.ESA PT
OpenGL
If the option Display style in the Page setup is set to OpenGL, this option is unavailable because the
whole graphic output drawing is rendered.
If the option Display style of the Page setup is set to Windows, this option allows the user to set
required rendering mode for the particular picture.
This option is present here to allow all users to use rendering in their graphical output regardless of the
particular type of graphical device that they are using. The unlucky fact is that some of printing devices
may have problems with rendered pictures. The main reason is the insufficiency of memory for printing
if the Display style in the Page setup is adjusted to OpenGL In order to overcome possible difficulties
with some printing devices, SCIA.ESA PT offer a unique solution. The rendered picture is created in
the program using only such amount of memory that the user specifies. Such "memory-limited" picture
is then stretched to the required size and sent to the printing device.
The possible options for the rendering are:
Photo
Dark lines
Light lines
More information about these options can be found in chapter Graphic output > Items of graphic output
drawing > Selecting the suitable stretch mode.
Each of the above mentioned optioned allows the user to specify the size of the memory for rendering
made in SCIA.ESA PT.
0.2 Mb
0.9 Mb
1.44 Mb
2.4 Mb
12 Mb
The procedure for the editing of picture properties is given in chapter Adjusting the picture properties.
).
451
SCIA.ESA PT
).
Note: Please note that automatic text items like Project name or Author name read the
information typed in the Project Setup dialogue. If no information was input in the Project Setup
dialogue, no text may appear in the drawing.
The procedure for insertion of a title block into the graphic output drawing
1. On the control toolbar, click button [Stamp + header wizard] (
).
Inserts a picture from DWG or DXF file. The contents of the file is
inserted as a picture, i.e. including a frame.
Inserts a drawing from DWG or DXF file. The contents of the file
is inserted as a set of drawn entities grouped into one group.
Change template
452
SCIA.ESA PT
Preview
If selected, the inserted picture is fitted (distorted) into the userspecified area.
If not selected, the inserted picture keeps the original aspect ration.
Greyscale
Watermark
Stretch mode
Note 1: While options Ignore aspect ration, Greyscale, and Watermark have effect only on the
Preview window of the dialogue, the selected Stretch mode affects both the Original picture and
Preview windows of the dialogue.
Note 2: Concerning BMP files, only 24-bit bitmaps can be inserted.
Note 3: Concerning DXF and DWG files, only drawings created in AutoCAD versions 2000 and
older can be imported. If a drawing created in AutoCAD 2004 and possible newer versions is imported,
the result may not be satisfactory. This is due to modifications in the file format definition. The format
definition varies for different AutoCAD versions.
453
SCIA.ESA PT
2. Select function Load from EPD file and browse for the required drawing file.
3. The current drawing is discarded and the new drawing is inserted.
2. Select function Append from EPD file and browse for the required drawing file.
3. The current drawing remains unchanged and the new drawing is added over it.
4. The picture editing dialogue is opened on the screen. The dialogue summarises all the properties of the
selected picture.
5. Make the required changes.
6. Confirm with [OK] button.
Sets the view in the direction of individual axes of drawing coordinate system.
Zoom
Copy
Save to file
Zooms in or out.
454
SCIA.ESA PT
Rotate vertically (located on the
right hand side scroll-bar)
axes (i.e.
The operation of the wheel-like buttons is simple. Just place the mouse cursor over the "wheel", press
the left mouse button, hold it down and "turn the wheel" with left-right, or up-down, movement of the
mouse over the pad.
Zoom out
Rotate
Press [Ctrl] key and hold it down. Then press the right
mouse button and hold it down as well. Move the mouse
over the pad in order to get the required view direction.
[Shift]
Press [Shift] key and hold it down. Then press the right
mouse button and hold it down as well. Move the mouse
over the pad in order to get the required position of the
structure on the screen.
).
Note 1: Until at least one item of the drawing has been selected, the button [Properties] is not
available.
Note 2: If required, it is possible to edit multiple items at a time. To select multiple items do the
following. Select the first item (i.e. move the mouse cursor over it and press the left mouse button).
Press down and hold key [Shift] on your keyboard. Select another item. Repeat as many times as
required.
455
SCIA.ESA PT
The procedure to resize entities offering "Vertex moving" and/or "Edge moving"
point
(This refers to rectangle, line and picture entity)
1. Click the entity to make it selected and highlighted
2. Move the cursor onto the point that shows tooltip "Vertex moving" or "Edge moving".
3. Press the left mouse button, hold it down and drag the point to change the size of the entity.
4. Release the mouse button.
456
SCIA.ESA PT
When such an entity (item) is selected, its border or outline is highlighted and specific points shown.
These points (or some of them, may be grabbed and used to rotate the entity.
Stretch modes
Photo
Dark lines
Light lines
The table below demonstrates the effect of individual options on a sample imported photograph.
Photo
457
SCIA.ESA PT
Dark lines
Light lines
Grouping of items
Sometimes it may be useful to group several drawing items into a group. It may happen particularly if
the user decides to draw something manually. The "something" will usually consist of several lines (or
polylines, etc.) but it will represent a single object. Therefore, it will be very useful if such an object
could be treated (e.g. moved) as a single item.
458
SCIA.ESA PT
Picture gallery
Introduction to the picture gallery
Picture gallery is a tool that enables the user to collect, review, modify, delete, and print individual
pictures. The pictures can be either "scanned" from a SCIA.ESA PT graphical window or created
manually. It is also possible to scan a window drawing and add some manually drawn entities to it.
The pictures can be then treated as the final product (i.e. printed or saved to graphical files) or inserted
into the graphic output drawings in the Paper space gallery.
Additional information
about selected picture
459
SCIA.ESA PT
New by wizard
Adjust default
parameters of new
picture
Edit picture
Print picture
Delete picture
Copy picture
Copy picture to
Clipboard
Regenerate picture
) on toolbar Project,
460
SCIA.ESA PT
List view
Change
thumbnail size
This button sets the size of the miniature previews in the list (i.e.
the thumbnail size).
The procedure for the insertion of a picture into the Picture gallery
1. Arrange the view of structure in a graphical window to meet the required purpose.
2. Add the drawing into the Picture gallery:
a. either use menu function View > View > Picture to gallery,
b. or use the window pop-up menu and its function Picture to gallery.
3. Type the name of the drawing and confirm with [OK].
4. The drawing is added into the gallery.
Name prefix
Prefix of name
Specifies the prefix of the name. This prefix is used for generation
of name for each new picture.
Scale
Picture parameters
Picture width
Picture height
Display mode
Defines the display mode for the picture. This display mode is not
used in the Picture gallery. It is however used when the picture is
inserted into the Graphic output drawing in the Paper space
gallery.
Defines the magnification factor for the size of text used in the
picture.
This parameter may be useful when the picture is intended for
large formats (e.g. A0). I such a case the text will be significantly
small in comparison with the size of the drawing. It may however
happen that the user needs to make a draft printing on smaller
format. If this is made without any changes, the text becomes
illegible. The same may be true for the preview on the screen.
461
SCIA.ESA PT
Therefore, it is possible to magnify the text size in order to make
the text readable even on smaller formats.
Dimension lines
End mark style
Text size
Picture name
Place name to picture
).
462
SCIA.ESA PT
Selected
The user will select the line grid planes that will be used for the
generation of pictures.
View parameters
To active window
View parameters for the pictures will be taken from the active
window.
To CAD types
View parameters adjusted for CAD types are used for the pictures.
View direction
To active window
View direction for the pictures will be taken from the active
window.
Perpendicular to plane
Make picture
For all selected planes
Draw members
Only members in plane
Ditto
Loads and supports are drawn only if they are shown in the active
window.
No
Result diagrams are drawn only if they are shown in the active
window.
No
463
SCIA.ESA PT
Grid selection
If more than one line grid has been defined, it is possible to select which ones should be used for the
generation of planes for the pictures. This can be done in Used planes dialogue of the wizard.
Used line grids
This window lists all the line grids that have been selected for the
generation.
This window lists all the planes that the wizard could generate for
the selected line grids.
Select grid
This button allows the user to choose the line grids that will be
used for the generation.
).
Note: Unless at least one line grid has been defined in the project it is not possible to run this
wizard.
464
SCIA.ESA PT
5. Make the required changes.
6. Close the editing dialogue.
7. Repeat steps 2 to 6 as many times as required.
8. Close the Picture gallery manager.
).
465
SCIA.ESA PT
Note: If the picture has been edited in the Gallery item editor and any structural entities (scanned
from the graphical window) have been removed from the picture or broken into single lines, they are
regenerated in the form that fully corresponds with the current state in the graphical window of the
application.
Note: If a set of pictures has been generated using the Wizard "overview drawings" and if any of
the generated pictures has been modified and if function Regenerate has been applied to this set, the
program asks whether the manual changes made in the automatically generated pictures should be (i)
preserved, (ii) discarded or (iii) whether the whole operation should be aborted.
See chapters Regenerating the picture setup and Regenerating the colours setup for
additional information.
466
SCIA.ESA PT
Note: If also the update of the geometry is necessary, function Regenerate the picture can be
used instead.
See chapters Regenerating the picture and Regenerating the colours setup for additional
information.
Note: If also the update of the geometry is necessary, function Regenerate the picture can be used
instead.
See chapters Regenerating the picture setup and Regenerating the picture for additional
information.
WMF
Windows metafile
EMF
EP3
WRL
VRML format
3D DXF AutoCAD
R14, 2000
2D DXF AutoCAD
R14, 2000
3D DWG AutoCAD
R14, 2000
2D DWG AutoCAD
R14, 2000
467
SCIA.ESA PT
).
Note: SCIA.ESA PT supports export into DXF and DWG format of AutoCAD versions R14 and
2000. If a picture is imported into another version of AutoCAD, the result may not be satisfactory. This
is due to modifications in the file format definition. The format definition varies for different AutoCAD
versions.
The procedure for copying of selected picture into the Windows Clipboard
1. Open the Picture gallery manager.
2. In the List of defined pictures select the particular picture that should be copied.
3. Click button [Copy picture to clipboard] (
).
468
SCIA.ESA PT
The procedure to print the picture from within the Gallery item editor
1. Click button [Print picture] (
) on toolbar Modify.
) on toolbar Modify.
Note: The "area" of the picture that is saved into the file is defined by the border of picture.
) on toolbar Modify.
) on toolbar Modify.
469
SCIA.ESA PT
The procedure for adjustment of the dot grid in the Gallery item editor.
1. Click button [Adjustment of the dot grid] (
) on toolbar Modify.
).
Zoom in.
Zoom out
Zoom out.
Zoom by cut-out
Zoom all
Zoom in or out in order to fit the whole structure into the whole
area of the graphical window.
Zoom all
selection
Zoom in or out in order to fit the selected entities into the whole
area of the graphical window.
470
SCIA.ESA PT
Zoom out
The functions described above are identical to standard view adjustment functions available in the main
SCIA.ESA PT environment.
In addition to the standard View-adjustment functions, SCIA.ESA PT offers also a set of sophisticated
functions such as: (i) reversing the view, (ii) border of picture, (iii) clipping box, (iv) layers.
The functions are described in separate chapters.
).
3. The view is readjusted as if you change the position and look at the displayed structure from the
opposite side.
For more information about adjustment of the view see chapter Adjusting the view.
) on toolbar Modify.
).
2. The view is adjusted in a way so that only the framed part of the picture is displayed in the window.
471
SCIA.ESA PT
Parameters of layer
Name
Colour
Visibility
Activity
Comment
The user may add a short comment to explain what the layer
represents.
472
SCIA.ESA PT
Note: The number of layers in the Gallery item editor is fixed. That means that new layers cannot
be added and no layers can be removed.
).
2. If the clipping box has been OFF it is turned ON and vice versa.
).
Note: If the clipping box was not displayed before the setup dialogue was invoked, the clipping box
is switched ON on confirming the settings with [OK] button.
473
SCIA.ESA PT
).
) on toolbar Insert.
Note: For details about the definition of curves see chapter Geometry > Beams > Inserting a new
beam of a complex axis shape.
Position the mouse cursor to the defined location and click the left
mouse button.
Adjust the required SNAP mode, use the mouse cursor to select
the point.
command line
Drawing a polyline
The procedure for drawing a polyline
1. On Gallery picture editor toolbar adjust the colour, line thickness, line pattern, and layer.
2. On toolbar Insert click button [Insert new polylines] (
).
) on toolbar Insert.
The options for the definition of end-points are given in chapter Drawing a line.
).
SCIA.ESA PT
5. Define end points of the selected line or curve type.
6. Finish the function by clicking on button [End action] (
and the function terminated.
The options for the definition of end-points are given in chapter Drawing a line.
Inserting a text
The procedure for inserting text
1. On Gallery picture editor toolbar adjust the colour, line thickness, line pattern, and layer.
2. On toolbar Insert click button [Insert text] (
).
) on toolbar Insert.
The options for the definition of text position are the same as for the definition of line end-points and
are given in chapter Drawing a line.
) on toolbar Insert.
) on toolbar Insert.
The options for the definition of the points are given in chapter Drawing a line.
Note: If just a single dimension line should be inserted, use button [Insert single vertical
dimension line] instead. This option requires only the definition of two points that define the
dimensioned distance and one position point. Once these three points are defined, the dimension
line is complete.
) on toolbar Insert.
475
SCIA.ESA PT
3. The property dialogue for dimension lines is opened on the screen.
4. The style is pre-set to horizontal and Label value to Projection.
5. If needed, adjust other parameters (see chapter Changing the parameters of dimension line).
6. Input the first point to be dimensioned.
7. Input the second point to be dimensioned.
8. Input the point that defines the position of the dimension line.
9. If appropriate, insert other points to be dimensioned.
10. End the function by clicking on button [End action] (
) on toolbar Insert.
The options for the definition of the points are given in chapter Drawing a line.
Note: If just a single dimension line should be inserted, use button [Insert single horizontal
dimension line] instead. This option requires only the definition of two points that define the
dimensioned distance and one position point. Once these three points are defined, the dimension
line is complete.
) on toolbar Insert.
) on toolbar Insert.
The options for the definition of the points are given in chapter Drawing a line.
Note: If just a single dimension line should be inserted, use button [Insert single general
dimension line] instead. This option requires only the definition of two points that define the
dimensioned distance and one position point. Once these three points are defined, the dimension
line is complete.
476
SCIA.ESA PT
477
SCIA.ESA PT
) on toolbar Modify.
Note: This function can be used for both manually drawn entities (e.g. line, text, dimension line)
and scanned graphic window entities (e.g. beam).
478
SCIA.ESA PT
The colour is adjusted by means of buttons on toolbar Gallery editor picture toolbar.
) select the
479
SCIA.ESA PT
3. The change is immediately taken into account.
4. Clear the selection.
) on
Plot line
Plot line can be long, i.e. leading from the dimension line up to the
dimensioned object, or short.
Label alignment
) on toolbar
480
SCIA.ESA PT
) on toolbar Modify.
) on toolbar Project,
481
SCIA.ESA PT
482
SCIA.ESA PT
7. Close the Paper space gallery manager.
483
SCIA.ESA PT
There are a few changes or extensions that are described below.
from gallery
Saving a template
Any drawing may be saved as a template. The template may be later used as the basis (starting status)
for new drawings.
Note: In order to make the saved template "active" follow the procedure given in chapter
Creating a template for Paper space gallery drawings.
Note: If the template is supposed to be used not for the Paper space gallery drawings, but for
Graphic output (i.e. Print picture function) field Print picture in the Setup > Options dialogue must be
adjusted acordingly.
484
SCIA.ESA PT
Document
Introduction to document
The Document is a part of SCIA.ESA PT that enables production of output documents. The final
Document may consist of:
separate tables,
embedded tables,
pictures,
user-added comments,
included external files,
etc.
The chapter Document comprises three parts that are closely related to each other:
Document window
The Document window is the very tool that serves for the creation
of above mentioned output documents.
Preview window
Table composer
On this tab the user may define the main properties of a page.
Styles
On this tab the user may define the styles used in the document.
Tables
On this tab the user may specify the layout of tables in the
document.
Options
Page
Printer
Margins
Styles
Font
Height
Width
Weight
Italic
Underline
Colour
Background
Padding
485
SCIA.ESA PT
Tables
It is possible to define the format for both table cells and table background.
Use document preset
Options
Picture colour depth
Screen / Printer
The user may select a favourite symbol to stand for YES and NO
value in output tables.
Overflowed objects
Maximal number of
pages
Note: The default document style may also be pre-adjusted using SCIA.ESA PT function Setup >
Document.
Document window
Introduction to document window
The Document window is a separate window of SCIA.ESA PT. While the graphical window of
SCIA.ESA PT displays the drawing of structure, the Document window is capable of displaying
drawings together with summarising tables and other user-specified information.
Example of Document window
The Document window in the picture shows fragments of tables of cross-sections and beams defined in
the structure.
486
SCIA.ESA PT
).
Project
Libraries
Sets
From this group, load groups, load cases, etc. can be added to the
document.
Structure
Load
487
SCIA.ESA PT
Results
Steel
Concrete
Special
Default components
Text line
Inserts a text line into the document. The user may then type the
required text information.
External image
file
Page break
Table of contents
Chapter
Libraries
Group Libraries offers tables of various components of the model. Only those components that have
been defined in the current project are offered in the list.
Usually the following model components are available: layers, materials, cross-sections, user coordinate systems, etc.
Sets
Group Sets offers tables of various sets defined within the model. Only those sets that have been
defined in the current project are offered in the list.
Usually the following sets are available: load cases, load groups, load case combinations, etc.
Structure
Group Structure offers tables of various components of the model. Only those components that have
been defined in the current project are offered in the list.
Usually the following model components are available: nodes, beams, supports, etc.
Load
Group Loads offers tables of loads defined in the model. Only those loads that have been defined in the
current project are offered in the list.
An alternative procedure for the insertion of a new section into the document
1. At the bottom of the document tree window click button [New].
2. Select the required group and item.
3. Using a standard Windows Drag&Drop feature, move the selected item into the document tree.
4. Close the New document item dialogue.
488
SCIA.ESA PT
Example of New document item dialogue
The picture below shows the New document item dialogue. The items offered in the dialogue varies
according to the current document. E.g. if no predefined loads are defined in the project, they are not
offered in this dialogue.
The procedure for the insertion of a table into document from the graphical window
1. Display the entities for which you want to insert a table into the document.
2. Select the required entities.
3. Call function Table to document:
a. either using menu function File > Print data > Table to document,
b. or using button [Print] (
) on toolbar Project.
4. A new table for the selected entities is inserted into the document.
489
SCIA.ESA PT
Examples
Assume the following simple planar structure:
It is subject to:
self weight,
line load acting on the top beams and defined by projection (displayed in the picture),
point load in selected nodes defined in a separate load case (not displayed in the picture),
Example 1
No service is opened. All entities are selected. Function Table to document is called.
The program inserts all available information into the document. A dialogue is displayed on the screen
where the user may rename individual sections (tables).
490
SCIA.ESA PT
Example 2
No service is opened. Line loads are selected. Two nodes are selected. Function Table to document is
called.
The program inserts available information for the selected entities into the document. A dialogue is
displayed on the screen where the user may rename individual sections (tables).
491
SCIA.ESA PT
Example 3
Service Load is opened. Filter is set to Filter for service. All entities are selected. Function Table to
document is called.
The program selects automatically all entities that the service Load may deal with, i.e. all nodes, beams,
and loads. Tables for all these entities are included into the document.
Example 4
Service Load is opened. Filter is set to Filter for tree. The focus is on tree menu item Point moment
on beam. All entities are selected. Function Table to document is called.
The program selects automatically all point moments on beam. Tables for all these entities are included
into the document.
492
SCIA.ESA PT
Example 5
The structure is already calculated. Service Results is opened. Function Internal forces is focused.
When function Table to document is called, the following table is included into the document.
The procedure for the insertion of a picture from the graphical window into document
1. Display the entities for which you want to insert a table into the document.
2. Adjust the required view and view parameters.
493
SCIA.ESA PT
3. Call function Picture to document:
a. either using menu function File > Print picture > Picture to document,
b. or using button [Print picture] (
) on toolbar Project,
Note: Also pictures may be encapsulated the same way as tables. Thus e.g. a set of pictures
showing diagrams of internal forces for individual load cases may be easily created. Just encapsulate a
drawing of internal forces into document item Load cases.
494
SCIA.ESA PT
Standard arrangement
495
SCIA.ESA PT
Lets assume that three tables are included into the document:
load cases,
line load,
point load.
If the tables are inserted in a standard way, the document tree looks like:
Encapsulated arrangement
Lets assume that the user want the data sorted in the following way:
information about the first load case,
loads acting in the first load case,
information about the second load case,
loads acting in the second load case,
etc.
The Document of SCIA.ESA PT provides even for this sophisticated arrangement of information in the
document.
496
SCIA.ESA PT
The document tree then looks like:
497
SCIA.ESA PT
Filter
The filter specifies which entities are listed in the table. There are several options available. Each item
type may offer different Filter options.
All
List
The user defines a list of entities that are included into the table.
For this option a button [Edit] appears in the property window. It
opens a dialogue for selection of required entities.
Wildcard
Cross-section
Material
Layer
Used
Only entities used in the modelled structure are listed in the table.
Embedding of data
If an external file is inserted into the document, there are two possible solutions.
Embedded
Not embedded
498
SCIA.ESA PT
Filename
If an external file is inserted into the document, the file name must be specified and, if required, later
modified.
Type of loads
Here the user may select the set for which the results in the table should be printed.
Load cases
Load classes
Values
Parameter Values is used for results. It specifies which particular quantity should be listed in the table.
For example, in table of internal forces, the parameter Value tells the program which particular internal
force component will be present in the table (e.g. My, Mz, Mx).
Note: If only a single quantity is selected in the property window, the table contains all available
quantities. If parameter Value is set to More components then the table contains the selected quantities.
Example
The pictures below show (i) the property window with marked internal force components, and (ii) the
corresponding table in the document.
499
SCIA.ESA PT
Note: Meaning of other possible parameters is usually clear from the context they appear in. The
meaning may be also derived from the explanation of appropriate part of the program (e.g. parameters
of Results tables from chapter Results).
500
SCIA.ESA PT
5. Use it to make the required modifications.
Drawings in the document may be regenerated using the button Refresh of pictures (
).
Description
Embedded settings
501
SCIA.ESA PT
If OFF, the document uses the settings saved with the project.
Title page
Language
Style
Pictures alignment
Note: If you want to ensure that all the possible users who open the document from a particular
project on their local computers have the same layout of the document, always set option Embedded
settings to ON. Otherwise, it may happen that different users will get different layout of the document,
depending on their local settings.
502
SCIA.ESA PT
3. Click the cell with the node name.
4. Type the new node name.
5. Press [Enter] on your keyboard to confirm the change.
Note: Changes made in any of the document tables are immediately taken into account.
503
SCIA.ESA PT
Note: Changes made in any of the document tables are immediately taken into account.
).
).
).
Export formats
HTML
TXT
504
SCIA.ESA PT
pictures, and no embedded tables are exported.
RTF
Preview window
Introduction to preview window
The Preview window is a document-like window that can be used for:
tabular preview of selected entities,
tabular editing of the model.
Note: The philosophy and operation principles of the Preview window are identical with those for
the Document window. Therefore, the majority of instructions for use of the Document can be applied
to the Preview window as well.
) on toolbar Project.
3. The Preview window is opened and appropriate tables are displayed in it.
Note: If the Preview window has been already opened, its contents is replaced with the appropriate
new tables.
For more information about selection of entities for the display in the Preview window see chapter
Inserting a new section into document from the graphical window.
505
SCIA.ESA PT
Note 1: The layout, style and contents of tables in the Preview window can be adjusted by means of
table composer.
Note 2: The preview can be supplemented with a header and footer. The formatting of these
preview elements is identical with formatting in the document window.
Table composer
Table composer dialogue
The table composer is the dialogue that can be user to:
modify the composition of individual tables,
create new views (new table templates),
adjust the display style of tables,
set the format of individual table parts.
It is always called for a particular table, not for a general purpose.
The table composer dialogue consists of several parts.
List of defined views
506
This list contains all the views that may be selected for the
particular table.
SCIA.ESA PT
List of available
properties
This list contains all the properties (we can say items) that may be
included into the edited table.
The properties are divided into three thematically connected
groups: EPW properties, user defined properties, already defined
views.
Table
Layout
Column
Property
Button [Apply]
Button [Delete]
507
SCIA.ESA PT
Note: The table composer always knows for which table it has been opened. Therefore, it offers
only such properties in the List of available properties that are relevant for the appropriate table. It is
not, e.g., possible to define a view for table with cross-sections and later use the same view for table of
materials. Both the mentioned tables display different data and therefore they cannot share the same
table view.
508
SCIA.ESA PT
2. In the List of defined views, select the view you want to apply.
3. Click button [Use] next to the List of defined views.
4. Close the Table composer dialogue.
This list contains all the data items related to the edited table.
For example, in the case of cross-section table, the list will offer
sectional characteristics, dimensions, name, material, colour, and
other parameters of cross-section.
Defined views
This list contains all the already defined views related to the edited
table.
Any of the views can be inserted as a new column into the
currently modified view. Thus, encapsulated tables can be easily
created.
User properties
line break
continue line
picture
page number
Inserts the page number followed with the number of the last page.
user text
The procedure for adding of properties into the Properties in table window
1. Use Drag&Drop feature to drag required property from the Available properties to the Properties in
table window.
The procedure for deleting of properties from the Properties in table window
1. Use key [Del] to remove the required property from the Properties in table window.
509
SCIA.ESA PT
Examples
Lets assume a standard table of nodal points. By default the Properties in table window contains
properties:
Name
Coord X
Coord Y
Coord Z
And the table looks like:
510
SCIA.ESA PT
Line break
When the Line break property is inserted after the Coord X, the result will be:
The Properties in table window contains properties:
Name
Coord X
Line break
Coord Y
Coord Z
And the table will look like:
511
SCIA.ESA PT
Horizontal table
Now assume that the table is changed to a Horizontal table (on Table tab of the dialogue). The
Properties in table window contains again only the default properties:
Name
Coord X
Coord Y
Coord Z
The table will look like:
512
SCIA.ESA PT
Continue line
Finally, lets add two Line continue properties to the Properties in table window:
Name
Coord X
Line continue
Coord Y
Line continue
Coord Z
The final table will look like:
Caption
Automatic styles
513
SCIA.ESA PT
items.
Header style
Document template
The table is "stretched" to fit the page width. If the table is inserted
into a cell of another table, it is inflated to fit the cell.
Equalize widths
Show header
Internal table
Create explanation
Header style
Content style
Alignment
Column width
Picture size
No header
Non-inflatable
If the table is inflated to fit the page, this column keeps its width.
Generally, a line is removed from a table if all the cells of the line
are empty. In addition, if only cells corresponding to marked
columns (i.e. columns with this option ON) hold any information
and the other cells of the line are empty, the line is removed as
well.
Do not aggregate
caption at horizontal
tables
514
SCIA.ESA PT
Refresh of pictures
Whenever a document is opened, it is displayed in comprised form, i.e. with empty tables and only
headings shown. In order to see the full document, [Refresh of document] button must be used.
If any change is made to the contents of the document (e.g. a new table is added, some of the existing
tables is removed, etc.) [Refresh of document] button must be used as well in order to regenerate the
document.
If a change is made to the model and this change results in a modification of drawings already inserted
in the document, [Refresh of picture] button must be used in order to regenerate the pictures.
515
SCIA.ESA PT
This document will show internal forces in beams for individual load cases sorted by the load cases.
Once the document is created in the above mentioned way, the document window will show the
"contents" of the document, but not the numerical values.
Once button [Refresh of document] ( ) is pressed, the document is regenerated and the individual
tables are filled in with appropriate numerical data.
516
SCIA.ESA PT
517
SCIA.ESA PT
Advanced tools
Introduction to advanced tools
SCIA.ESA PT is equipped with a wide range of functions and tools. Some of them are essential for the
use of program. Others, however, have been designed not to enable the user to perform basic tasks, but
to carry them out with enhanced efficiency.
Tools that are necessary for even standard and simple operations are described in chapter Basic working
tolls.
This chapter presents advanced tools that the user can do without but which, when mastered, can
considerably facilitate and speed up his/her work.
Clipping box
Introduction to clipping box
Clipping box is a very powerful tool that facilitates manipulation mainly with excessive structures. The
Clipping box defines an area (3D-area) that is visible on the screen. The rest of the structure located
behind the given area is temporarily hidden from the users view.
The procedure for attaching the clipping box to the working plane
1. On toolbar View click button [Clipping box for active view] (
workplane.
The procedure for adjusting the clipping box around selected entities
1. On toolbar View click button [Clipping box for active view] (
entity.
518
SCIA.ESA PT
2. The clipping box is adjusted accordingly.
The procedure for adjusting the clipping box around the whole model
1. On toolbar View click button [Clipping box for active view] (
entities.
519
SCIA.ESA PT
view with clipping
box ON after being
zoomed in
Note 1: If the clipping box was not displayed before the setup dialogue was invoked, the clipping
box is switched ON on confirming the settings with [OK] button.
Note 2: If the clipping box is ON and has been defined around the current working plane, the
setting dialogue looks different and allows the user to specify the depth around the working plane.
520
SCIA.ESA PT
11. Press [Esc] key to close the adjustment function.
The alternative procedure for mouse controlled adjustment of the clipping box
1. On toolbar View click button [Clipping box for active view] (
2. The clipping box is turned ON and swapped into the editing mode.
3. Follow the procedure described above.
4. Confirm with button [OK].
Note: If the clipping box was not displayed before the graphical dialogue was invoked, the clipping
box is switched ON before enabling the adjusting.
3. Define the new origin (i.e. the centre) of the clipping box.
4. The clipping box is moved accordingly.
Parametric input
Introduction to parametric input
The parametric input enables the user to define some of structure properties as parameters. Thus, for
example, the geometry may be defined by means of parameters, loads can be defined as parameters, etc.
The parameter are fully editable and when changed they may lead to a very straightforward
modification of the calculated model.
Whats more, a model defined by means of parameters can be saved as a template. When opened, the
user is first asked to fill in the table with all the parameters present in the model. This may be
effectively used for creation of simple "programs" for e.g. calculation of continuous beam, simple
frame, etc.
The user has to create the structure only once. Then he/she has to define the parameters and save the
structure as template. In the future, he/she just fills in the table with a few parameters and can
immediately proceed to calculation and evaluation of results.
521
SCIA.ESA PT
using menu function Tools > Parameters,
using tree menu function Tools > Parameters.
Parameter types
Nothing
Integer
Coefficient
Length
Force
Moment
Line load
Surface load
Mass
Line mass
Surface mass
522
SCIA.ESA PT
Cross-section
length
Angle
Relative
Cross-section
rolled
Value types
Value
Formula
Formula
Formula may consist of several values, parameters, functions and operands.
+
()
sin(x)
cos(x)
tan(x)
tg(x)
arcsin(x)
asin(x)
arccos(x)
acos(x)
arctan(x)
arctg(x)
atan(x)
atg(x)
ln(x)
log(x)
Calculates log10(x).
exp(x)
sign(x)
sgn(x)
sqrt(x)
Examples
formula
result
3*5+5
20
3*(5+5)
30
sin(90)
10*cos(45)
7.07
3^3
27
523
SCIA.ESA PT
log(10)
ln(2.718281828)
) is displayed next to
5. If the property really can be parameterised, the list contains item Insert value and a list of available
parameters for this particular entity.
6. Select the required parameter.
7. Confirm with key [Enter].
8. The Property window now shows the name of the parameter instead of concrete numerical value.
524
SCIA.ESA PT
From now on, if the parameter value is modified in the Parameters manager, the model of the
structure changes accordingly. If one parameter is used for several model entities, or if some parameters
are defined with formulas, it may happen that a change of value of a single parameter leads to an
extensive change of the model.
If well prepared, parameters may be very effectively used for (i) analysis of project where several
variants must be prepared, (ii) analysis of project where some level of optimisation is necessary, (iii)
presentation and teaching purposes to show what the effect of a small change may be, etc.
If the arch is only partially under the water level, the calculated load is shown in the figure below:
525
SCIA.ESA PT
526
SCIA.ESA PT
Description
Available
parameters
The window lists all defined parameters that has not been included into
any of existing parameter sets.
Selected
parameters
This list contains the parameters inserted into the current parameter set.
527
SCIA.ESA PT
Control buttons
This button enables the user to import an explanatory picture that will be
saved together with the set.
Note: Each parameter can be inserted into one parameter set only.
528
SCIA.ESA PT
The project is opened and the template structure is automatically generated on the basis of defined
parameters. Now, the project may be just calculated and results evaluated. On the other hand, if
required, any modifications may be made to the project and the final structure may be far from the
original template. Everything depends on particular needs of the user.
529
SCIA.ESA PT
LC 2
LC 3
LC 4
530
Parameter
Type
Value
span 1
Length
span 2
Length
12
span 3
Length
18
load total
Line load
-1000
SCIA.ESA PT
load outer beg
Line load
-1000
Line load
-1000
Line load
-1000
Line load
-1000
Lets close the Parameters manager and select the end node of the first span.
In the Property window lets select item GCS coordinates > Coord X and change its content to "span
1" (Using the little down-arrow button).
Similarly, lets change the X co-ordinates of end nodes for the second and third span. Lets change their
values to "span 2" and "span 3" respectively.
Now, lets adjust the second load case to be displayed in the window. Select all the loads and lets focus
on the Property window again. Lets change the load value to parameter "load total".
531
SCIA.ESA PT
Further, lets adjust the third load case to be displayed in the window. Select all the loads and lets focus
on the Property window again. First lets change the Distribution to Trapez. Then, lets change the
load value 1 and value 2 to parameters "load outer beg" and "load outer end" respectively.
Similarly, lets make the same change with the load in the last load case. Here, lets use the parameters
"load inner beg" and "load inner beg".
Next step: Arranging the parameters into sets
Second set:
532
SCIA.ESA PT
Then, lets prepare a picture to accompany the first set. Lets close the manager and adjust, lets say, a
standard AXO view in the graphical window. Use function File > Print picture > Export picture to
save the drawing into an external BMP file.
Lets open the Parameter sets manager again and open for editing the Geometry set. Using button
[Select picture] lets browse the saved file.
At this moment weve prepared the project to be saved as parameterise template.
Next step: Saving the project as template
533
SCIA.ESA PT
Select template "My beam".
Open it.
Go through individual tabs and fill in the parameters.
534
SCIA.ESA PT
Note: Please note that the second tab Loads does not show any picture. Remember that no
picture has been defined for this parameters set in our example.
Once the parameters have been defined (notice that only eight numbers had to be inserted), the project
is opened and a new three-span continuous beam is automatically created in front of you.
The result for individual load cases will be:
LC 2
535
SCIA.ESA PT
LC 3
LC 4
Project templates
Introduction to templates
In practice it may quite often happen that some elements are used in every project. For example,
material types, cross-sections, predefined loads, and even parts of a structure may be the same in
various projects. Therefore, it would be efficient, if the user could store the repetitious elements aside
and load them quickly into every new project.
In SCIA.ESA PT this may be achieved via templates. Generally speaking, a template is an ordinary
project that holds required information and is saved in a special way.
Template manager
Template manager provides for any possible manipulation with already created templates. It consists of
the following control elements.
Tree-structured list of
existing templates
The left-hand side window lists all the available templates and
template groups.
Property of a selected
template
Control buttons
536
SCIA.ESA PT
Info
Load image
Edit image
Control buttons
New group
This button creates a new group in the right-hand side window. The newly created group must be then
"saved" by means of Insert button.
Copy
This button copies the information about the template selected in the left-hand side window to the
property table in the right-hand side window.
Export
This button saves the template to an external file.
Import
This button reads a template from an external file.
Note: The name of the imported template may be altered (by appending a number after the
name) if a template of the same name already exists among the templates.
Delete
This button deletes the selected template or group.
Note: There is no warning about the action and the removal is carried out immediately.
Insert
This button inserts a template or a group whose properties are stated in the right-hand side window into
the appropriate position in the left-hand side window.
Rewrite
This button puts a template or a group whose properties are stated in the right-hand side window into
the appropriate position in the left-hand side window. The currently selected item in the left-hand side
window is overwritten with the new item.
OK
This button confirms the changes in the template structure and closes the manager.
Cancel
This button discards all the changes in the template structure made from the last opening of the template
manager and closes the dialogue.
Tip: A few examples of possible operations made with templates are given in a separate
chapter.
537
SCIA.ESA PT
Creating a template
The procedure for creation of a new template
1. Create a new project or open an existing one.
2. Define all the properties and even parts of a structure that should be included in the template. If an
already existing project is used, make any changes that are necessary.
3. When you are satisfied with the result and you think that the current state of the project is what should
become the template, save it As Template using menu function File > Save As Template.
4. A New project Template dialogue is opened on the screen.
5. In the left hand side window, select the group (if there are more than one) the template should be saved
into.
6. In the right hand side window fill in the table:
a. type the template name,
b. type a short template description,
c. if required, either browse for a image or create a simple icon.
7. Press [OK] to complete the action.
Note: The template is ALWAYS saved to the folder specified in the Directories settings dialogue.
Opening a template
The opening of a template is similar to the creation of a new empty project.
Note: It is clear that the template must have been created and saved before it may be opened.
538
SCIA.ESA PT
1. In the left-hand side window, select the template to be moved.
2. Press button [Copy] to copy the template properties from the left-hand side window to the right-hand
side window.
3. Press button [Delete] to delete the template from the left-hand side window.
4. In the left-hand side window, select the required new target group for the template.
5. Press button [Insert] to store the template from the right-hand side window to the selected group in the
left-hand side window.
Note: The name of the imported template may be altered (by appending a number after the name) if
a template of the same name already exists among the templates.
Note: There is no warning about the action and the removal is carried out immediately.
Note: All the given examples MUST BE followed by closing the Template Manager via button [OK]
in order to confirm (and not to discard) the changes.
Design of connections
Frame connections
A special module enables the used to perform the design of steel frame connections.
Description of this module is given in a separate volume Module: Connections.
539
SCIA.ESA PT
Code checks
Code checks of steel structures
A special module enables the used to perform checking of steel structures to individual national
technical standards.
Description of this module is given in a separate volume Module: Steel code checks.
540
SCIA.ESA PT
Predefined load
Introduction to predefined loads
Predefined load represent a useful feature if the load that the analysed structure is subject to can be
evaluated from the composition of e.g. floor, or other layered construction. The real load is then defined
by:
selection of appropriate predefined load set and
specification of loading width or area.
541
SCIA.ESA PT
9. Close the manager.
Note: If the manager is opened for the first time and no predefined load has been defined so far,
step 2 to 5 may be automatically skipped.
The user just has to type the appropriate parameters for individual layers.
Name
Height
Unit load
The dialogue automatically calculates the total weight of one square metre of the predefined load.
The set can be then later used in the definition of line or point load together with specified loading
width or area respectively.
542
SCIA.ESA PT
On-screen drawing
The adjustment may be made by means of appropriate View parameters. The tab Labels and
descriptions contains groups Loads:
Display label
Name
Value
Total value
Note: Items Value and Total value are significant for loads that are not defined directly by its
force or moment impulse, but that were defined by means of a wind generator, load generator, or as a
predefined load. For such loads, SCIA ESA PT can display two different types of data. First, the input
value (e.g. width load) can be shown, i.e. the value. Second, the calculated load per meter of length can
be displayed (i.e. the total value).
Property dialogue
The property dialogue gives enough space for additional information, and thus the input load width and
calculated load intensity are shown see value P.
Because the intensity is calculated from the input acting width, it is not editable.
543
SCIA.ESA PT
Preview window
The preview window displays all the available information concerning the defined load.
The calculated load intensity is shown in column marked P. The input acting width is given in column
marked W.
Calculation
It is obvious that the calculation uses the pre-calculated load intensity as the factually applied load.
Sign convention
However strange it may seem on the first view, the sign convention used for predefined load is based on
the same logic as for other load types.
Positive load acts in the direction of the appropriate axis.
Negative load acts against the direction of the appropriate axis.
What may seem strange is that the downward-oriented load (the weight of the predefined load
"sandwich") must be defined as negative in order to really act "downwards". The strangeness is in the
fact that acting width is input and it may seem unusual to specify a negative dimension. On the other
hand, imagine a drawing showing loads of several types. With the convention applied, all the loads
acting in the same direction will be of the same sign regardless of the type.
Absences
Introduction to absences
In practice, it may happen that selected parts of a structure are not always acting. It may happen, for
example, that a fresh concrete beams are not capable of transferring any load. Or it is possible that some
bracing steel diagonals are missing at an early stage of construction. And the list of similar examples
may be even longer.
544
SCIA.ESA PT
The question raised here is: how could the engineer take account of this?
SCIA.ESA PT brings solution in the form of Absences. Absence means that a certain part of a model is
missing (or absenting) in a certain load case.
Note: The first and second points are in fact joined in a single step of the absence-definition
procedure.
Absence groups
Absenting members are grouped together in groups called Absence groups.
The management of these groups can be performed in the Absence group manager. This manager is
one of many SCIA.ESA PT database managers.
The manager provides for all standard operations with database data: (i) creation of a new group, (ii)
editing of a group, (iii) activation of a selected group (i.e. displaying of the group), (iv) removal if a
group, etc.
545
SCIA.ESA PT
2. Select service Absences and open it.
3. At the top of the service, select Absences group which you want to define the new absences into. If
required, a new group may be created.
4. Select function Beam and start it.
5. Type the name of the new absence.
6. Confirm it with [OK].
7. Select beam or beams where the absences should be defined.
8. Close the function.
9. If required, repeat steps 4 to 8.
10. Close the service.
Note 1: If no absence group has been defined prior to the definition of a new absence, step 4
of the above stated procedure is preceded by opening of the Absences group manager. There, the
user may define required Absences group or groups.
Note 2: Be aware of that the display of absences in controlled by means of special absences-related
view parameters.
Note 3: Absences groups are an analogy to load cases. Also the principle of dealing with these two
"concepts" in SCIA.ESA PT environment is similar. For example, only ONE absences group can be
displayed at a time.
Absence on a beam
An absence on a beam has the following parameters:
Name
Group
Note: Parameter Group can be adjusted either (i) in combo box placed at the top of Absences
service, or (ii) afterwards during editing of an existing absence in the Property window.
546
SCIA.ESA PT
Absences in a support
An absence in a support has the following parameters:
Name
Group
Note: Parameter Group can be adjusted either (i) in combo box placed at the top of Absences
service, or (ii) afterwards during editing of an existing absence in the Property window.
The procedure for association of a defined Absence group with a certain Load case
1. Open Load case manager.
2. Select the load case where the absences should be taken into account.
3. Set parameter Absences to required value, i.e. select from the given list of existing Absence groups the
group that should be associated with the given load case.
4. Close the Load case manager.
547
SCIA.ESA PT
2. Select service Absences and open it.
3. At the top of the service, select Absences group that you want to be displayed.
4. Close the service.
The procedure to select absence group for display in View parameters dialogue
1. With the mouse cursor positioned inside the graphical window, click the right mouse button to invoke
the windows pop-up menu.
2. Select function Set view parameters.
3. The View parameters dialogue is opened on the screen.
4. In group Absences select the required Absences group.
5. Close the dialogue.
Note: Absences are normally displayed ONLY if service Absences is open. Otherwise, absences are
hidden by default. It can be however changed on users request in dialogue View parameter settings
where permanent display of absences may be adjusted by ticking the appropriate option.
Note: If the Absence group parameter is changed (i.e. the edited group is put into a different
group), the edited Absence disappears from the screen, as only one group is displayed at a time.
Initial deformations
Introduction to initial deformations
The initial deformation may be used in non-linear calculation to define the shape of the structure at the
beginning of the analysis. Thus a state of initial imperfection in shape can be easily modelled.
548
SCIA.ESA PT
Initial-deformation manager
The initial deformation curves can be defined and edited in the Initial-deformation manager. This
manager is one the SCIA.ESA PT numerous database managers. Its operation and layout are analogous
to other database managers.
In the Initial-deformation manager the user may:
define a new initial deformation curve,
edit an existing initial deformation curve,
copy an existing initial deformation curve,
delete an existing initial deformation curve,
save the existing initial deformation curve to an external file.
The Initial-deformation manager can be opened in two ways:
using tree menu function Libraries > Initial deformations,
using menu function Libraries > Initial deformations.
The user just has to type pairs of corresponding values for position and deformation. Next to the table
the curve is displayed with the position on the vertical axis and deformation on the horizontal axis.
The curve can be then later assigned to required direction in the definition of a non-linear combination.
549
SCIA.ESA PT
Beam nonlinearity
Defining a new beam nonlinearity
Procedure to define a new beam subject to local nonlinearity
1. Input the beam in a standard way.
2. Open service Structure.
3. Start function Beam nonlinearity.
4. Select the required type of non-linearity.
5. If required, input additional parameters.
6. Confirm with [OK].
7. Select the beam / beams that should be subject to this kind of nonlinearity.
8. Close the function.
9. Close the service.
550
SCIA.ESA PT
Types of nonlinearity
Tension only
Tension-only beams (i.e. beams not able to bear any compression) show behaviour to the following
stress-strain diagram:
When inserted into the model, such a beam is marked with the following symbol (remember that in
order to see the symbol, view parameters must be adjusted to show model data).
Note: The accuracy of the calculation may be affected by parameter Maximum iterations from
dialogue Solver Setup.
Press only
Press-only beams (i.e. beams not able to bear any tension) show behaviour to the following stress-strain
diagram:
551
SCIA.ESA PT
When inserted into the model, such a beam is marked with the following symbol (remember that in
order to see the symbol, view parameters must be adjusted to show model data).
Limit force
This feature may be useful if a beam is capable of bearing tension (or compression) stress up to a
certain limit. The limit is specified by the limit value of axial force input in its absolute value. When the
limit value is reached, two types of behaviour may occur: (i) the beam loses its stability and its bearing
capacity drops to zero, or (ii) plastic behaviour get into action.
The following stress-strain diagrams demonstrate available options:
Limit compression force
combined with loss of
stability
552
SCIA.ESA PT
Limit tension force
combined with loss of
stability
When inserted into the model, a beam with this type of nonlinearity is marked by the following symbol
(remember that in order to see the symbol, view parameters must be adjusted to show model data).
Parameters
Direction
Type
Buckling: If the limit force is reached, the beam loses its stability
and bears no load at all.
Plastic yielding: If the limit force is reached, the beam follows the
plastic stress-strain diagram.
Marginal force
Gap
There are various connection and support conditions used in a real structure. It may happen that a beam
is not attached rigidly to the structure but "starts its action" only after some initial change of its length.
The behaviour of such a beam is defined by the absolute value of the initial "slip". The beam then starts
to bear the load only after its elongation or shortening reaches the input value. There are three options
available:
553
SCIA.ESA PT
no tension
Modelling e.g. the instant
when a beam bears against
a support.
no compression
Modelling e.g. a free rope.
The algorithm applied has been designed for large structures. All beams are tested and processed
simultaneously in every iteration step. The procedure is iterative and converges to the accurate solution.
Beams inserted into the model may be again eliminated in a next step if their deformation gets under the
input value if initial displacement ("slip"). The convergence speed is high and does not depend on the
number of beams. Eight to ten iteration steps should be sufficient for an arbitrary structure.
When inserted into the model, a beam with this type of nonlinearity is marked by the following symbol
(remember that in order to see the symbol, view parameters must be adjusted to show model data).
554
SCIA.ESA PT
Parameters
Type
One of three types can be selected: (i) press only, (ii) tension only,
(iii) both directions. See the diagrams above.
Displacement
Specifies the value of the initial "slip" before the beam becomes
active.
Position
Initial stress
In slender structures the axial force in a beam may have a big effect on the stiffness of the overall
structure and the stiffness of its parts. In general, tensile force increases the stiffness and compression
force reduces the stiffness of the structure.
It is possible to define initial pre-stressing forces in individual beams. These forces are considered
constant along the whole beam.
The effect of initial pre-stressing can be taken into account in ALL or NONE nonlinear combination. In
addition, also buckling calculation and dynamic free vibration analysis may take account of initial prestressing.
When inserted into the model, a beam with this type of nonlinearity is marked by the following symbol
(remember that in order to see the symbol, view parameters must be adjusted to show model data).
Parameters
Normal force
Cable
Two cable elements can be modelled: (i) straight cable (pre-stressed element) and (ii) slack cable.
Straight cables
Only the pre-stressing force must be input for a straight cable.
Note: Proper settings must be made in Project Setup dialogue, Functionality tab. Options
Initial stress, Nonlinearity, Beam local nonlinearity and 2nd order calculation must be selected.
Slack cables
In addition to pre-stressing force, additional parameter must be defined for slack cable. The cable is
subject to additional load: either (i) self-weight load, or (ii) a general load acting under the given angle
and having identical orientation as the local rotation axis fix of the beam. These parameters are used to
determine the slack of the cable in a particular direction. All calculations are carried out on the
"deformed" structure. That means that the final deformation of a cable is calculated from this "slack"
shape and not from the ideal straight shape of beam.
555
SCIA.ESA PT
Note: Proper settings must be made in Project Setup dialogue, Functionality tab. Options
Initial stress, Nonlinearity, and 2nd order calculation must be selected. Option Beam local
nonlinearity does not have be ON; it would lead to unnecessary lengthening of calculation.
Note: ONLY Newton-Raphson method can be used for this type of analysis. Timoshenko method
MUST NOT be applied for analysis of slack cables.
When inserted into the model, a beam with this type of nonlinearity is marked by the following symbol
(remember that in order to see the symbol, view parameters must be adjusted to show model data).
Parameters
Straight
If ON, the beam is without any slack. Only the initial pre-stressing
is then considered.
Self-weight
Normal force
Pn
Alpha x
Plastic hinges
Introduction to plastic hinges
If a normal linear calculation is performed and limit stress is achieved in any part of the structure, the
dimension of critical elements must be increased. If however, plastic hinges are taken into account, the
achievement of limit stress causes that plastic hinges are inserted into appropriate joints and the
calculation can continue with another iteration step. The stress is redistributed to other parts of the
structure and better utilisation of overall load bearing capacity of the structure is obtained.
On the other hand, there is a risk in this approach. If a hinge is added to the structure, its statical
indeterminateness is reduced. If other hinges are added, it may happen that the structure becomes a
mechanism. This would lead to a collapse of the structure and the calculation is stopped.
Plastic hinges can be thus used to calculate the plastic reliability margin of the structure. The applied
load can be increased little by little (e.g. by increasing the load case coefficients in load case
combination) until the structure collapses. This approach can be used to determine the maximum load
multiple that the structure can sustain.
Plastic hinges are considered only at ends of individual beams. No selection of beams is made for the
calculation with plastic hinges. If this type of calculation is selected, all beams in the structure are tested
.
The calculation is similar to the calculation of beams with gaps. All beams in the structure are tested
and if the limit stress is reached, the plastic hinge is inserted. If however the stress lowers in the next
iteration step, the plastic hinge may be removed.
Approaches described in EC3, DIN 18800 and NEN codes are implemented in SCIA.ESA PT.
556
SCIA.ESA PT
Axial load
V =<0.5 V_
V>0.5 V_
yy
Mpl,y,Rd
Mpl,y,Rd (1-)
yy
zz
Mpl,z,Rd
Mpl,z,Rd (1-)
zz
Mpl,z,Rd 1.56 .
Mpl,z,Rd 1.56 .
. (1-n)(n+0.6)
. (1-n-)(0.6+n/(1-))
where:
NSd / NRd
Nsd
axial force
VSd
shear force
Mpl,y,Rd
Mpl,z,Rd
VRd
NRd
Axial load
V =<0.33 V_
V>0.33 V_
yy
N =<0.10 Npl,d
Mpl,y,d
Mpl,y,d (1.136-0.42)
yy
N >0.10 Npl,d
Axis
Axial load
V =<0.25 V_
V>0.25 V_
zz
N =<0.30 Npl,d
Mpl,z,d
zz
N >0.30 Npl,d
where:
V / Vpl,d
N / Npl,d
axial force
shear force
Mpl,y,d
Mpl,z,d
Vpl,d
Npl,d
557
SCIA.ESA PT
Condition
yy
n / 0.18 + <= 1
Mpl,y,d
yy
a <=0.18
Mpl,y,d
yy
a >0.18
yy
<=0.3
Mpl,y,d
yy
>0.3
Mpl,y,d (1.1-0.3 n)
zz
n <=0.36
Mpl,z,d
zz
n >0.36
zz
<=0.3
Mpl,z,d
zz
>0.3
Mpl,z,d (1.1-0.3 n)
Condition
yy
n / 0.10 + <= 1
Mpl,y,d
yy
n <=0.10
Mpl,y,d
yy
n >0.10
yy
<=0.3
Mpl,y,d
yy
>0.3
Mpl,y,d (1.1-0.3 n)
zz
n <=0.20
Mpl,z,d
zz
n >0.20
zz
<=0.3
Mpl,z,d
zz
>0.3
Mpl,z,d (1.1-0.3 n)
where:
V / Vpl,d
N / Npl,d
axial force
shear force
Mpl,y,d
Mpl,z,d
Vpl,d
Npl,d
558
SCIA.ESA PT
define non-linear load case combination / combinations,
have linear calculation of the structure successfully completed,
start nonlinear calculation and obtain successful solution.
559
SCIA.ESA PT
Glossary
Additional-data entity
An additional-data entity is an entity that does not directly defines the shape of a structure being
modelled. It either defines some additional properties of the structure (e.g. haunches on beams,
supports, etc.) or applies effects of phenomena having influence on the behaviour of the structure (e.g.
load).
Clipping box
Clipping box is a tool that controls what part of a model is visible on the screen. The clipping box is in
fact an imaginary rectangular prism. Parts of the model located inside the clipping box are displayed.
Parts located outside the box are not displayed.
Document
The document is a special part of SCIA.ESA PT. It uses its own user interface that provides for easy
and straightforward creation of output documents and reports describing the analysed structure, the
input values and results.
560
SCIA.ESA PT
Geometric entity
An entity that defines the shape of a structure that is being modelled. A geometric entity may be subject
to effect of additional-data entities; for example, it may be subject to some load, its surface may be
altered by a haunch, etc.
Influence line
A line drawn to show how some quantity varies as unit load crosses e.g. a bridge.
For example, the influence line for say the left-hand reaction of a beam would be a triangle, of unit
height at the left-hand end, decreasing to zero at the right-hand end. This would show that as unit load
crossed the span the left-hand reaction would fall away to nothing when the load reached the right-hand
abutment.
Layer
A logical grouping of data that is like a transparent acetate overlay (slide) on a drawing. You can view
layers individually or in combination.
Manager
In SCIA.ESA PT the word manager is normally a part of a compound name denoting sophisticated
tools providing for maintenance of various databases. For example, the Cross-section manager allows
the user to perform available actions and operations with cross-sections, the Material manager provides
for maintenance of the database of materials in the current project, etc.
Node
In the context of the finite element method, a node is a point within a structure to which elements that
make up the structure are connected and at which "compatibility" relations are enforced. The
"compatibility" conditions include both equilibrium and kinematic compatibility.
Sometimes, little less formal definition of a node may be given.
If it has been possible to determine certain parts of a structure which have specific tasks (i.e. carrying shear stress,
direct stress, bending stress, etc.), these elements must be connected to each other. This connection in the real
structure is accomplished by riveting, welding or some type of adhesive bonding. In the finite element idealization of
the structure, this connection to other parts of the structure takes place at a finite number of points on each element
and these points are called node points. A finite element will have anywhere from 2 to n node points, depending upon
the type of element, its' characteristics and the role it plays within the structure.
Picture gallery
The Picture gallery is a collection of scanned program-screens and manually created drawings. The
pictures may be printed directly or further processed in other SCIA.ESA PTs graphical output tools.
Preview
The preview window is a document-based window used to display various information about particular
project parts or elements. It may be invoked from within various program functions. E.g. the preview
561
SCIA.ESA PT
window may be activated from within the cross-section manager to display characteristics of a crosssection in a document-like style.
Property table
A property table is a control element used in SCIA.ESA PT dialogues that both (i) presents information
in tabular form and (ii) provides for straightforward editing of the displayed data.
Snap mode
A mode for locking a pointing device (mouse cursor) into alignment with an invisible rectangular grid.
When Snap mode is on, the screen crosshairs and all input coordinates are snapped to the nearest point
on the grid. The snap resolution defines the spacing of this grid. In SCIA.ESA PT this term covers also
the feature called Object Snap Mode. The Object Snap Mode is a method for selecting commonly
needed points on an object while you create or edit a model.
Solver
Solver is an integral part of SCIA.ESA PT that performs the numerical solution of the problem. As
SCIA.ESA PT is based on the finite element method, a set of equations describing the model, its
boundary conditions and loads must be assembled and solved. This particular task is carried out in the
program part called Solver.
View
A graphical representation of a model from a specific location (viewpoint) in space.
Wheel button
A wheel-like button located at the edge of a window. When the mouse cursor is positioned over it, the
left mouse button pressed and the mouse dragged, the view direction or zoom ratio changes
accordingly.
562
SCIA.ESA PT
Index
A
Absence .................................................................................................................544, 545, 546, 547, 548
Action buttons............................................................................................................................65, 66, 432
Activity ..........................................................................................................................103, 104, 105, 472
Additional data..43, 85, 135, 164, 251, 278, 280, 282, 286, 287, 288, 289, 290, 291, 293, 294, 297, 298,
299, 300, 301, 302, 306, 307, 308, 309, 310, 311, 323, 324, 325, 326, 327, 328, 329, 330, 333, 334, 335,
336, 339, 348, 350, 351, 502, 506, 550, 551, 552, 555, 557, 595
Beam nonlinearity............................................................................................550, 551, 552, 555, 557
Editing the additional data ...............................................................................................................297
Load 300, 301, 302, 303, 304, 306, 307, 308, 309, 310, 311, 323, 324, 325, 326, 327, 328, 329, 330,
331, 333, 334, 335, 336, 337, 339, 340, 348, 349, 350, 351
Advanced tools .....517, 518, 519, 520, 524, 536, 537, 538, 539, 540, 541, 565, 566, 567, 569, 570, 571,
572, 573, 574, 575, 576, 577, 578, 579, 580, 581, 582, 583, 584, 585, 586, 587, 588, 589, 590, 591
Arc .........................................................117, 214, 215, 216, 248, 259, 265, 266, 267, 268, 269, 474, 475
B
Beams .....37, 43, 45, 46, 54, 55, 57, 63, 64, 71, 73, 74, 79, 80, 84, 85, 87, 93, 96, 97, 98, 100, 103, 107,
110, 116, 117, 118, 126, 134, 135, 138, 140, 146, 155, 157, 161, 170, 199, 200, 201, 202, 203, 204, 206,
207, 208, 212, 214, 216, 231, 235, 243, 244, 245, 246, 248, 249, 251, 253, 254, 255, 256, 257, 258, 259,
260, 261, 262, 263, 264, 265, 266, 267, 268, 269, 270, 271, 272, 273, 274, 275, 276, 277, 278, 280, 285,
289, 293, 294, 298, 301, 302, 306, 307, 308, 310, 311, 321, 324, 325, 326, 348, 349, 388, 389, 390, 392,
393, 395, 399, 402, 407, 408, 412, 413, 422, 464, 466, 478, 481, 486, 488, 490, 491, 502, 520, 528, 534,
550, 562, 563, 565, 566, 567, 569, 570, 571, 575, 577, 578, 579, 580, 591
Beam with variable cross-section ............................................................................................212, 216
Column ....................................................................................................................................207, 208
Common parameters ........................................................................................................204, 206, 256
Connecting beams............................................................................................269, 270, 271, 272, 273
Curved beams ..........................................................................................214, 265, 266, 267, 268, 269
Disconnecting beams .......................................................................................................269, 272, 273
Editing shape ...................................257, 258, 259, 260, 261, 262, 263, 264, 265, 266, 267, 268, 269
Editing the properties...............................................................................................................255, 256
General beam ...........................................................................................................................206, 214
Haunch beam ...........................................................................................................................208, 216
Horizontal beam...............................................................................................................................208
Bezier.....................................................................................................214, 259, 267, 268, 269, 474, 475
Break..........................................................................................55, 74, 262, 263, 481, 488, 495, 508, 509
C
CAD model....................................................................................135, 138, 273, 274, 275, 276, 277, 562
Calculation....37, 43, 62, 74, 80, 81, 84, 91, 134, 137, 138, 139, 140, 142, 146, 147, 148, 149, 150, 199,
203, 204, 206, 243, 255, 256, 273, 274, 275, 277, 278, 291, 329, 330, 336, 348, 349, 350, 392, 394, 396,
397, 398, 399, 400, 401, 402, 403, 404, 405, 406, 407, 421, 422, 442, 520, 541, 544, 545, 547, 548, 550,
562, 591
Absence ...................................................................................................................544, 545, 547, 548
Catalogue blocks......................................43, 231, 232, 233, 234, 235, 237, 238, 239, 240, 241, 562, 563
2D frame ..........................................................................................................................................232
2D lattice girder ...............................................................................................................................232
3D frame .........................................................................................................................................232
3D lattice girder ...............................................................................................................................233
Beam................................................................................................................................................231
Curve ...............................................................................................................................235, 236, 237
Defining a catalogue block ..............................................................................................................238
Defining and editing a catalogue block............................................................................................237
563
SCIA.ESA PT
Mast.................................................................................................................................................234
Parameters .......................................................................................................................................240
Reviewing the block parameters......................................................................................................241
Selecting the type.............................................................................................................................239
Clipping box ..........................................................103, 104, 131, 451, 473, 474, 517, 518, 519, 520, 562
Combinations...........................................66, 335, 337, 338, 339, 340, 341, 344, 345, 346, 347, 432, 433
control toolbar..............................................443, 452, 453, 454, 455, 456, 459, 484, 503, 505, 567, 573
Conventions ...................................................................................................................37, 48, 49, 53, 150
Input quantities conventions ..............................................................................................................48
Output quantities conventions ...........................................................................................................49
Co-ordinate systems....44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 54, 74, 108, 109, 110, 115, 123, 147, 199, 202, 204, 263, 278,
280, 293, 300, 302, 321, 455, 528, 562, 564
Beam co-ordinate system...................................................................................................................46
Cartesian co-ordinate system .............................................................................................................47
Cross-section co-ordinate system....................................................................................................46
Cylindrical co-ordinate system ..........................................................................................................47
Entity co-ordinate system ..................................................................................................................45
Geometric block co-ordinate system .................................................................................................46
Global co-ordinate system .................................................................................................................44
Point definition ..................................................................................................................................47
Spherical co-ordinate system .............................................................................................................48
User-defined co-ordinate system .......................................................................................................44
Copying the entities .......................................................................................................251, 252, 253, 477
Couple..............................................................................................................59, 166, 231, 236, 263, 265
Cross-link.............................................................................................43, 55, 73, 270, 271, 272, 273, 293
cross-section .160, 171, 172, 173, 174, 175, 176, 177, 178, 179, 180, 182, 183, 186, 187, 188, 189, 190,
191, 192, 193, 194, 196, 197, 198
general ....160, 171, 172, 174, 175, 176, 177, 178, 179, 180, 182, 186, 187, 188, 190, 191, 192, 193,
196
Cross-sections38, 41, 43, 44, 45, 46, 59, 63, 69, 71, 85, 93, 133, 134, 146, 147, 148, 149, 150, 151, 152,
153, 154, 155, 156, 157, 158, 159, 160, 161, 162, 163, 166, 167, 168, 169, 170, 171, 184, 203, 205, 207,
208, 211, 212, 213, 214, 216, 231, 232, 233, 234, 235, 238, 240, 278, 407, 466, 486, 487, 488, 498, 507,
508, 521, 522, 525, 563, 564, 578
Bridge cross-section.........................................................................................................................159
Built-up steel cross-section..............................................................................................................156
Computed characteristics.................................................................................................146, 147, 165
Concrete cross-sections....................................................................................................................158
Copying a cross-section ...................................................................................................................170
Defining and editing a cross-section........................................................................................160, 161
Deleting a cross-section ...................................................................................................................170
Editing a cross-setion.......................................................................................................................169
Geometric shapes.............................................................................................................................151
Haunch cross-section .......................................................................................................................155
Import .....................................................................................................................................168, 169
Multi-material cross-section ............................................................................................................157
New cross-section............................................................................................161, 162, 163, 165, 167
Numerical ........................................................................................................................................159
Parameters .......................................................................................................................................150
Replacing a cross-section.................................................................................................................170
Reviewing the computed characteristics..........................................................................................165
Rolled cross-sections .......................................................................................................................152
Selecting the type.............................................................................................................................162
Specifying sectional parameters ..............................................................................................150, 163
Steel rolled and formed cross-sections.............................................................................................152
Thin-walled......................................................................................................................................151
Timber cross-section........................................................................................................................158
Welded hollow cross-sections .........................................................................................................155
Welded steel cross-sections .............................................................................................................154
Curve 36, 43, 55, 74, 82, 84, 117, 150, 215, 231, 232, 233, 235, 240, 244, 259, 265, 266, 267, 268, 269,
270, 301, 303, 395, 474, 475, 549, 550
564
SCIA.ESA PT
Edit ..................................................................................................................265, 266, 267, 268, 269
D
Data check .....................................................................................................................................392, 394
Database manager..................................................................................................69, 70, 71, 72, 290, 460
Deleting the entities .......................................................................................................254, 255, 478, 575
Demo version...........................................................................................................................................40
Detailed beam edit 127, 565, 566, 567, 569, 570, 571, 572, 573, 574, 575, 576, 577, 578, 579, 580, 581,
582, 583, 584, 585, 586, 587, 588, 589, 590, 591
Detailed properties...................................................................................................................................67
Document......36, 38, 41, 42, 53, 61, 62, 63, 72, 83, 84, 91, 106, 126, 140, 165, 204, 422, 442, 485, 486,
487, 488, 489, 490, 491, 492, 493, 494, 495, 496, 497, 498, 499, 500, 501, 502, 503, 504, 505, 506, 508,
513, 514, 562, 564
Document-style view in the preview window.....................................................................145, 166, 241
Dot grid..........................................................................................................117, 118, 119, 120, 445, 470
Dynamics .......................................................................................317, 318, 331, 332, 333, 400, 422, 423
E
Edititing the properties ..........................................................................................................................100
Enlarge.....................................................................................................................................74, 262, 466
ESA.41, 42, 73, 74, 76, 77, 78, 80, 81, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86, 87, 89, 91, 199, 200, 442, 443, 445, 446, 447,
448, 449, 451, 452, 453, 455, 456, 458, 459, 460, 461, 462, 463, 464, 465, 466, 467, 468, 469, 470, 471,
472, 473, 474, 475, 476, 477, 478, 479, 480, 481, 482, 483, 484
About documentation.........................................................................................................................37
About programme ..............................................................................................................................36
Contact address..................................................................................................................................36
Demo version.....................................................................................................................................40
Disclaimer..........................................................................................................................................36
Graphic output 442, 447, 458, 459, 460, 461, 462, 463, 464, 465, 466, 467, 468, 469, 470, 471, 472,
473, 474, 475, 476, 477, 478, 479, 480, 481, 482, 483, 484
Print .................................442, 443, 445, 446, 447, 448, 449, 451, 452, 453, 455, 456, 458, 459, 481
Program files and folders...................................................................................................................41
Programme settings .............................................74, 76, 77, 78, 80, 81, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86, 87, 89, 91
Starting programme ...........................................................................................................................41
Upgrade from EPW ...........................................................................................................................42
Extend..................................................................................................43, 74, 93, 203, 208, 261, 262, 562
F
FEM...............................................................................................................204, 206, 392, 396, 397, 398
Finite elements...............................37, 43, 84, 91, 139, 199, 204, 392, 394, 395, 396, 397, 398, 563, 564
Foundation ...............................43, 199, 278, 280, 281, 285, 287, 288, 289, 290, 291, 292, 293, 297, 395
G
general cross-section.....160, 171, 172, 174, 175, 176, 177, 178, 179, 180, 182, 184, 186, 187, 188, 190,
191, 192, 193
generator of load ....351, 352, 354, 355, 357, 362, 363, 364, 365, 366, 367, 368, 369, 370, 371, 372, 592
Geometry 43, 44, 47, 84, 88, 101, 108, 116, 118, 120, 135, 170, 199, 200, 201, 202, 203, 204, 206, 207,
208, 212, 214, 216, 217, 219, 220, 221, 222, 223, 225, 226, 227, 228, 231, 232, 233, 234, 235, 237, 238,
239, 240, 241, 242, 244, 247, 249, 251, 252, 253, 254, 255, 256, 257, 258, 259, 260, 261, 262, 263, 264,
265, 266, 267, 268, 269, 270, 271, 272, 273, 276, 277, 278, 287, 295, 307, 423, 466, 467, 502, 506, 520,
521, 532, 544, 545, 546, 547, 548, 562, 563
Absence ...................................................................................................................545, 546, 547, 548
Beams .....203, 204, 205, 206, 207, 208, 212, 214, 255, 256, 257, 258, 259, 260, 261, 262, 263, 264,
265, 266, 267, 268, 269, 270, 271, 272, 273, 545
CAD model......................................................................................................................273, 276, 277
Catalogue blocks..............................................................231, 232, 233, 234, 235, 237, 239, 240, 241
Connecting beams............................................................................................269, 270, 271, 272, 273
Copying the entities .........................................................................................................251, 252, 253
Definition of geometry.....................................203, 204, 206, 207, 208, 212, 214, 216, 231, 237, 238
565
SCIA.ESA PT
Deleting the entities .................................................................................................................254, 255
Editing shape ...........................................258, 259, 260, 261, 262, 263, 264, 265, 266, 267, 268, 269
Editing the properties.......................................................................................................255, 256, 502
Linked node .....................................................................................................................270, 271, 272
Model data ...............................................................................................................................278, 287
Modification of geometry ................................243, 244, 245, 246, 247, 248, 249, 250, 251, 257, 502
Nodes .......................................................................................................................199, 200, 201, 202
Point definition ..................................................................................................................................47
Slabs.................................101, 217, 219, 220, 221, 222, 223, 224, 225, 226, 227, 228, 295, 296, 423
User block................................................................................................................................241, 242
Graphic output 83, 126, 442, 443, 445, 446, 447, 448, 449, 450, 451, 452, 453, 454, 455, 456, 457, 458,
459, 460, 461, 462, 463, 464, 465, 466, 467, 468, 469, 470, 471, 472, 473, 474, 475, 476, 477, 478, 479,
480, 481, 482, 483, 484, 485, 486, 487, 498, 502, 503, 504
Document.........................................................................................485, 486, 487, 498, 502, 503, 504
Graphic output gallery .............................................................456, 457, 458, 467, 481, 482, 483, 484
Picture gallery.459, 460, 461, 462, 463, 464, 465, 466, 467, 468, 469, 470, 471, 472, 473, 474, 475,
476, 477, 478, 479, 480
Print .........442, 443, 445, 446, 447, 448, 449, 451, 452, 453, 455, 456, 457, 458, 459, 467, 481, 484
Stamp .......................................................................................................................................449, 453
Graphic output gallery ...................................................................456, 457, 458, 467, 481, 482, 483, 484
H
Hinges....43, 78, 80, 84, 135, 204, 251, 269, 271, 272, 278, 280, 286, 293, 294, 295, 297, 502, 565, 579
I
Import ....................................................................................................................................................167
Initial deformation .................................................................................................................548, 549, 550
Installation .......................................................................................................................38, 39, 40, 41, 77
Demo version.....................................................................................................................................40
Installation options.............................................................................................................................38
Starting programme ...........................................................................................................................41
System requirements..........................................................................................................................40
Uninstalling programme ....................................................................................................................40
J
Join ..................................................................................................................74, 157, 243, 263, 265, 392
L
Layers .....43, 103, 104, 105, 106, 107, 108, 124, 131, 133, 134, 204, 206, 289, 407, 472, 473, 474, 475,
476, 478, 479, 488, 498, 541, 542, 563
Line force on beam ..................................................................................................................97, 302, 307
Line grid ....................................................................74, 84, 117, 120, 122, 123, 124, 125, 126, 463, 464
load351, 352, 354, 355, 356, 357, 358, 360, 361, 362, 363, 364, 365, 376, 377, 382, 383, 384, 385, 386,
387, 592
generator ..................................................351, 352, 354, 355, 356, 358, 360, 362, 363, 364, 365, 592
snow generator.........................................................................................................362, 363, 364, 365
wind generator .........................................................................................................352, 355, 357, 592
Load 43, 45, 55, 63, 64, 73, 74, 77, 80, 81, 82, 84, 85, 87, 93, 97, 99, 127, 135, 136, 138, 199, 205, 243,
244, 251, 278, 300, 301, 302, 304, 305, 306, 307, 308, 309, 310, 311, 312, 314, 316, 317, 318, 319, 320,
321, 322, 323, 324, 325, 326, 327, 328, 329, 330, 331, 332, 333, 334, 335, 336, 339, 348, 350, 351, 366,
367, 368, 370, 371, 372, 373, 374, 375, 388, 390, 391, 395, 399, 400, 401, 402, 407, 408, 411, 423, 449,
453, 454, 462, 463, 487, 488, 490, 491, 493, 495, 496, 498, 503, 520, 521, 523, 525, 529, 530, 531, 532,
536, 541, 542, 543, 544, 562, 563, 564, 565, 567, 569, 570, 581, 582, 583, 584, 585
Copy.................................................................................................................................................327
Delete...............................................................................................................................................327
Displacement ...........................................................................................................308, 309, 310, 311
Dynamic load case ...................................................................................317, 318, 331, 332, 333, 423
Edit load...........................................................................................................................................327
Free loads.................................................................................................................................318, 319
566
SCIA.ESA PT
generator ..........................................................................366, 367, 368, 369, 370, 371, 372, 373, 375
Line load ..........................................................................................302, 304, 320, 321, 324, 325, 326
Load case .........................................................................317, 318, 328, 329, 330, 331, 332, 333, 423
Load case combination ............................................................................................336, 339, 348, 350
Load group.......................................................................................................................333, 334, 335
Moment load............................................................................................................................306, 307
Move................................................................................................................................................327
Point displacement...................................................................................................308, 309, 310, 311
Point load.................................................................................300, 301, 320, 321, 323, 324, 325, 326
Predefined load ........................................................................................................541, 542, 543, 544
Result class ..............................................................................................................................350, 351
Slab displacement ....................................................................................................................312, 326
Surface load .............................................................................................305, 314, 321, 325, 326, 373
Thermal load............................................................................................................................307, 325
M
Manager.41, 59, 60, 69, 70, 71, 76, 77, 87, 105, 106, 107, 110, 111, 112, 113, 114, 122, 125, 140, 141,
142, 143, 144, 150, 160, 161, 163, 165, 166, 170, 171, 202, 204, 237, 238, 240, 241, 288, 290, 291, 297,
328, 329, 333, 334, 339, 340, 350, 391, 460, 461, 463, 465, 466, 467, 468, 469, 472, 481, 482, 483, 484,
497, 501, 520, 521, 523, 525, 526, 528, 530, 533, 534, 541, 542, 549, 550, 563, 564
Mass groups...................................................................................................................133, 390, 391, 587
Masses84, 88, 135, 136, 278, 331, 388, 389, 390, 391, 521, 522, 565, 567, 569, 586, 587, 588, 589, 590
Material...37, 41, 69, 79, 97, 133, 134, 139, 140, 141, 142, 143, 144, 145, 146, 147, 150, 151, 152, 154,
155, 156, 157, 158, 159, 162, 170, 203, 204, 212, 280, 282, 288, 290, 388, 408, 411, 417, 418, 487, 498,
506, 508, 563
Model data ......88, 135, 251, 278, 280, 282, 283, 286, 287, 288, 289, 290, 291, 292, 293, 294, 295, 297,
298, 299, 327, 390, 503, 565, 569, 572, 573, 574, 576, 595
Editing the model data .....................................................................................................................297
Foundation .......................................................................................287, 288, 289, 290, 291, 292, 293
Hinges..............................................................................................................................293, 294, 295
Subsoil .............................................................................................................................291, 292, 293
Supports ...................................................................................278, 279, 280, 282, 283, 286, 287, 595
Modification of geometry .....228, 240, 243, 244, 245, 246, 247, 248, 249, 250, 251, 252, 253, 254, 255,
257
Copying the entities .........................................................................................................251, 252, 253
Deleting the entities .................................................................................................................254, 255
Mirror entity ............................................................................................................................247, 250
Move additional-data entities...........................................................................................................251
Move entity..............................................................................................................245, 246, 248, 249
Rotate entity.............................................................................................................................248, 249
Rules ................................................................................................................................244, 257, 258
Types of moving of entities .............................................................................................................243
N
Nodes ..43, 55, 64, 74, 84, 85, 98, 117, 129, 134, 136, 137, 199, 200, 201, 202, 203, 206, 239, 244, 245,
246, 248, 249, 253, 255, 257, 259, 264, 265, 269, 270, 272, 273, 278, 285, 287, 293, 295, 298, 301, 302,
306, 308, 309, 321, 323, 324, 326, 388, 389, 390, 392, 393, 395, 396, 402, 413, 414, 422, 487, 488, 490,
491, 498, 502, 528, 531, 563
Linked nodes....................................................................................................................257, 270, 271
Non-linearity......73, 80, 204, 206, 256, 399, 405, 548, 549, 550, 551, 552, 555, 557, 558, 559, 560, 561
Beam nonlinearity............................................................................................550, 551, 552, 555, 557
Initial deformation ...........................................................................................................548, 549, 550
Plastic hinges ...........................................................................................................558, 559, 560, 561
O
Operating the programme ..................................................................................................................53, 59
Advanced elements of user interface .................................................................................................59
Optimisation ............................................................................................................................................65
Options....37, 38, 50, 54, 55, 61, 64, 72, 73, 74, 75, 76, 77, 78, 79, 80, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86, 87, 89, 91, 97,
103, 107, 118, 119, 124, 126, 133, 138, 150, 202, 205, 207, 208, 212, 214, 239, 253, 255, 273, 300, 334,
567
SCIA.ESA PT
394, 399, 400, 401, 404, 407, 412, 414, 442, 446, 449, 452, 454, 455, 458, 463, 474, 475, 476, 480, 483,
484, 485, 486, 494, 498, 502, 503, 504, 512, 513, 523, 550
Programme settings .............................................74, 76, 77, 78, 80, 81, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86, 87, 89, 91
Orientation ..43, 44, 46, 47, 54, 57, 84, 112, 113, 170, 202, 203, 205, 243, 244, 250, 263, 264, 279, 280,
282, 285, 301, 303, 445, 449, 567
Reverse ............................................................................................................................................263
Output 41, 49, 73, 77, 83, 87, 106, 140, 204, 442, 443, 444, 447, 451, 452, 458, 483, 485, 486, 562, 563
P
Parabola .................................................................................................................214, 231, 236, 267, 268
Parametric input.......................................................80, 520, 521, 523, 524, 525, 526, 528, 530, 532, 534
Perspective.............................................................................................................................126, 132, 451
Picture gallery.91, 442, 459, 460, 461, 462, 463, 464, 465, 466, 467, 468, 469, 470, 471, 472, 473, 474,
475, 476, 477, 478, 479, 480, 483, 563
Plane load generator ..............................................................................366, 367, 368, 369, 370, 371, 372
Polygon..........................................................44, 94, 95, 97, 214, 216, 235, 264, 265, 443, 474, 475, 564
Edit ..........................................................................................................................................264, 265
Pop-up menu...53, 61, 62, 72, 95, 126, 127, 128, 129, 131, 215, 247, 248, 249, 250, 252, 259, 260, 272,
298, 299, 408, 443, 444, 455, 456, 473, 486, 500, 506, 514, 520
Predefined load ....................................................................................43, 73, 84, 300, 302, 541, 542, 543
Preview61, 63, 70, 144, 145, 165, 166, 241, 396, 402, 404, 422, 443, 446, 447, 450, 453, 460, 461, 462,
481, 485, 503, 504, 505, 506, 507, 514, 563, 564
Print ..72, 76, 126, 146, 163, 204, 328, 333, 350, 391, 408, 442, 443, 444, 445, 446, 447, 448, 449, 451,
452, 453, 455, 456, 457, 458, 459, 460, 461, 465, 467, 469, 481, 482, 484, 485, 486, 489, 493, 498, 503,
504, 505, 513, 533, 563
Progress bar .............................................................................................................................................60
R
Redraw graphical window .....................................................................................................................138
Refresh of results ...................................................................................................................432, 433, 514
Regenerate graphical window................................................................................................................138
Result class ............................................................................................................................350, 351, 408
Results ..36, 44, 45, 50, 53, 61, 62, 64, 79, 84, 85, 88, 119, 122, 133, 137, 138, 140, 147, 156, 206, 235,
243, 244, 249, 264, 273, 300, 331, 349, 350, 351, 391, 392, 399, 403, 404, 407, 408, 411, 413, 414, 415,
417, 418, 419, 420, 421, 422, 425, 426, 429, 430, 431, 436, 437, 442, 449, 463, 488, 492, 494, 498, 499,
502, 508, 520, 528, 534, 562, 565, 567, 591
Reverse orientation ................................................................................................................................263
S
Scale ..............................................................74, 87, 88, 89, 127, 259, 402, 411, 451, 461, 465, 478, 569
Seismicity ......................................................................................................................318, 332, 333, 400
Selections..38, 43, 54, 57, 59, 61, 64, 74, 77, 78, 80, 83, 85, 93, 96, 97, 98, 99, 100, 103, 104, 107, 110,
115, 126, 129, 146, 152, 154, 155, 161, 162, 202, 204, 212, 239, 245, 246, 247, 249, 250, 251, 252, 253,
254, 256, 259, 260, 261, 262, 263, 264, 265, 266, 267, 268, 269, 270, 271, 272, 297, 339, 351, 407, 408,
422, 463, 470, 472, 478, 479, 480, 483, 489, 498, 504, 525, 526, 541, 569, 570
Slabs ......................101, 217, 219, 220, 221, 222, 223, 224, 225, 226, 227, 228, 295, 423, 425, 426, 431
SNAP modes............................................................................................54, 116, 117, 118, 470, 474, 477
snow generator...............................................................................................................362, 363, 364, 365
spans ..............................................................................................376, 377, 378, 379, 380, 382, 384, 386
Spline .....................................................................................................................215, 259, 267, 269, 474
Stamp .............................................................................................................................442, 450, 453, 564
Stretch......................................................................................................74, 127, 260, 452, 454, 458, 478
Subsoil.....................................................................................................81, 278, 281, 290, 291, 292, 293
Supports ......40, 43, 49, 50, 74, 79, 80, 84, 85, 86, 97, 126, 135, 138, 199, 243, 251, 278, 280, 282, 283,
285, 286, 287, 288, 289, 290, 291, 293, 297, 308, 310, 327, 350, 390, 399, 414, 445, 463, 478, 488, 502,
528, 562, 565, 570, 580, 595
T
Table composer......................................................................485, 500, 506, 507, 508, 512, 513, 514, 564
568
SCIA.ESA PT
Templates.......................................................................................................................536, 537, 538, 539
Terminology ......................................................................43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49, 50, 52, 59, 199, 328
Conventions .................................................................................................................................48, 49
Co-ordinate systems...................................................................................................44, 45, 46, 47, 48
Point definition ..................................................................................................................................47
Units.......................................................................................................................................49, 50, 52
Trim ...............................................................................................................................................260, 478
U
Units .49, 50, 51, 52, 54, 84, 85, 86, 87, 88, 140, 147, 151, 152, 154, 155, 156, 157, 165, 200, 205, 214,
251, 301, 302, 303, 466, 467, 542, 563
Upgrade ...................................................................................................................................................42
Upgrade from EPW ...........................................................................................................................42
User block......................................................................................................................................241, 242
User co-ordinate system...................45, 54, 57, 74, 76, 108, 109, 110, 111, 112, 113, 114, 115, 208, 303
User interface.........................42, 53, 54, 55, 57, 59, 61, 62, 63, 64, 69, 71, 72, 73, 74, 77, 115, 300, 562
Command line....................................................................................................................................57
Database managers ..........................................................................................................69, 70, 71, 72
Document window.......................................................................................................................61, 62
Graphical window..............................................................................................................................61
Managers ...............................................................................................................................69, 71, 72
Menu..................................................................................................................................................55
Pop-up menu......................................................................................................................................61
Preview window ..........................................................................................................................61, 63
Property window................................................................................................................................64
Status bar .....................................................................................................................................54, 55
Title bar..............................................................................................................................................54
Toolbar...............................................................................................................................................57
Tree menu ....................................................................................................................................55, 56
V
View parameters ....................................................................................................132, 133, 134, 137, 138
Viewpoint ..............................................................................................................129, 131, 132, 133, 564
W
wind generator ...............................................................................................................352, 355, 357, 592
Working plane .................................54, 57, 58, 94, 95, 103, 104, 113, 115, 118, 250, 259, 449, 517, 519
Working tools .93, 96, 97, 98, 99, 100, 103, 104, 105, 106, 107, 108, 109, 110, 111, 112, 113, 114, 115,
116, 117, 118, 119, 120, 122, 123, 124, 125, 126, 128, 129, 131, 132, 133, 137, 138, 517, 518, 519, 520,
521, 523, 525, 526, 528, 530, 532, 534, 536, 537, 538, 539, 540, 565, 566, 567, 569, 570, 571, 572, 573,
574, 575, 576, 577, 578, 579, 580, 581, 582, 583, 584, 585, 586, 587, 588, 589, 590, 591
Activity ............................................................................................................................103, 104, 105
Advanced tools ................................................................................517, 518, 536, 537, 538, 539, 540
Clipping box ............................................................................................................517, 518, 519, 520
Detailed beam edit ..565, 566, 567, 569, 570, 571, 572, 573, 574, 575, 576, 577, 578, 579, 580, 581,
582, 583, 584, 585, 586, 587, 588, 589, 590, 591
Dot grid....................................................................................................................................118, 119
Layers ......................................................................................................................105, 106, 107, 108
Line grid ..........................................................................................................120, 122, 123, 124, 125
Parametric input...............................................................520, 521, 523, 525, 526, 528, 530, 532, 534
Perspective...............................................................................................................................132, 133
Pop-up menu............................................................................................................................126, 128
Regeneration of view .......................................................................................................................138
Selections.............................................................................................93, 94, 96, 97, 98, 99, 100, 101
SNAP modes....................................................................................................................116, 117, 118
Templates.................................................................................................................536, 537, 538, 539
UCS .................................................................................................................................................108
User co-ordinate system...........................................................108, 109, 110, 111, 112, 113, 114, 115
View parameters ......................................................................................................132, 133, 137, 138
Viewpoint ................................................................................................................129, 131, 132, 133
569
SCIA.ESA PT
Working plane .................................................................................................................................115
Zoom................................................................................................................................129, 131, 133
Z
Zoom........................72, 126, 129, 130, 131, 133, 402, 443, 444, 446, 455, 456, 470, 471, 473, 518, 564
570